US20160161472A1 - Quantitative dna-based imaging and super-resolution imaging - Google Patents

Quantitative dna-based imaging and super-resolution imaging Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20160161472A1
US20160161472A1 US14/908,333 US201414908333A US2016161472A1 US 20160161472 A1 US20160161472 A1 US 20160161472A1 US 201414908333 A US201414908333 A US 201414908333A US 2016161472 A1 US2016161472 A1 US 2016161472A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
strand
drift
protein
labeled imager
docking
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US14/908,333
Inventor
Ralf Jungmann
Peng Yin
Mingjie Dai
Maier S. Avendano Amado
Johannes B. Woehrstein
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Harvard College
Original Assignee
Harvard College
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=52432405&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=US20160161472(A1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by Harvard College filed Critical Harvard College
Priority to US14/908,333 priority Critical patent/US20160161472A1/en
Assigned to PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE reassignment PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: AVENDANO, Maier, DAI, Mingjie, JUNGMANN, RALF, WOEHRSTEIN, JOHANNES B., YIN, PENG
Publication of US20160161472A1 publication Critical patent/US20160161472A1/en
Assigned to NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH (NIH), U.S. DEPT. OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES (DHHS), U.S. GOVERNMENT reassignment NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH (NIH), U.S. DEPT. OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES (DHHS), U.S. GOVERNMENT CONFIRMATORY LICENSE (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: HARVARD UNIVERSITY
Assigned to NAVY, SECRETARY OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA reassignment NAVY, SECRETARY OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA CONFIRMATORY LICENSE (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: HARVARD UNIVERSITY
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/5308Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for analytes not provided for elsewhere, e.g. nucleic acids, uric acid, worms, mites
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/18Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6804Nucleic acid analysis using immunogens
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6813Hybridisation assays
    • C12Q1/6816Hybridisation assays characterised by the detection means
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6813Hybridisation assays
    • C12Q1/6841In situ hybridisation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F18/00Pattern recognition
    • G06F18/10Pre-processing; Data cleansing
    • G06F19/24
    • G06F19/26
    • G06K9/38
    • G06K9/4642
    • G06K9/6206
    • G06K9/6212
    • G06K9/6298
    • G06T7/204
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06TIMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
    • G06T7/00Image analysis
    • G06T7/20Analysis of motion
    • G06T7/246Analysis of motion using feature-based methods, e.g. the tracking of corners or segments
    • G06T7/248Analysis of motion using feature-based methods, e.g. the tracking of corners or segments involving reference images or patches
    • GPHYSICS
    • G16INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16BBIOINFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR GENETIC OR PROTEIN-RELATED DATA PROCESSING IN COMPUTATIONAL MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
    • G16B40/00ICT specially adapted for biostatistics; ICT specially adapted for bioinformatics-related machine learning or data mining, e.g. knowledge discovery or pattern finding
    • GPHYSICS
    • G16INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16BBIOINFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR GENETIC OR PROTEIN-RELATED DATA PROCESSING IN COMPUTATIONAL MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
    • G16B40/00ICT specially adapted for biostatistics; ICT specially adapted for bioinformatics-related machine learning or data mining, e.g. knowledge discovery or pattern finding
    • G16B40/10Signal processing, e.g. from mass spectrometry [MS] or from PCR
    • GPHYSICS
    • G16INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16BBIOINFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR GENETIC OR PROTEIN-RELATED DATA PROCESSING IN COMPUTATIONAL MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
    • G16B45/00ICT specially adapted for bioinformatics-related data visualisation, e.g. displaying of maps or networks
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/70Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by effect upon binding to a cell or to an antigen
    • C07K2317/76Antagonist effect on antigen, e.g. neutralization or inhibition of binding
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/195Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature from bacteria
    • G01N2333/36Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature from bacteria from Actinomyces; from Streptomyces (G)
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2458/00Labels used in chemical analysis of biological material
    • G01N2458/10Oligonucleotides as tagging agents for labelling antibodies

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates generally to the field of detection and quantification of targets.
  • the present disclosure provides, inter alia, methods, compositions (e.g., conjugates) and kits for imaging, at high or low spatial resolution, targets (e.g., biomolecules) of interest in, for example, a cellular environment.
  • targets e.g., biomolecules
  • the methods, compositions and kits of the present disclosure take advantage of repetitive, transient binding of short, labeled (e.g., fluorescently labeled) oligonucleotides (e.g., DNA oligonucleotides), or “imager” strands, to complementary “docking” strands, which are attached to targets of interest, in some embodiments, through an intermediate molecule such as an antibody such as a primary or a secondary antibody, to obtain stochastic switching between fluorescent ON- and OFF-states ( FIGS.
  • labeled e.g., fluorescently labeled
  • oligonucleotides e.g., DNA oligonucleotides
  • imager imager
  • a binding partner e.g., a protein-binding moiety or a nucleic acid-binding moiety, whether primary or secondary
  • a binding partner e.g., a protein-binding moiety or a nucleic acid-binding moiety, whether primary or secondary
  • targets e.g., biomolecules, optionally in a cellular environment
  • fluorescently-labeled imager strands that are complementary to and bind to the docking strands through transient Watson-Crick interactions.
  • the methods of the present disclosure are not limited by the number of spectrally distinct fluorophores available for detecting distinct targets (e.g., biomolecules).
  • nucleic acid e.g., DNA and/or RNA
  • sequential time-lapsed imaging are used herein to provide images of up to hundreds of distinct species of targets using, in some embodiments, only a single optimized fluorophore.
  • these different species of targets e.g., biomolecules
  • the methods can be used to generate super-resolution images, significantly even without the need for a super-resolution microscope. It should be understood that while the methods, compositions and kits as provided herein may be described for use in super-resolution imaging, they may also be used, in some embodiments, for imaging that does not require super-resolution. Thus, in some embodiments, the methods, compositions and kits of the present disclosure may be used for imaging, generally.
  • a protein-nucleic acid conjugate comprising a protein linked to a docking strand that is capable of transiently binding to a complementary labeled imager strand.
  • a protein-nucleic acid conjugate comprising a protein linked to a docking strand that is transiently bound to a complementary labeled imager strand.
  • Imager strands are labeled with a detectable label.
  • the detectable label may be, for example, a fluorescent label or other detectable label, e.g., gold nanoparticle.
  • a fluorescently-labeled imager strand (which may be detected by, for example, fluorescent microscopy) may be interchanged with an imager strand labeled with, for example, gold nanoparticles (which may be detected by, for example, dark field microscopy).
  • the docking strands may be capable of transiently binding a plurality of complementary labeled strands (e.g., the docking strand may comprise a plurality of binding sites for complementary labeled strands).
  • a method may be carried out involving a plurality of docking strand and imager strand pairs.
  • Such a method can be used to detect a plurality of targets (e.g., with each docking strand-imager strand pair corresponding to one target).
  • the docking strand-imager strand pairs in the plurality must share an approximately equal probability of hybridizing under a single environment or condition (as defined for example by temperature, salt concentration, strand molarity, etc.), such that if there is an observed difference between the level of binding (and thus the detection) of a population of imager strands, an end user can conclude that such difference is a function of the amount of docking strand and thus ultimately the amount of target.
  • the docking and imager strands are typically selected such that their bound states have a thermal stability in the range of about +/ ⁇ 0.5 kcal/mol. With this range of thermal stability, it is possible to select at least 200 orthogonal (e.g., different) sequences to be used in these multiplexing methods.
  • a protein is an antibody such as a primary antibody or a secondary antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
  • a protein is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker.
  • the intermediate linker comprises biotin and streptavidin.
  • an antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
  • a complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strand comprises at least one fluorophore.
  • a complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides, or about 8 to about 10 nucleotides, in length. In some embodiments, a complementary labeled imager strand is longer than 30 nucleotides.
  • the docking strand may comprise a plurality of domains, each complementary to a labeled imager strand.
  • the domains may be identical in sequence (and thus will bind to the identical imager strands) or they may be of different sequence (and thus may bind to imager strands that are not identically labeled). Such domains may also be referred to herein as binding sites for imager strands.
  • a docking strand includes at least two or at least three domains, each respectively complementary to a labeled imager strand.
  • a target bound to at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate is provided herein.
  • the target is a protein. In some embodiments, the target is a nucleic acid (e.g., DNA or RNA).
  • a plurality of protein-nucleic acid conjugates In some embodiments, the plurality comprises at least two subsets of the protein-nucleic acid conjugates, and the protein-nucleic acid conjugates of each subset bind to different targets.
  • composition or kit comprising a plurality of protein-nucleic acid conjugates, optionally wherein at least one of the protein-nucleic acid conjugates is bound to at least one target.
  • composition or kit comprising at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate that comprises a protein linked to a docking strand, optionally wherein the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate is bound to a target, and at least one complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is transiently bound to (or is capable of transiently binding to) the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate.
  • a composition or kit comprises at least two complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands, wherein the at least two complementary labeled imager strands are identical. In some embodiments, the composition or kit comprises at least two complementary labeled imager strands, wherein the at least two complementary labeled imager strands are different.
  • the number of complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands is less than, greater than or equal to the number of protein-nucleic acid conjugates.
  • a composition or kit comprises at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 or 10 different complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands. In some embodiments, the composition or kit comprises at least 50 or at least 100 different complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strands.
  • a composition or a kit comprising a (e.g., one or more) docking strand and an (e.g., one or more) imager strand.
  • the docking strand may be modified to include an affinity label, thereby facilitating its subsequent attachment to one or more binding partners, such as an antibodies.
  • the docking strand may be biotinylated or it may be attached to avidin or streptavidin. Other affinity labels can be used instead.
  • the imager strands may be labeled, such as fluorescently labeled.
  • the imager strands may be a plurality of identical imager strands (e.g., with respect to sequence and label) or they may be a plurality of different imager strands (e.g., with respect to sequence and label).
  • the composition or kit may further comprise a target-specific binding partner, such as an antibody. It is to be understood that the components may be bound to each other or they may be unbound, including physically separated from each other, in such compositions and kits. These and other compositions and kits may further comprise one or more buffers including oxygen scavengers.
  • composition or kit comprising an antibody-nucleic acid conjugate, wherein the antibody is a “secondary antibody” having specificity for an antibody, typically specificity for a particular isotype or an Fc domain of an antibody from a particular species (e.g., a mouse antibody that is specific for a human IgG1 antibody).
  • the nucleic acid in the conjugate is a docking strand, as described herein.
  • the composition or kit may further comprise one or more imager strands (or one or more subsets or populations of imager strands), as described herein. These and other compositions and kits may further comprise one or more buffers including oxygen scavengers.
  • the present disclosure provides an antibody-DNA conjugate, comprising a monoclonal antibody linked to a docking strand that is bound to a complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand, wherein the antibody and the docking strand are each biotinylated and linked to each other through an avidin or streptavidin linker or a biotin-streptavidin linker.
  • an aptamer-nucleic acid conjugate comprising a nucleic acid aptamer linked to a docking strand that is transiently bound to a complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand.
  • a method of detecting a target in a sample comprising contacting a sample with (a) at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate that comprises a protein linked to a docking strand and (b) at least one fluorescently-labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate, and determining whether the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate binds to the target in the sample.
  • the determining step comprises imaging transient binding of the at least one fluorescently-labeled imager strand to the docking strand of the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate.
  • a method of detecting a target in a sample comprising contacting a sample with (a) at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate that comprises a protein linked to a docking strand and (b) at least one fluorescently-labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate, and imaging transient binding, optionally using time-lapsed imaging, of the at least one fluorescently-labeled imager strand to the docking strand of the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate.
  • a protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
  • an antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
  • a protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker.
  • an intermediate linker comprises biotin and/or streptavidin.
  • a complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strand comprises at least one fluorophore.
  • a complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand is about 4 to about 10 nucleotides, or about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
  • a sample is a cell or cell lysate.
  • a target is a protein.
  • a target is a nucleic acid (e.g., DNA or RNA).
  • a target is obtained from a cell or cell lysate.
  • a method of detecting at least one or at least two targets in a sample comprising contacting a sample with (a) at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates, each comprising a protein linked to a docking strand, and (b) at least two labeled (optionally spectrally distinct, or fluorescently labeled, or spectrally distinct and fluorescently labeled) imager strands that are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the at least one, or at least, two different protein-nucleic acid conjugates and determining whether the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates bind to at least two targets in the sample.
  • the determining step comprises, in the following order, imaging transient binding of one of the at least two labeled imager strands to a docking strand of one of the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates to produce a first image (e.g., of a fluorescent signal), and imaging transient binding of another of the at least two labeled imager strands to a docking strand of another of the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates to produce at least one other image (e.g., of a fluorescent signal).
  • the method further comprises combining the first image and the at least one other image to produce a composite image of signal (e.g., fluorescent signal), wherein the signal of the composite image is representative of the at least two targets.
  • a protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
  • an antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
  • a protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker.
  • an intermediate linker comprises biotin and streptavidin.
  • each of the at least two spectrally distinct, fluorescently-labeled imager strands comprises at least one fluorophore.
  • each of the at least two labeled, optionally spectrally distinct, fluorescently labeled, imager strands is about 4 to about 10 nucleotides, or about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
  • a sample is a cell or cell lysate.
  • At least two targets are proteins. In some embodiments, at least two targets are nucleic acids (e.g., DNA or RNA).
  • At least two targets are obtained from a cell or cell lysate.
  • a method of detecting at least one, or at least two, protein targets in a sample comprising (a) contacting a sample with at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates, each comprising a protein linked to a docking strand and (b) sequentially contacting the sample with at least two labeled (e.g., optionally spectrally indistinct, or fluorescently labeled, or spectrally distinct and fluorescently labeled) imager strands that are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates, and determining whether the at least one or at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates bind to at least two targets in the sample.
  • at least two labeled e.g., optionally spectrally indistinct, or fluorescently labeled, or spectrally distinct and fluorescently labeled
  • a method comprises, in the following ordered steps, contacting the sample with a first protein-nucleic acid conjugate and at least one other protein-nucleic acid conjugate, contacting the sample with a first labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first protein-nucleic acid conjugate, imaging the sample to obtain a first image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging, removing the first labeled imager strand, contacting the sample with at least one other labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other protein-nucleic acid conjugate, and imaging the sample to obtain at least one other image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging.
  • a method comprises, in the following ordered steps, contacting a sample with a first protein-nucleic acid conjugate, contacting the sample with a first labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first protein-nucleic acid conjugate, imaging the sample to obtain a first image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging, removing the first labeled imager strand, contacting the sample with at least one other protein-nucleic acid conjugate, contacting the sample with at least one other labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other protein-nucleic acid conjugate, and imaging the sample to obtain at least one other image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging.
  • a method further comprises determining whether the first protein-DNA conjugate binds to a first target and/or whether the at least one other protein-DNA conjugate binds to at least one other target.
  • a method further comprises assigning a pseudo-color to the signal (e.g., fluorescent signal) in a first image, and assigning at least one other pseudo-color to the fluorescent signal in the at least one other image.
  • a pseudo-color to the signal (e.g., fluorescent signal) in a first image
  • assigning at least one other pseudo-color to the fluorescent signal in the at least one other image assigning a pseudo-color to the signal (e.g., fluorescent signal) in a first image, and assigning at least one other pseudo-color to the fluorescent signal in the at least one other image.
  • a method further comprises combining a first image and the at least one other image to produce a composite image of the pseudo-colored signals, wherein the pseudo-colored signals of the composite image are representative of the at least two targets.
  • the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate(s) is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
  • the antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
  • the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate(s) is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker.
  • the intermediate linker comprises biotin and/or streptavidin.
  • each of the fluorescently-labeled imager strands comprises at least one fluorophore.
  • each of the fluorescently-labeled imager strands is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides, or about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
  • a sample is a cell or cell lysate.
  • a target(s) is a protein. In some embodiments, a target(s) is a nucleic acid (e.g., DNA or RNA).
  • a target(s) is obtained from a cell or cell lysate.
  • a method of detecting a target, optionally a naturally-occurring biomolecule comprising contacting a sample containing at least one target, optionally a naturally-occurring biomolecule, with (a) at least one BP-NA conjugate, optionally each BP-NA conjugate comprising a protein or nucleic acid linked to a docking strand, and (b) at least one labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds the docking strand of the at least one BP-NA conjugate, and determining whether the at least one BP-NA conjugate binds to at least one target, optionally a naturally-occurring biomolecule, in the sample.
  • the method may be carried out using a sample that is suspected of containing at least one target or a sample that an end-user desires to analyze for the presence of the at least one target without any prior knowledge of the sample respecting its likelihood of containing the target.
  • the determining step comprises imaging transient binding of the at least one labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand to the docking strand of the at least one BP-NA conjugate.
  • a sample is a cell or cell lysate.
  • an at least one target is obtained from a cell or cell lysate.
  • a protein is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer. In some embodiments, an antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
  • a protein is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker.
  • an intermediate linker comprises biotin and/or streptavidin.
  • a nucleic acid is a nucleic acid aptamer.
  • a fluorescently-labeled imager strand comprises at least one fluorophore.
  • an imager strand optionally a fluorescently-labeled imager strand, is about 4 to about 30, or about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
  • a method of detecting a target, optionally a naturally-occurring biomolecule comprising contacting a sample containing at least two targets, optionally naturally-occurring biomolecules, with (a) at least two different BP-NA conjugates, optionally each BP-NA conjugate comprising a protein or nucleic acid linked to a DNA docking strand, and (b) at least two labeled (optionally spectrally indistinct, or fluorescently labeled, or spectrally distinct and fluorescently labeled) imager strands that are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the at least two BP-NA conjugates, and determining whether the at least two BP-NA conjugates bind to at least one or at least two naturally-occurring biomolecules in the sample.
  • a method comprises, in the following ordered steps, contacting the sample with a first BP-NA conjugate and at least one other BP-NA conjugate, contacting the sample with a first labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first BP-NA conjugate, imaging the sample to obtain a first image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging, removing the first labeled imager strand, contacting the sample with at least one other labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other BP-NA conjugate, and imaging the sample to obtain at least one other image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging.
  • a method comprises, in the following ordered steps, contacting the sample with a first BP-NA conjugate, contacting the sample with a first labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first BP-NA conjugate, imaging the sample to obtain a first image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging, removing the first labeled imager strand, contacting the sample with at least one other BP-NA conjugate, contacting the sample with at least one other labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other BP-NA conjugate, and imaging the sample to obtain a at least one other image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging.
  • a method further comprises determining whether the first protein DNA conjugate binds to a first target, optionally a naturally-occurring biomolecule, and/or whether the at least one other protein-DNA conjugate binds to at least one other target, optionally a naturally-occurring biomolecule.
  • a method further comprises assigning a pseudo-color to the signal (e.g., fluorescent signal) in a first image, and assigning at least one other pseudo-color to the signal (e.g., fluorescent signal) in at least one other image.
  • a pseudo-color to the signal (e.g., fluorescent signal) in a first image
  • at least one other pseudo-color to the signal (e.g., fluorescent signal) in at least one other image.
  • a method further comprises combining a first image and at least one other image to produce a composite image of pseudo-colored signals, wherein the pseudo-colored signals of the composite image are representative of at least one, or at least two, targets (e.g., naturally-occurring biomolecules).
  • a method of determining the number of targets in a test sample comprising obtaining a sample that comprises targets transiently bound directly or indirectly to labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands, obtaining a time-lapsed image, optionally a time-lapsed diffraction-limited fluorescence image, of the sample, performing spot detection (e.g., fluorescence spot detection) and localization (e.g., through the use of Gaussian fitting) on the diffraction-limited image to obtain a high-resolution image of the sample, calibrating k on ⁇ c imager , optionally using a control sample with a known number of targets, wherein k on is a second order association constant, and c imager is concentration of labeled (e.g., fluorescently labeled) imager strands in the test sample, determining variable ⁇ d , optionally by fitting the fluorescence OFF-time distribution to a cumulative distribution function, and determining the number
  • a method of determining a relative amount of targets in a test sample comprising obtaining a sample that comprises targets transiently bound directly or indirectly to labeled imager strands, obtaining a time-lapsed image of the sample, performing spot detection and localization on the image to obtain a high-resolution image of the sample, determining variable ⁇ d , and determining the relative amount of two or more test targets in the sample based on ⁇ d .
  • test targets are protein targets.
  • protein targets are bound to protein-nucleic acid conjugates that comprise a protein linked to a docking strand, and the labeled (e.g., fluorescently labeled) imager strands are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the protein-nucleic acid conjugates.
  • labeled e.g., fluorescently labeled
  • the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
  • test targets are single-stranded nucleic acids.
  • single-stranded nucleic acids are DNA or RNA.
  • each of the fluorescently-labeled imager strands comprises at least one fluorophore.
  • each of the labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides, or about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
  • a time-lapsed fluorescence image is obtained over a period of about 25 minutes.
  • the number of test targets is determined with an accuracy of greater than 90%.
  • a single-stranded DNA probe comprising a target binding domain of about 20 nucleotides in length linked, optionally at its 3′ end, to a docking domain of at least one, at least two, or at least three subdomains, wherein the at at least one, least two, or at least three subdomains are respectively complementary to at least one, at least two, or at least three labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands of about 4 to about 30, or about 8 to 10 nucleotides in length, and wherein the target binding domain is bound to a complementary domain of a single-stranded mRNA target strand.
  • At least one of the at least one, at least two, or at least three subdomains is transiently bound to at least one labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand.
  • a method of performing drift correction for a plurality of images comprising determining a time trace for each of a plurality of drift markers identified in the plurality of images, wherein a time trace for each drift marker corresponds to movement of an object in the image over the time sequence of images, determining, with at least one computer processor, a first drift correction from at least one of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift markers, determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images, wherein each drift template in the plurality of drift templates describes a geometrical relationship between the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites of transient events in the drift template, determining a second drift correction based, at
  • a method further comprises identifying a plurality of localizations in each of the plurality of images, creating a two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations, and identifying locations of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the two-dimensional histogram, wherein determining the time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers comprises determining the time traces based, at least in part, on the locations of the plurality of drift markers.
  • identifying a plurality of localizations comprises identifying a plurality of spots on each of the plurality of images, and determining a fitted center position of each of the plurality of spots using a local Gaussian fitting algorithm, wherein each of the plurality of localizations comprises the spot identified on an image and its associated fitted center position.
  • each of the plurality of localizations further comprises a detected photon count corresponding to the localization.
  • creating the two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations comprises binning all localizations into a two-dimensional grid and using a total number of localizations in each bin as a histogram count.
  • creating the two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations comprises binning all localizations into a two-dimensional grid and using a total number of photon count of the plurality of localizations in each bin as a histogram count.
  • identifying locations of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the two-dimensional histogram comprises at least one of the following: binarizing the two-dimensional histogram using one or more selection criteria, wherein the one or more selection criteria include a lower-bound threshold of a histogram value or a upper-bound threshold of a histogram value; partitioning the binarized image into partitions and filtering the partitions based on one or more selection criteria, wherein the one or more selection criteria include one or more of a lower-bound threshold of an area of a partition area, an upper-bound threshold of the area, a lower-bound or an upper-bound of a longest or shortest linear dimension of a partition longest, and a lower-bound or an upper-bound of an eccentricity of a partition; and expanding and shrinking the binarized image using one or more binary image operations, wherein the one or more binary image operations include one or more of the following: dilate, erode, bridge, close, open, fill, clean, top-hat,
  • determining a first drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift markers comprises: determining a relative time trace for each of the plurality of drift markers, wherein the relative time trace is determined by comparing the time trace for the drift marker with the average position of the same trace; and determining a combined time trace based on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers, wherein determining the first drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift markers comprises determining the first drift correction based, at least in part, on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers.
  • determining the first drift correction based, at least in part, on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers comprises performing a weighted average of the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers.
  • performing the weighted average comprises: determining a quality score for each of the relative time traces, wherein the quality score is determined based, at least in part, on a measure of variability over time associated with the time trace and/or a measure of localization uncertainty of individual localizations within the time trace.
  • the measure of variability over time comprises a standard deviation of the time trace over time.
  • the measure of localization uncertainty of individual localizations comprises, at least in part, an estimate of uncertainty from a Gaussian fitting or a comparison with other simultaneous localizations, wherein the other simultaneous localizations are from within a same image and from other time traces from the plurality of drift markers, wherein the comparison comprises a mean and standard deviation of all simultaneous localizations.
  • the method further comprises determining that a first drift marker of the plurality of drift markers is not present in at least one frame of the time sequence of images, and linearly interpolating the time trace for the first drift marker for the at least one frame to produce a smoothed time trace for the first drift marker.
  • determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images comprises: identifying a plurality of localizations in each of the plurality of images; creating a two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations; and identifying the plurality of drift templates based, at least in part, on the two-dimensional histogram, wherein identifying the plurality of drift templates comprises evaluating the two-dimensional histogram using an lower-bound and/or an upper-bound threshold in a histogram count.
  • determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images comprises determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites within each of the plurality of drift templates, and wherein determining the second drift correction comprises determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for each of the plurality of marker sites within each of the plurality of drift templates.
  • determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for each of the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from each of the plurality of drift templates comprises: identifying a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites within each of the plurality of drift templates; and determining a relative time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable drift markers for each of the plurality of drift templates, wherein determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift templates comprises determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers within each of the plurality of drift templates.
  • identifying a plurality of geometrically addressable marker sites from each of the plurality of drift templates comprises determining a plurality of marker sites based on, at least in part, a two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations in the corresponding drift template, and/or one or more selection criteria, wherein the one or more selection criteria include one or more of a total number of localizations, a surface density of localizations, and standard deviation of localizations.
  • determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers within each of the plurality of drift templates comprises performing a weighted average of the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers within each of the drift templates.
  • performing the weighted average comprises:
  • the quality score is determined based, at least in part, on a measure of variability over time associated with the time trace and/or a localization uncertainty within the time trace.
  • the measure of variability over time comprises a standard deviation of the time trace over time.
  • the measure of localization uncertainty of individual localizations comprises an estimate of uncertainty from a Gaussian fitting or a comparison with other simultaneous localizations, wherein the other simultaneous localizations are from within a same image and from the other time traces from the plurality of marker sites from the plurality of drift templates, wherein the comparison comprises a mean and standard deviation of all simultaneous localizations.
  • correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the first drift correction and the second drift correction comprises correcting the plurality images using the first drift correction to produce a first corrected plurality of images, and wherein determining a time trace for each of a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images comprises determining a time trace for each of the plurality of drift templates identified from the first corrected plurality of images.
  • a method further comprises smoothing the first drift correction prior to correcting the plurality of images using the first drift correction.
  • smoothing the first drift correction comprises processing the first drift correction using local regression with a window determined by a characteristic drift time scale of the first drift correction.
  • a method further comprises smoothing the second drift correction prior to correcting the plurality of images using the second drift correction.
  • smoothing the second drift correction comprises processing the second drift correction using local regression with a window determined by a characteristic drift time scale of the second drift correction.
  • a method further comprises selecting a single drift marker of the plurality of drift markers; and determining a third drift correction based, at least in part, on the selected single drift marker, wherein correcting the plurality of images comprises correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the third drift correction.
  • correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the third drift correction is performed prior to correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part on the first drift correction and the second drift correction.
  • a method further comprises identifying locations of a first plurality of points in a first image of the plurality of frames; identifying locations of a second plurality of points in a second image of the plurality of images, wherein the second image corresponds to a neighboring frame of the first image in the time sequence of images; and determining a fourth drift correction based, at least in part, on differences between the locations of the first plurality of points and the second plurality of points, wherein correcting the plurality of images comprises correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the fourth drift correction.
  • the second image corresponds to a frame immediately following the frame corresponding to the first image in the time sequence of images.
  • determining the fourth drift correction based, at least in part, on differences between the locations of the first plurality of points and the second plurality of points comprises: creating a histogram of distances between the locations of the first plurality of points and the second plurality of points; determining based, at least in part, on the histogram, pairs of points between the first image and the second image that correspond to the same transient event; and determining a location offset between each of the determined pairs of points, wherein determining the fourth drift correction is based on a vector average of the location offsets for each of the determined pairs of points.
  • the plurality of images correspond to DNA-based images and wherein the plurality of transient events are binding events between an imaging strand and a DNA docking strand.
  • the imaging strand is a fluorescent imaging probe configured to fluoresce when associated with the DNA docking strand.
  • At least one of the drift markers is a DNA based nanostructure.
  • the DNA based nanostructure is a DNA origami nanostructure with docking strands.
  • At least one of the drift templates is a DNA based nanostructure.
  • the DNA based nanostructure is a DNA origami nanostructure with docking strands.
  • At least one of the drift templates is a three-dimensional drift template.
  • the three-dimensional drift template is a tetrahedron.
  • At least one of the drift templates includes multiple colors corresponding to different types of transient events.
  • the different types of transient events include a first binding event of a first imaging strand with a first type of DNA docking strand and a second binding event of a second imaging strand with a second type of DNA docking strand.
  • outputting the final image comprises displaying the final image on a display.
  • outputting the final image comprises sending the final image to a computer via at least one network.
  • outputting the final image comprises storing the final image on at least one storage device.
  • a non-transitory computer readable medium encoded with a plurality of instructions that, when executed by at least one computer processor, performs a method of performing drift correction for a plurality of images, wherein each of the plurality of images comprises a frame of a time sequence of images, wherein the time sequence of images captures a plurality of transient events, the method comprising: determining a time trace for each of a plurality of drift markers identified in the plurality of images, wherein a time trace for each drift marker corresponds to movement of an object in the image over the time sequence of images; determining a first drift correction from at least one of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift markers; determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images, wherein each drift template in the plurality of drift templates describes a geometrical relationship between the plurality of geometrically-
  • a computer comprising: an input interface configured to receive a plurality of images, wherein each of the plurality of images comprises a frame of a time sequence of images, wherein the time sequence of images captures a plurality of transient events; at least one processor programmed to: determine a time trace for each of a plurality of drift markers identified in the plurality of images, wherein a time trace for each drift marker corresponds to movement of an object in the image over the time sequence of images; determine a first drift correction from at least one of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift markers; determine a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images, wherein each drift template in the plurality of drift templates describes a geometrical relationship between the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites of transient events in the drift template; determine a second drift correction based, at least in part
  • FIG. 1A shows microtubule-like DNA origami polymers “labeled” with single-stranded DNA docking strands on a pair of opposite faces (colored in dark gray) spaced approximately 16 nanometers (nm) apart.
  • Complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strands transiently bind from solution to the docking strands.
  • Biotinylated DNA strands (present on the bottom two center helices) are used to bind the microtubule-like DNA structures to glass surfaces for fluorescence imaging.
  • FIG. 1B shows a graph demonstrating that transient binding of fluorescently-labeled imager strands to the docking strands produces fluorescence “blinking”(fluorescence intensity vs. time trace).
  • FIG. 1C shows a transmission electron microscope (TEM) image of DNA origami polymers with a measured width of 16 ⁇ 1 nm (mean ⁇ stdv) [scale bar: 40 nm].
  • FIG. 1D shows super-resolution fluorescence images obtained using Cy3b-labeled imager strands (15,000 frames, 5 Hz frame rate). Two distinct lines are visible [scale bars: 40 nm].
  • FIG. 1E shows a cross-sectional histogram of highlighted areas ⁇ i> and ⁇ ii> in FIG. 1D (arrows denote histogram direction), which show that the designed distance of approximately 16 nm is clearly resolved (full width at half maximum (FWHM) of each distribution is observed to be approximately 9 nm).
  • FWHM full width at half maximum
  • FIG. 2 shows an example of a biomolecule labeling scheme of the present disclosure where a protein (e.g., protein target) is labeled with antibody-DNA conjugates of the present disclosure and complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strands.
  • the antibodies are linked to the docking strands through a linker that contains biotin and streptavidin (e.g., biotin-streptavidin-biotin linker).
  • FIG. 3A shows a super-resolution image of a microtubule network inside a fixed HeLa cell using an antibody-DNA conjugate and Atto655-labeled imager strands (10,000 frames, 10 Hz frame rate) [scale bar: 5 ⁇ m].
  • FIG. 3B shows a high magnification image of the highlighted area in FIG. 3A [scale bar: 1 ⁇ m].
  • FIG. 3C shows a diffraction-limited representation of the same area in FIG. 3B . Arrows highlight positions where the increase in resolution of the image is clearly visible. Adjacent microtubules with an apparent width of approximately 46 nm at position ⁇ i> in FIG. 3B are separated by approximately 79 nm [scale bar: 1 ⁇ m].
  • FIG. 3A shows a super-resolution image of a microtubule network inside a fixed HeLa cell using an antibody-DNA conjugate and Atto655-labeled imager strands (10,000 frames, 10 Hz frame rate) [scale bar: 5
  • 3D shows a dual-color super-resolution image (15,000 frames, 10 Hz frame rate) of microtubules and mitochondria inside a fixed HeLa cell obtained using antibody-DNA conjugates, Cy3b-labeled imager strands for microtubules (linear-like structures) and Atto655-labeled imager strands for mitochondria (patch-like structures) [scale bar: 5 ⁇ m].
  • FIG. 3E shows a high magnification image of the highlighted area in FIG. 3D [scale bar: 1 ⁇ m].
  • FIG. 3F shows a diffraction-limited image of the same area shown in FIG. 3E [scale bar: 1 ⁇ m].
  • FIG. 4A shows one embodiment of the present disclosure using spectrally indistinct imager strands (e.g., each labeled with the same color fluorophore).
  • three different species of docking strands (a,b,c) label a surface. Such labeling may occur using the docking strand alone or linked to a protein-binding (e.g., antibody) or a nucleic acid-binding molecule that binds to the surface/biomolecule of interest.
  • step [2] multiple copies of the imager strand a* are introduced (where a* has a sequence complementary to a), and points labeled with docking strands a are imaged.
  • step [3] copies of the imager strand a* are flushed away, and imager strand b* is introduced to image the b labeled points. Images are obtained, and imager strands b* are washed away.
  • step [4] c labeled points are imaged in the same manner.
  • images from [2-4] are assigned pseudo-colors and combined to create the final image. Although pseudo-colors may be used in the final rendering of the image, all imager strands are actually labeled with the same color dye (e.g., fluorophore).
  • FIG. 4B ( 1 )- 4 B( 3 ) show that reducing the image density simultaneously increases the achievable resolution by up to a factor of 2 ⁇ square root over (2) ⁇ ln 2 ⁇ 2.35.
  • the resolution previously defined as the FWHM of the reconstructed localizations, can be understood as the standard deviation of the localization as in localization microscopy with sparse points.
  • FIG. 4B ( 1 ) shows seven points in a linear geometry spaced at 10 nm (top). Simulated super-resolution data with approximately 14 nm resolution (center). The points cannot be resolved.
  • Cross-sectional histogram data shows a broad peak (bottom).
  • FIGS. 4B ( 2 ) and 4 B( 3 ) show that imaging every other site allows the localization of individual spots. These localizations can then be combined to form the final image of the full pattern.
  • FIG. 4C shows an image of a DNA origami structure that displays docking strands spaced at 10 nm intervals.
  • FIG. 5A shows one embodiment of the present disclosure using DNA origami structures with different species of docking strands at designated positions resembling numbers 0-3 (0, 1, 2 and 3).
  • the respective imager strand sequence is added to an imaging chamber, image acquisition is carried out and the imager strands are washed out.
  • the designed number is imaged, showing a very sequence-specific interaction with no crosstalk between different rounds [Scale bar: 50 nm].
  • Note that all imager strands are labeled with the same color dye, though each structure (e.g., 0-3 (0, 1, 2 and 3)) is rendered a distinct color (e.g., purple, yellow, blue, or red; color rendering not shown).
  • FIG. 5B (i)-(v) show another embodiment of the present disclosure using DNA origami structures with different species of docking strands at designated positions resembling numbers 0-9 (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9).
  • FIG. 5B (i) shows an exchange-PAINT schematic showing sequential imaging of multiple targets using imager strands labeled with the same fluorophore.
  • FIG. 5B (ii) shows a schematic of a DNA origami (70 100 nm) displaying docking strands that resemble digit 4.
  • FIG. 5B (iii) shows a combined overview image of all ten Exchange-PAINT cycles, demonstrating specific interaction with the respective target with no crosstalk between imaging cycles. Scale bar: 250 nm.
  • FIG. 5B (iv) shows a four-“color” image of digits 0 to 3 that are all present on the same DNA origami (10,000 frames each, 5 Hz frame rate; schematic at the bottom). Scale bar: 25 nm.
  • FIG. 5B (v) shows pseudocolor images of ten different origami structures, each rendered a distinct color (e.g., orange, green, blue, purple, pink, etc.; color rendering not shown), displaying digits 0 to 9 in one sample with high resolution (FWHM of bar-like features ⁇ 10 nm) and specificity. Image obtained using only one fluorophore (Cy3b) through ten imaging-washing cycles (imaging: 7,500 frames per cycle, 5 Hz frame rate; washing: 1-2 minutes per cycle). Scale bar: 25 nm.
  • FIG. 6A shows an experimental schematic for one embodiment of the present disclosure using fixed HeLa cells, where in one round, docking strands are bound to a target, labeled imager strands are then added, an image is acquired, and the imager strands are washed away. Each round is repeated with docking strands specific for different targets along with different labeled imager strands.
  • the docking strands may be used alone or linked to a protein-binding (e.g., antibody) or a nucleic acid-binding molecule that binds to the target of interest.
  • FIG. 6B shows two rounds of a method of the present disclosure using Cy3b-labeled imager strands in fixed HeLa cells.
  • FIG. 6C shows two rounds of a method of the present disclosure using ATTO655-labeled imager strands performed in fixed HeLa cells similar to FIG. 6B . [Scale bars: 5 ⁇ m]. Note that all imager strands are labeled with the same color dye.
  • FIG. 7A shows that fluorescently-labeled imager strands transiently bind from solution to complementary docking strands on a structure or molecule of interest.
  • the transient binding produces an apparent blinking as shown in the binding vs. time trace with characteristic fluorescence ON- and OFF-times ( ⁇ b and ⁇ d , respectively).
  • the detected binding frequency of imager strands from solution is linearly dependent on the number of available docking strands in a given image area (i.e., the more docking strands, the higher the binding frequency).
  • the time in-between binding events, i.e., the fluorescence OFF-time ( ⁇ d ) is inversely proportional to the number of docking strands.
  • FIG. 7C shows a super-resolution image of DNA origami structures designed to display 13 binding sites as a proof-of-concept platform. The incorporation efficiency for docking sites is not 100% leading to a distribution of actually incorporated sites ( FIG. 7D ( 1 )).
  • FIG. 7D ( 1 ) shows the binding site distribution for 377 origami structures obtained by direct visual counting.
  • FIG. 7D ( 2 ) shows the binding site distribution for the same structures obtained by binding kinetic analysis (kinetics) of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7D ( 3 ) shows the “offset” between direct and kinetic counting: the counting “error” or uncertainty for the method of the present disclosure is less than 7% (determined by the coefficient of variation of the Gaussian distribution).
  • FIG. 8A shows mRNA molecules of interest in fixed Escherichia coli cells tagged using docking strands in a FISH-like hybridization scheme.
  • FIG. 8B shows a readout scheme used to determine the binding frequency for each imaging color. The intensity vs. time profile of each single mRNA location yields a specific transient binding pattern (blinking) per color. The frequency of binding events depends on the number of binding sites allowing the use of the binding frequency to distinguish between different integer numbers of binding sites.
  • FIG. 8C shows an in vitro proof-of-principle experiment on DNA origami structures displaying 3, 9, 22 and 44 binding sites for each of the red, green, and blue imager strands, respectively (color rendering not shown).
  • the different binding levels are clearly distinguishable for each color, suggesting 4 possible “frequency levels” per color, yielding up to 124 different possible combinations for barcoding, e.g., mRNA molecules inside cells.
  • the barcoding space can be increased by using the fluorescence ON-time as an additional coding entity.
  • FIG. 9 shows a graph demonstrating that the fluorescence ON-time (related to the dissociation rate k off ) can be tuned independently of the fluorescence OFF-time (related to the association rate k on ). Extending the imaging/docking duplex from 9 to 10 nucleotides (nt) by adding a single CG base pair, the kinetic OFF-rate is reduced by almost one order of magnitude (8).
  • FIG. 10A shows a barcode probe that is roughly 50 nucleotide (nt) in length and can tag a biomolecule using a 21 nt target detection domain t* followed by an approximately 30 nt long “barcode” region with a combination of 8, 9, or 10 nt long binding domain for red, green, or blue imager strands.
  • 8, 9 or 10 nt long docking strands are displayed for three colors with a k off of 10, 1 and 0.1 per second, respectively (color rendering not shown).
  • FIG. 10B shows characteristic intensity vs. time traces with increased fluorescence ON-times ⁇ b for the 9 nt interaction domain compared to the 8 nt interaction domain.
  • FIG. 10C shows stochastic simulations demonstrating that k off values of 10, 1 and 0.1 per second can be distinguished.
  • FIG. 11A shows that in the traditional method of detection, where a single fluorophore is stably attached to the imaging surface (see FIG. 11B ( 1 )), a limited number of photons per “switching” event is emitted (top panel), that extraction of all photons from “replenishable” imager strands (see FIG. 11B ( 2 )) leads to higher localization accuracy per switching event (middle panel), and that a DNA metafluorophore (see FIG. 11B ( 3 ) and FIG. 11B ( 4 )) yields a significantly larger number of photons per switching event than the single fluorophore in FIG. 11B ( 2 ) (bottom).
  • FIG. 11B ( 1 )- 11 B( 3 ) show schematics of current imaging methods and methods of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 11B ( 1 ) shows a traditional detection method (e.g., in STORM), which uses a fluorophore stably attached to the imaging surface.
  • FIG. 11B ( 2 ) shows one embodiment of a detection method of the present disclosure with fluorophores transiently binding to the imaging surface.
  • FIG. 11B ( 3 ) shows a bright metafluorophore with 8 fluorophores in a compact DNA nanostructure.
  • FIG. 11B ( 4 ) shows a conditional metafluorophore decorated with both quenchers (dark dots) and fluorophores (stars) that only fluoresces when transiently bound to the surface.
  • FIG. 11B ( 1 ) shows a traditional detection method (e.g., in STORM), which uses a fluorophore stably attached to the imaging surface.
  • FIG. 11B ( 2 )
  • FIG. 11C shows a DNA origami structure with docking sites arranged in a 4 ⁇ 3 grid, spacing 20 nm. Single sites are optically localized with an accuracy of approximately 3 nm, currently the highest demonstrated resolution [scale bar: 50 nm].
  • FIG. 11D shows a 280 nm ⁇ 240 nm DNA nano-rectangle (single-stranded tile structure ( 15 ), 10 ⁇ larger area than origami) displaying 2000 single-stranded docking strands (dots) with 7 or 5 nm spacing used as a test platform for ultra-resolution imaging [scale bar: 100 nm].
  • FIG. 12A (i) illustrates schematics showing the principle of each stage of drift correction.
  • black markers and lines indicate source data
  • gray values and curves indicate the calculated drift correction.
  • FIG. 12A (ii) shows a schematic drawing of the major type of drift markers (e.g., DNA drift markers) used in each stage.
  • FIG. 12B (i) illustrates an example structure showing the imaging quality after each stage or correction
  • FIG. 12B (ii) shows a zoomed image of the corresponding green rectangle in FIG. 12B (i) at each stage.
  • the scale bars shown in FIGS. 12B (i) and 12 B(ii) correspond to 50 nm.
  • FIG. 12C (i) illustrates an example drift trace after each stage of correction, and FIG.
  • FIG. 12C (ii) shows a zoomed image of the corresponding rectangle in FIG. 12C (i) at each stage.
  • the scale bars in FIG. 12C (i) correspond to x: 500 nm, t: 500 s, and the scale bars in FIG. 12C (ii) correspond to x: 10 nm, t: 10 s.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a process for performing drift correction in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a process for performing drift correction corresponding to stage 230 of FIG. 13 .
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a process for performing drift correction corresponding to stage 240 of FIG. 13 .
  • FIG. 16 illustrates 3D tetrahedrons used as templates for 3D drift correction.
  • the four corners are labeled with docking sites.
  • FIG. 16A shows that the four corners are clearly resolved.
  • FIG. 16B illustrates the X-Z projection of the structures with a height of ⁇ 85 nm.
  • FIG. 17 shows an illustrative implementation of computer system 600 that may be used in connection with any of the embodiments of the present disclosure described herein.
  • FIGS. 18A-18C illustrate an alternative representation of stages in a drift correction process in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • a super-resolved image of a 10 nm-spaced regular grid on a single-molecule DNA origami nanostructure is shown.
  • the DNA origami structure was designed to be a 5 ⁇ 8 square lattice of 10 nm spacing both vertically and horizontally.
  • FIG. 18A shows a scatter plot of collected and filtered localizations, represented by crosses.
  • FIG. 18B shows a binned 2-D histogram view of the above structure.
  • FIG. 18C shows a 1-D histogram by projecting all localizations in the rectangle in FIGS.
  • the fitted Gaussian peaks all have standard deviation in the range of 1.5-2.4 nm, allowing for 3.5-5.6 nm resolution in principle; and spacing between neighboring peaks in the range of 9.8-11.0 nm, consistent with the DNA origami design.
  • a few (5 in this case) spots are missing in the structure because of imperfect incorporation of staples in the assembly reaction, but not missed during the super-resolution imaging.
  • FIGS. 19A and 19B show that RNA aptamers modulate the fluorescence of GFP-like fluorophores.
  • FIG. 19A shows structures of HBI (green), in the context of GFP, and DMHBI.
  • FIG. 19B shows that the 13-2 RNA aptamer enhances the fluorescence of DMHBI by stabilizing a particular molecular arrangement favorable for fluorescence emission. Solutions containing DMHBI, 13-2 RNA, DMHBI with 13-2 RNA, or DMHBI with total HeLa cell RNA were photographed under illumination with 365 nm of light. The image is a montage obtained under identical image-acquisition conditions. (Image from Paige et al., ref. 19)
  • FIGS. 20A and 20B show single-molecule fluorescence characterization of the DFHBI binding kinetics.
  • FIG. 20A shows a 5′-extended Spinach (green) is immobilized on a
  • FIG. 20B shows a bulk fluorescence measurement of the Spinach-DFHBI before (bottom line) and after (top line) addition of the aptamer shows that the DFHBI binding activity is well maintained after the addition an extension to Spinach required for immobilizing to the glass surface in FIG. 20A .
  • FIGS. 21A and 21B show benchmarking Spinach-PAINT performance.
  • FIG. 20A shows a six-helix DNA origami structure used for placing two Spinach molecules in a defined distance.
  • FIG. 20B shows a simulated representation of a super-resolved reconstruction using DNA-PAINT to localize the DNA structure (P) and Spinach-PAINT to localize the Spinach molecules in three different distances.
  • FIG. 22 shows Spinach-based sensors.
  • the allosteric variant of the Spinach-based sensor (left) comprises the Spinach domain (black), the transducer module (medium gray), and the recognition module (light gray).
  • the transducer module In the absence of the target molecule, the transducer module is in a primarily unstructured state, which prevents the stabilization of the Spinach structure needed for activation of DFHBI.
  • the transducer module Upon binding of the target molecule, the transducer module forms a duplex, leading to structural rigidification of the Spinach module, and activation of DFHBI fluorescence (ref. 24).
  • FIGS. 23A and 23B show examples of in vitro and in situ Exchange-PAINT chambers.
  • the present disclosure provides, inter alia, methods, compositions and kits for multiplexed imaging, for example, in a cellular environment using nucleic acid-based imaging probes (e.g., DNA-based imaging probes).
  • the methods, compositions and kits for multiplexed fluorescence imaging are not limited by the degree of resolution attained. Thus, the methods, compositions and kits as provided herein may be used for imaging, generally.
  • the present disclosure further provides, inter alia, methods, compositions and kits for multiplexed super-resolution fluorescence imaging, for example, in a cellular environment using nucleic acid-based imaging probes (e.g., DNA-based imaging probes).
  • nucleic acid-based imaging probes e.g., DNA-based imaging probes.
  • “super-resolution” imaging refers to the process of combining a set of low resolution images of the same area to obtain a single image of higher resolution.
  • Many aspects of the present disclosure may be used to “switch” targets (e.g., biomolecules) of interest between fluorescent ON- and OFF-states to permit consecutive, or in some instances simultaneous, localization of individual targets.
  • a fluorescent “ON” state is a state in which fluorescence is emitted.
  • a fluorescent “OFF” state is a state in which fluorescence is not emitted. Switching between the two states is achieved, in some embodiments, with diffusing molecules that are labeled with a detectable label (e.g., fluorescent molecules) that interact transiently with the targets using an intermediate moiety that comprises the detectable label (e.g., fluorescent molecule(s)) and binds to the target.
  • a detectable label e.g., fluorescent molecules
  • an intermediate moiety that comprises the detectable label (e.g., fluorescent molecule(s)) and binds to the target.
  • Binding partner-nucleic acid conjugates (“BP-NA conjugates”) of the present disclosure transiently bind to complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands.
  • binding partner-nucleic acid conjugate or “BP-NA conjugate,” refers to a molecule linked (e.g., through an N-Hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) linker) to a single-stranded nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) docking strand.
  • NHS N-Hydroxysuccinimide
  • the binding partner of the conjugate may be any moiety (e.g., antibody or aptamer) that has an affinity for (e.g., binds to) a target, such as a biomolecule (e.g., protein or nucleic acid), of interest.
  • a target such as a biomolecule (e.g., protein or nucleic acid), of interest.
  • the binding partner is a protein.
  • BP-NA-conjugates that comprise a protein (or peptide) linked to a docking strand may be referred to herein as “protein-nucleic acid conjugates,” or “protein-NA conjugates.”
  • proteins for use in the conjugates of the present disclosure include, without limitation, antibodies (e.g., monoclonal monobodies), antigen-binding antibody fragments (e.g., Fab fragments), receptors, peptides and peptide aptamers.
  • Other binding partners may be used in accordance with the present disclosure. For example, binding partners that bind to targets through electrostatic (e.g., electrostatic particles), hydrophobic or magnetic (e.g., magnetic particles) interactions are contemplated herein.
  • antibody includes full-length antibodies and any antigen binding fragment (e.g., “antigen-binding portion”) or single chain thereof.
  • the term “antibody” includes, without limitation, a glycoprotein comprising at least two heavy (H) chains and two light (L) chains inter-connected by disulfide bonds, or an antigen binding portion thereof.
  • Antibodies may be polyclonal or monoclonal; xenogeneic, allogeneic, or syngeneic; or modified forms thereof (e.g., humanized, chimeric).
  • antigen-binding portion of an antibody, refers to one or more fragments of an antibody that retain the ability to specifically bind to an antigen.
  • the antigen-binding function of an antibody can be performed by fragments of a full-length antibody.
  • binding fragments encompassed within the term “antigen-binding portion” of an antibody include (i) a Fab fragment, a monovalent fragment consisting of the V H , V L , C L and C H1 domains; (ii) a F(ab′)2 fragment, a bivalent fragment comprising two Fab fragments linked by a disulfide bridge at the hinge region; (iii) a Fd fragment consisting of the V H and C H1 domains; (iv) a Fv fragment consisting of the V H and V L domains of a single arm of an antibody, (v) a dAb fragment (Ward et al., Nature 341:544 546, 1989), which consists of a V H domain; and (vi) an isolated complementarity determining region (CDR) or (vii) a combination of two or more isolated CDRs, which may optionally be joined by a synthetic linker.
  • a Fab fragment a monovalent fragment consisting of the V H , V
  • the two domains of the Fv fragment, V H and V L are coded for by separate genes, they can be joined, using recombinant methods, by a synthetic linker that enables them to be made as a single protein chain in which the V H and V L regions pair to form monovalent molecules (known as single chain Fv (scFv); see, e.g., Bird et al. Science 242:423 426, 1988; and Huston et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:5879-5883, 1988).
  • single chain Fv single chain Fv
  • Such single chain antibodies are also encompassed within the term “antigen-binding portion” of an antibody.
  • receptors refer to cellular-derived molecules (e.g., proteins) that bind to ligands such as, for example, peptides or small molecules (e.g., low molecular weight ( ⁇ 900 Daltons) organic or inorganic compounds).
  • ligands such as, for example, peptides or small molecules (e.g., low molecular weight ( ⁇ 900 Daltons) organic or inorganic compounds).
  • peptide aptamer refers to a molecule with a variable peptide sequence inserted into a constant scaffold protein (see, e.g., Baines I C, et al. Drug Discov. Today 11:334-341, 2006).
  • the molecule of the BP-NA conjugate is a nucleic acid such as, for example, a nucleic acid aptamer.
  • nucleic acid aptamer refers to a small RNA or DNA molecules that can form secondary and tertiary structures capable of specifically binding proteins or other cellular targets (see, e.g., Ni X, et al. Curr Med Chem. 18(27): 4206-4214, 2011).
  • the BP-NA conjugate may be an aptamer-nucleic acid conjugate.
  • a “docking strand” refers to a single-stranded nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) that is about 5 nucleotides to about 50 nucleotides in length (or is 5 nucleotides to 50 nucleotides in length). In some embodiments, a docking strand is about 4 to about 60, about 6 nucleotides to about 40 nucleotides, about 7 nucleotides to about 30 nucleotides, about 8 to about 20 nucleotides, or about 9 nucleotides to about 15 nucleotides in length.
  • a docking strand is (or is about) 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, or more nucleotides in length.
  • a docking strand may have one domain or more than one domain (i.e., a plurality of domains), each domain complementary to a respective imager strand.
  • a “docking strand domain” refers to a nucleotide sequence of the docking strand that is complementary to a nucleotide sequence of an imager strand.
  • a docking strand may contain one, two three, or more domains, each domain complementary to an imager strand.
  • Each complementary imager strand can contain a distinct label (e.g., a red fluorophore, a blue fluorophore, or a green fluorophore), or all complementary imager strands can contain the same label (e.g., red fluorophores).
  • the strand may contain a first domain complementary to an imager strand labeled with a red fluorophore, a second domain complementary to an imager strand labeled with a blue fluorophore, and a third domain complementary to an imager strand labeled with a green fluorophore.
  • each of three docking domains may be complementary to imager strands labeled with a red fluorophore.
  • a docking strand has at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, or more domains, each respectively complementary to an imager strand.
  • a docking strand has 1 to 5, 1 to 10, 1 to 15, 1 to 20, 1 to 25, 1 to 50, or 1 to 100 domains, each respectively complementary to an imager strand.
  • an “imager strand” is a single-stranded nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) that is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides, about 5 to about 18 nucleotides, about 6 to about 15 nucleotides, about 7 to about 12 nucleotides, or about 8 to 10 nucleotides in length and is fluorescently-labeled.
  • the imager strand may be (or may be about) 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 nucleotides in length.
  • An imager strand of the present disclosure is complementary to and transiently binds to a docking strand.
  • nucleic acids or nucleic acid domains are “complementary” to one another if they base-pair, or bind, with each other to form a double-stranded nucleic acid molecule via Watson-Crick interactions.
  • binding refers to an association between at least two molecules due to, for example, electrostatic, hydrophobic, ionic and/or hydrogen-bond interactions under physiological conditions.
  • An imager strand is considered to “transiently bind” to a docking strand if it binds to a complementary region of a docking strand and then disassociates (unbinds) from the docking strand within a short period of time, for example, at room temperature.
  • an imager strand remains bound to a docking strand for about 0.1 to about 10, or about 0.1 to about 5 seconds.
  • an imager strand may remain bound to a docking strand for about 0.1, about 1, about 5 or about 10 seconds.
  • Imager strands of the present disclosure may be labeled with a detectable label (e.g., a fluorescent label, and thus are considered “fluorescently labeled”).
  • a detectable label e.g., a fluorescent label, and thus are considered “fluorescently labeled”.
  • an imager strand may comprise at least one (i.e., one or more) fluorophore.
  • spectrally distinct molecules of the present disclosure refer to molecules with labels (e.g., fluorophores) of different spectral signal or wavelength.
  • labels e.g., fluorophores
  • an imager strand labeled with a Cy2 fluorophore emits a signal at a wavelength of light of about 510 nm
  • an imager strand labeled with a Cy5 fluorophore emits a signal at a wavelength of light of about 670 nm.
  • the Cy2-labeled imager strand is considered herein to be spectrally distinct from the Cy5-labeled imager strand.
  • spectrally indistinct molecules of the present disclosure refer to molecules with labels having the same spectral signal or wavelength—that is, the emission wavelength of the labels cannot be used to distinguish between two spectrally indistinct fluorescently labeled molecules (e.g., because the wavelengths are the same or close together).
  • the BP-NA conjugates (e.g., protein-nucleic acid conjugates) of the present disclosure may, in some embodiments, comprise an intermediate linker that links (e.g., covalently or non-covalently) the molecule to a docking strand.
  • the intermediate linker may comprise biotin and/or streptavidin.
  • an antibody and a docking strand may each be biotinylated (i.e., linked to at least one biotin molecule) and linked to each other through biotin binding to an intermediate streptavidin molecule, as shown in FIG. 2 .
  • Other intermediate linkers may be used in accordance with the present disclosure.
  • an intermediate linker may not be required.
  • the docking strand of a BP-NA conjugate may be an extension (e.g., 5′ or 3′ extension) of a nucleic acid molecule such as, for example, a nucleic acid aptamer.
  • Pluralities of BP-NA conjugates e.g., protein-nucleic acid conjugates and imager strands are provided herein.
  • a plurality may be a population of the same species or distinct species.
  • a plurality of BP-NA conjugates of the same species may comprise conjugates that all bind to the same target (e.g., biomolecule) (e.g., the same epitope or region/domain).
  • a plurality of BP-NA conjugates of distinct species may comprise conjugates, or subsets of conjugates, each conjugate or subset of conjugates binding to a distinct epitope on the same target or to a distinct target.
  • a plurality of imager strands of the same species may comprise imager strands with the same nucleotide sequence and the same fluorescent label (e.g., Cy2, Cy3 or Cy4).
  • a plurality of imager strands of distinct species may comprise imager strands with distinct nucleotide sequences (e.g., DNA sequences) and distinct fluorescent labels (e.g., Cy2, Cy3 or Cy4) or with distinct nucleotide sequences and the same fluorescent (e.g., all Cy2).
  • the number of distinct species in a given plurality of BP-NA conjugates is limited by the number of binding partners (e.g., antibodies) and the number of docking strands of different nucleotide sequence (and thus complementary imager strands).
  • a plurality of BP-NA conjugates comprises at least 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 10 4 , 50000, 10 5 , 10 5 , 10 6 , 10 7 , 10 8 , 10 9 , 10 10 , 10 11 BP-NA conjugates.
  • a plurality of fluorescently-labeled imager strands comprises at least 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 10 4 , 50000, 10 5 , 10 5 , 10 6 , 10 7 , 10 8 , 10 9 , 10 10 , 10 11 fluorescently-labeled imager strands.
  • a plurality may contain 1 to about 200 or more distinct species of BP-NA conjugates and/or imager strands.
  • a plurality may contain at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200 or more distinct species.
  • a plurality may contain less than about 5 to about 200 distinct species of BP-NA conjugates and/or imager strands.
  • a plurality may contain less than 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175 or 200 distinct species.
  • a docking strand may contain, in additional to imager-binding domain(s) (e.g., one, two, three, or more, with the same or distinct fluorophores), a target domain that is complementary to and binds to a target, such as, for example, mRNA or other nucleic acid.
  • imager-binding domain(s) e.g., one, two, three, or more, with the same or distinct fluorophores
  • Methods provided herein are based, in part, on the programmability of nucleic acid docking strands and imager strands. That is, for example, docking strands and imager strands can be designed such that they bind to each other under certain conditions for a certain period of time. This programmability permits transient binding of imager strands to docking strands, as provided herein.
  • the methods provided herein are directed to identifying one or more target(s) (e.g., biomolecule(s) such as a protein or nucleic acid) in a particular sample (e.g., biological sample). In some instances, whether or not one or more target(s) is present in sample is unknown.
  • methods of the present disclosure may be used to determine the presence or absence of one or more target(s) in a sample suspected of containing the target(s).
  • a sample may contain or may be suspected of containing one or more target(s).
  • Methods provided herein can also be used to identify the absolute quantity of a single target (e.g., such as, for example, a particular protein), or the quantity of a single target relative to one or more other targets.
  • a single target e.g., such as, for example, a particular protein
  • methods provided herein may be used to identify the location of a target within a sample or relative to other targets in the sample.
  • Methods provided herein may comprise, in some embodiments, contacting a sample with (a) at least one BP-NA conjugate (e.g., protein-nucleic acid conjugate) that comprises a binding partner linked to a docking strand and (b) at least one labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one BP-NA conjugate, and then determining whether the at least one BP-NA conjugate binds to at least one target (such as a biomolecule target) in the sample.
  • BP-NA conjugate e.g., protein-nucleic acid conjugate
  • imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one BP-NA conjugate
  • the determining step comprises imaging (e.g., with time-lapsed fluorescent microscopy techniques) transient binding of the at least one labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand to the docking strand of the at least one BP-NA conjugate.
  • Other methods provided herein may comprise, in some embodiments, contacting a sample with (a) at least two BP-NA conjugates, each comprising a binding partner linked to a docking strand, and (b) at least two labeled, optionally spectrally distinct, fluorescently labeled, imager strands that are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the at least two different BP-NA conjugates, and then determining whether the at least two BP-NA conjugates bind to at least one, or at least two, targets (such as biomolecule targets) in the sample.
  • targets such as biomolecule targets
  • Binding of the BP-NA conjugates to respective targets can be determined by imaging transient binding of one of the at least two labeled, optionally spectrally distinct, fluorescently labeled, imager strands to a docking strand of one of the at least two BP-NA conjugates to produce a first image, and then imaging transient binding of another of the at least two labeled, optionally spectrally distinct, fluorescently labeled, imager strands to a docking strand of another of the at least two BP-NA conjugates to produce a second image.
  • the methods further comprise combining the first image and the second image to produce a composite image of signals (e.g., fluorescent signals), wherein the signals (e.g., fluorescent signals) of the composite image are representative of the at least two targets.
  • a “composite image” refers to a single image produced by combining (e.g., overlaying) multiple images of the same (or substantially similar) area.
  • a composite image may also be referred to as a super-resolution image, as described elsewhere herein.
  • FIG. 3 demonstrates one embodiment of the present disclosure in which two distinct species of BP-NA conjugates (e.g., antibody-nucleic acid conjugates) are used to label biomolecules in a fixed HeLa cell sample.
  • One species of antibody-nucleic acid conjugate comprises an antibody that recognizes and binds to an epitope on mitochondria.
  • the mitochondrial specific antibody is linked to a docking strand with a sequence complementary to a Cy3b-labled imager strand.
  • the other species of antibody-nucleic acid conjugate comprises an antibody that recognizes and binds to an epitope on microtubules.
  • the microtubule specific antibody is linked to a docking strand with a sequence complementary to an ATTO655-labeled imager strand.
  • Two spectrally distinct species of imager strands are then introduced at the same time: one species is labeled with Cy3b and is complementary to the docking strand that is linked to the mitochondrial specific antibody, and the other species is labeled with ATTO655 and is complementary to the docking strand that is linked to the microtubule specific antibody. While both the Cy3b-labled imager strand and the ATTO655-labled imager strand are present at the same time in solution with the sample, imaging is carried our sequentially in Cy3b and ATTO655 channels.
  • Yet other methods provided herein may comprise, in some embodiments, contacting a sample with (a) at least two BP-NA conjugates, each comprising a protein linked to a docking strand and (b) at least two spectrally indistinct (e.g., labeled with the same fluorophore) fluorescently-labeled imager strands that are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the at least two BP-NA conjugates, and then determining whether the at last two BP-NA conjugates bind to at least two targets (e.g., biomolecule targets) in the sample.
  • targets e.g., biomolecule targets
  • the methods comprise, in the following ordered steps, contacting the sample with a first BP-NA conjugate and at least one other BP-NA conjugate, contacting the sample with a first fluorescently-labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first BP-NA conjugate, determining whether the first BP-NA conjugate binds to a first target, removing the first fluorescently-labeled imager strand, contacting the sample with at least one other fluorescently-labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other BP-NA conjugate, and determining whether the at least one other BP-NA conjugate binds to at least one other target.
  • methods comprise, in the following ordered steps, contacting the sample with a first BP-NA conjugate, contacting the sample with a first fluorescently-labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first BP-NA conjugate, determining whether the first BP-NA conjugate binds to a first target (e.g., biomolecule), removing the first fluorescently-labeled imager strand, contacting the sample with at least one other BP-NA conjugate, contacting the sample with at least one other fluorescently-labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other BP-NA conjugate, and determining whether the at least one other BP-NA conjugate binds to at least one other target.
  • a first target e.g., biomolecule
  • the first determining step comprises imaging transient binding of the first fluorescently-labeled imager strand to the docking strand of the first BP-NA conjugate to produce a first image
  • the second determining step comprises imaging transient binding of the at least one other fluorescently-labeled imager strand to the docking strand of the at least one other BP-NA conjugate to produce a second image.
  • the methods further comprise assigning a pseudo-color to the fluorescent signal in the first image, and assigning at least one other pseudo-color to the fluorescent signal in the second image.
  • the methods comprise combining the first image and the second image to produce a composite image of the pseudo-colored signals, wherein the pseudo-colored signals of the composite image are representative of the at least two targets (e.g., biomolecule targets).
  • the methods comprise combining the first image and the second image to produce a composite image of the pseudo-colored signals, wherein the pseudo-colored signals of the composite image are representative of the at least two targets (e.g., biomolecule targets).
  • three distinct species of docking strands (a,b,c) label the surface of a grid (chosen for illustrative purposes).
  • step [2] multiple copies of the imager strand a* are introduced, and points labeled with docking strands a are imaged.
  • copies of the imager strand a* are flushed away, and imager strand b* is introduced to image the b labeled points.
  • step [4] c labeled points are imaged in the same manner.
  • images from steps [2-4] are assigned artificial pseudo-colors (e.g., using a software program) and combined to create the final composite image. All imager strands may be labeled with the same fluorophore—that is, the imager strands are spectrally indistinct.
  • the docking strands are linked to binding partners (e.g., proteins such as antibodies, or nucleic acids such as DNA or nucleic acid aptamers).
  • An advantage of the methods of the present disclosure is that partitioning and sequential imaging can be used to obtain multiplexed super-resolved images of up to hundreds of different species using only a single optimized fluorescent dye.
  • the number of distinct nucleotide sequences e.g., DNA sequences
  • those that use an imager strand with a length of 9 nucleotides there are several hundred species within tight bounds for binding kinetics that may be used for a single sample, representing a tremendous increase in multiplexing compared to direct “traditional” imaging approaches.
  • FIG. 5A illustrates another embodiment of the present disclosure using spectrally indistinct imager strands.
  • a single DNA nanostructure displays four distinct species of docking strands (optionally linked to protein binding partners or nucleic acid binding partners) designed to resemble the digits from 0 to 3, respectively.
  • Imaging is performed sequentially using a simple flow chamber setup, first flushing in fluorescently-labeled imager strands complementary to the docking strands of the number 0, and then exchanging the solution for fluorescently-labeled imager strands with a sequence complementary to docking strands of the number 1, and so forth.
  • the resulting images have been pseudo-colored to represent the respective imaging cycles.
  • an “imaging cycle,” or “imaging round” refers to the process of introducing fluorescently-labeled imager strands complementary to docking strands under conditions that allow the imager strand to bind to the docking strand, even if such binding is transient, and obtaining an image (or imaging an area).
  • multi-domain docking strands e.g., docking strands with more than one domain
  • the following embodiments are described in terms of a docking strand binding to a target, e.g., without an intermediate binding partner. It should be understood, however, that multi-domain docking strands may be linked to a binding partner (e.g., of a BP-NA conjugate, as provided herein.
  • methods comprise contacting one or more target(s) with one or more docking strands, each containing two or more binding domains. In other embodiments, methods comprise contacting one or more target(s) with two or more docking strands, each containing one binding domain.
  • the docking strand domains may have orthogonal sequences. In the examples that follow, all three targets (protein #1-#3) are present in the sample.
  • An exemplary multiplexed target detection method follows.
  • a sample contains, or is suspected of containing, three target species—protein #1, protein #2, and protein #3.
  • Three docking strands are designed such that: the first, containing imager binding domain A, binds to protein #1; the second, containing imager binding domain B, binds to protein #2; and the third, containing imager binding domains A and B, binds to protein #3.
  • Complementary imager strand A′ binds to imager binding domain A of a docking strand and is labeled with a blue fluorophore
  • imager strand B′ binds to imager binding domain B of a docking strand and is labeled with a red fluorophore.
  • the sample is first contacted with the docking strands, and subsequently contacted with the imager strands A′ and B′.
  • the sample is then imaged.
  • the sample containing the docking strands and the imager strands is first imaged under conditions that detect the blue fluorophore. Imaging the blue fluorophore detects protein #1 and protein #3, each bound by an imager strand labeled with the blue fluorophore.
  • Imaging the red fluorophore detects protein #2 and protein #3, each bound by an imager strand labeled with the red fluorophore. Overlapping images of the red and blue fluorophores detects protein #3 only, the only protein bound by an imager strand labeled with a red fluorophore and an imager strand labeled with a blue fluorophore. Thus, the identification and location of proteins #1-#3 are identified by the overlay of images respectively detecting the red and blue fluorophores.
  • a sample contains, or is suspected of containing, three target species—protein #1, protein #2, and protein #3.
  • Three docking strands are designed such that: the first, containing imager binding domain A, binds to protein #1; the second, containing imager binding domain B, binds to protein #2; and the third, containing imager binding domains A and B, binds to protein #3.
  • Complementary imager strand A′ binds to imager binding domain A of a docking strand and is labeled with a blue fluorophore
  • imager strand B′ binds to imager binding domain B of a docking strand and is also labeled with a blue fluorophore.
  • the sample is first contacted with the docking strands, and subsequently contacted with imager strands A′.
  • the sample is then imaged under conditions that detect the blue fluorophore. Imaging the blue fluorophore detects protein #1 and protein #3, each bound by imager strand A′ labeled with the blue fluorophore.
  • the sample is then washed to remove imager strands A′.
  • the sample is contacted with imager strands B′.
  • the sample is then imaged again under conditions that detect the blue fluorophore.
  • Imaging the blue fluorophore now detects protein #2 and protein #3, each bound by imager strand B′ labeled with the blue fluorophore.
  • Overlapping images of the blue fluorophores detects protein #3 only, the only protein bound by two imager strands labeled with a blue fluorophore.
  • the identification and location of proteins #1-#3 are identified by the overlay of images detecting the blue fluorophores and is based on signal intensity.
  • a sample contains, or is suspected of containing, fifteen target species.
  • the docking strands are designed such that each target species binds to a docking strand, each docking strand containing a single distinct domain or a distinct combination of domains A-D (e.g., A, or A and B (i.e., A/B), or A/C, or A/D, or A/B/C, or A/B/D, or A/C/D, or A/B/C/D, or B, or B/C, or B/D, or B/C/D, or C, or C/D, or D).
  • A-D e.g., A, or A and B (i.e., A/B), or A/C, or A/D, or A/B/C, or A/B/D, or A/C/D, or A/B/C/D, or B, or B/C, or B/C/D, or C, or C/D, or D).
  • the imager strands are divided into two sets: the first set (set #1) contains imager strand A′ labeled by a red fluorophore and imager strand B′ labeled by a blue fluorophore; the second set contains imager strand C′ labeled with a red fluorophore and imager strand D′ labeled with a blue fluorophore.
  • the sample is first contacted with the docking strands, and subsequently contacted with imager strand set #1.
  • the sample is then imaged under conditions that detect blue and red fluorophores. Targets bound by imager strands A′ will be detected red and targets bound by imager strands B′ will be detected blue.
  • each of the 15 target species can be identified using only four imager strands and two fluorophores. It should be understood that more than four imager strands can be used as well as more than two fluorophores, depending on, for example, the number of targets.
  • the disclosure contemplates contacting target species with different docking strands domain sequence and different lengths of those sequences.
  • the length of a docking strand imager binding domain affects the duration of transient binding to an imager strand. Docking strands with longer binding domains bind to respectively complementary imager strands for longer durations relative to shorter binding domains.
  • a sample contains, or is suspected of containing, four target species.
  • Four docking strands are designed such that: the first, containing binding domain A of 10 nucleotides in length (A10), binds to protein #1; the second, containing imager binding domain A10 and imager binding domain B of 8 nucleotides in length (B8), binds to protein #2; the third, containing imager binding domain A of 8 nucleotides in length (A8) and imager binding domain B of 10 nucleotides in length (B10), binds to protein #3; and four, containing imager strand binding domain B10.
  • Imager strand A′ is 10 nucleotides in length, binds to both A8 and A10, and is labeled with a blue fluorophore.
  • Imager strand B′ is 10 nucleotides in length, binds to both B8 and B10, and is labeled with a red fluorophore.
  • the sample is first contacted with the docking strands, and subsequently contacted with imager strands A′ and B′.
  • the sample is then imaged under conditions that detect the blue fluorophore.
  • Imaging the blue fluorophore detects protein #3 and protein #4 with a longer bound time (i.e., time of binding between imager strand and docking strand) and protein #2 with a shorter bound time.
  • Imaging the red fluorophore detects protein #1 and protein #2 with a longer bound time and protein #3 with a shorter bound time.
  • Overlapping images of the blue and red fluorophores detects each of the four protein targets.
  • the present disclosure also contemplates combining multiplexed detection based on spectral resolution and duration, exchange and duration, and spectral resolution, exchange and duration.
  • a “sample” may comprise cells (or a cell), tissue, or bodily fluid such as blood (serum and/or plasma), urine, semen, lymphatic fluid, cerebrospinal fluid or amniotic fluid.
  • a sample may be obtained from (or derived from) any source including, without limitation, humans, animals, bacteria, viruses, microbes and plants.
  • a sample is a cell lysate or a tissue lysate.
  • a sample may also contain mixtures of material from one source or different sources.
  • a sample may be a spatial area or volume (e.g., a grid on an array, or a well in a plate or dish).
  • a sample includes target(s), BP-NA conjugate(s) and imager strand(s).
  • a “target” is any moiety that one wishes to observe or quantitate and for which a binding partner exists.
  • a target in some embodiments, may be non-naturally occurring.
  • the target in some embodiments, may be a biomolecule.
  • a “biomolecule” is any molecule that is produced by a living organism, including large macromolecules such as proteins, polysaccharides, lipids and nucleic acids (e.g., DNA and RNA such as mRNA), as well as small molecules such as primary metabolites, secondary metabolites, and natural products.
  • biomolecules include, without limitation, DNA, RNA, cDNA, or the DNA product of RNA subjected to reverse transcription, A23187 (Calcimycin, Calcium Ionophore), Abamectine, Abietic acid, Acetic acid, Acetylcholine, Actin, Actinomycin D, Adenosine, Adenosine diphosphate (ADP), Adenosine monophosphate (AMP), Adenosine triphosphate (ATP), Adenylate cyclase, Adonitol, Adrenaline, epinephrine, Adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH), Aequorin, Aflatoxin, Agar, Alamethicin, Alanine, Albumins, Aldosterone, Aleurone, Alpha-amanitin, Allantoin, Allethrin, ⁇ -Amanatin, Amino acid, Amylase, Anabolic steroid, Anethole, Angiotensinogen, Anisomycin,
  • a target may be a protein target such as, for example, proteins of a cellular environment (e.g., intracellular or membrane proteins).
  • proteins include, without limitation, fibrous proteins such as cytoskeletal proteins (e.g., actin, arp2/3, coronin, dystrophin, FtsZ, keratin, myosin, nebulin, spectrin, tau, titin, tropomyosin, tubulin and collagen) and extracellular matrix proteins (e.g., collagen, elastin, f-spondin, pikachurin, and fibronectin); globular proteins such as plasma proteins (e.g., serum amyloid P component and serum albumin), coagulation factors (e.g., complement proteins,C1-inhibitor and C3-convertase, Factor VIII, Factor XIII, fibrin, Protein C, Protein S, Protein Z, Protein Z-related protease inhibitor, thrombin, Von Willebrand
  • a target may be a nucleic acid target such as, for example, nucleic acids of a cellular environment.
  • a nucleic acid refers to a polymeric form of nucleotides of any length, such as deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, or analogs thereof.
  • a nucleic acid may be a DNA, RNA or the DNA product of RNA subjected to reverse transcription.
  • Non-limiting examples of nucleic acids include coding or non-coding regions of a gene or gene fragment, loci (locus) defined from linkage analysis, exons, introns, messenger RNA (mRNA), transfer RNA, ribosomal RNA, ribozymes, cDNA, recombinant nucleic acids, branched nucleic acids, plasmids, vectors, isolated DNA of any sequence, isolated RNA of any sequence, nucleic acid probes, and primers.
  • loci locus
  • locus defined from linkage analysis, exons, introns, messenger RNA (mRNA), transfer RNA, ribosomal RNA, ribozymes, cDNA, recombinant nucleic acids, branched nucleic acids, plasmids, vectors, isolated DNA of any sequence, isolated RNA of any sequence, nucleic acid probes, and primers.
  • nucleic acids include, without limitation, cDNA, aptamers, peptide nucleic acids (“PNA”), 2′-5′ DNA (a synthetic material with a shortened backbone that has a base-spacing that matches the A conformation of DNA; 2′-5′ DNA will not normally hybridize with DNA in the B form, but it will hybridize readily with RNA), locked nucleic acids (“LNA”), and nucleic acids with modified backbones (e.g., base- or sugar-modified forms of naturally-occurring nucleic acids).
  • PNA peptide nucleic acids
  • 2′-5′ DNA a synthetic material with a shortened backbone that has a base-spacing that matches the A conformation of DNA; 2′-5′ DNA will not normally hybridize with DNA in the B form, but it will hybridize readily with RNA
  • LNA locked nucleic acids
  • nucleic acids with modified backbones e.g., base- or sugar-modified forms of naturally-occurring nucleic acids
  • a nucleic acid may comprise modified nucleotides, such as methylated nucleotides and nucleotide analogs (“analogous” forms of purines and pyrimidines are well known in the art). If present, modifications to the nucleotide structure may be imparted before or after assembly of the polymer.
  • a nucleic acid may be a single-stranded, double-stranded, partially single-stranded, or partially double-stranded DNA or RNA.
  • a nucleic acid (e.g., a nucleic acid target) is naturally-occurring.
  • a “naturally occurring” refers to a nucleic acid that is present in organisms or viruses that exist in nature in the absence of human intervention.
  • a nucleic acid naturally occurs in an organism or virus.
  • a nucleic acid is genomic DNA, messenger RNA, ribosomal RNA, micro-RNA, pre-micro-RNA, pro-micro-RNA, viral DNA, viral RNA or piwi-RNA.
  • a nucleic acid target is not a synthetic DNA nanostructure (e.g., two-dimensional (2-D) or three-dimensional (3-D) DNA nanostructure that comprises two or more nucleic acids hybridized to each other by Watson-Crick interactions to form the 2-D or 3-D nanostructure).
  • a synthetic DNA nanostructure e.g., two-dimensional (2-D) or three-dimensional (3-D) DNA nanostructure that comprises two or more nucleic acids hybridized to each other by Watson-Crick interactions to form the 2-D or 3-D nanostructure.
  • nucleic acid docking strands and imager strands described herein can be any one of the nucleic acids described above (e.g., DNA, RNA, modified nucleic acids, nucleic acid analogues, naturally-occurring nucleic acids, synthetic nucleic acids).
  • the present disclosure also provides methods for quantitating fluorescent moieties or emitters in a dense cluster that cannot be spatially resolved using prior art imaging techniques. Prior to the invention, no systematic model existed that describes the kinetics of photoswitching of fluorescent signals.
  • Stochastic super-resolution imaging using transient binding of short oligonucleotides (e.g., imager strands) to their targets offers a unique possibility to quantitatively count integer numbers of labeled molecules in a diffraction-limited area.
  • “Switching” molecules from a fluorescent OFF- to an ON-state in the method of the present disclosure is facilitated by single-molecule nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) hybridization events, which are governed by a very predictable kinetic model with a second order association rate k on and a first order dissociation rate k off :
  • the kinetic parameters k on and k off are now directly linked to fluorescent ON- and OFF-times ( ⁇ b and ⁇ d , respectively) depicted in FIG. 7A .
  • the fluorescence OFF-time ⁇ d is determined by the association rate k on , the concentration of imager strands in solution c imager , and the number of observed binding sites bs:
  • the number of binding sites for an unknown molecule or area can be obtained according to the equation:
  • the quantification of a fluorescence image may be done automatically using binding kinetics analysis software.
  • a typical image is recorded in a time-lapsed fashion (e.g., 15000 frames with a frame rate of 10 Hz).
  • Fluorescence spot detection and fitting e.g., Gaussian fitting, Centroid fitting, or Bessel fitting
  • a calibration marker is selected (e.g., a DNA origami structure with a defined number of spots as in FIG. 7C ).
  • the software automatically calculates the fluorescence dark time ⁇ d by fitting the OFF-time distribution to a cumulative distribution function. Using the equations described above, the product of k on ⁇ c imager can be calculated. This product is used to calculate the number of docking sites, and thus targets in the imaged area.
  • the selection of areas of interest in the resolved (e.g., super-resolved) imaged can be performed automatically by applying a second spot detection step, e.g., to calculate the number of targets in a cluster.
  • fluorescence spot detection and fitting e.g., Gau
  • fitting function refers to a mathematical function used to fit the intensity profile of molecules.
  • fitting functions include, without limitation, Gaussian fitting, Centroid fitting, and Bessel fitting. It should be understood that while many aspects and embodiments of the present disclosure refer to Gaussian fitting, other fitting functions may be used instead of, or in addition to, Gaussian fitting.
  • compositions that comprise at least one or at least two (e.g., a plurality) BP-NA conjugate(s) (e.g., protein-nucleic acid conjugate(s)) of the present disclosure.
  • the BP-NA conjugates may be bound to a target of interest (e.g., biomolecule) and/or transiently bound to a complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strand.
  • a composition may comprise a plurality of the same species or distinct species of BP-NA conjugates.
  • a composition may comprise at least 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 10 4 , 50000, 10 5 , 10 5 , 10 6 , 10 7 , 10 8 , 10 9 , 10 10 , 10 11 BP-NA conjugates.
  • a composition may comprise at least 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 10 4 , 50000, 10 5 , 10 5 , 10 6 , 10 7 , 10 8 , 10 9 , 10 10 , 10 11 complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strands.
  • a composition may contain 1 to about 200 or more distinct species of BP-NA conjugates and/or imager strands.
  • a composition may contain at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200 or more distinct species.
  • a composition may contain less than about 5 to about 200 distinct species of BP-NA conjugates and/or imager strands.
  • a composition may contain less than 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175 or 200 distinct species.
  • the number of complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strands imager stands in a composition may be less than, equal to or greater than the number of BP-NA conjugates in the composition.
  • kits comprising one or more components as provided herein.
  • the kits may comprise, for example, a BP-NA conjugate and/or a fluorescently-labeled imager strands.
  • the kits may also comprise components for producing a BP-NA conjugate or for labeling an imager strand.
  • the kits may comprise a binding partner (e.g., antibody), docking strands and intermediate linkers such as, for example, biotin and streptavidin molecules, and/or imager strands.
  • the kits can be used for any purpose apparent to those of skill in the art, including, those described above.
  • kits may include other reagents as well, for example, buffers for performing hybridization reactions.
  • the kit may also include instructions for using the components of the kit, and/or for making and/or using the BP-NA conjugates and/or labeled imager strands.
  • a kit comprises at least one docking strand and at least one labeled imager strand that is capable of transiently binding to a docking strand.
  • the docking strands may or may not be conjugated to a binding partner.
  • the docking strands are conjugated to “generic” non-target-specific affinity molecule (e.g., biotin or streptavidin), which may be used to link a docking strand to binding partner chosen by an end user.
  • the affinity molecule is a secondary antibody.
  • a kit comprises at least one docking strand, at least one affinity molecule such as a secondary antibody, and at least one imager strand.
  • a kit comprises (a) at least one docking strand linked to a binding partner such as a protein (e.g., a protein that binds to a target) and (b) at least one (e.g., at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, at least 10, at least 100) labeled imager strand that is capable of transiently binding (e.g., transiently binds) to a docking strand.
  • a docking strand may comprise, for example, at least two domains or at least three domain, wherein each domain binds to a respective complementary labeled imager strand.
  • the number of labeled imager strands may be, for example, less than, greater than or equal to the number of docking strands.
  • the binding partner may be a protein such as, for example, an antibody (e.g., monoclonal antibody), an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
  • a kit comprises at least two different binding partners (e.g., proteins), each specific for a different target.
  • a binding partner e.g., protein
  • a docking strand is modified to contain an affinity molecule that can be used to link the docking strand to a binding partner.
  • the affinity molecule is a secondary antibody.
  • An imager strand in some embodiments, is labeled with at least one fluorescent label (e.g., at least one fluorophore).
  • the length of an imager strand is 4 to 30 nucleotides, or longer.
  • the length of an imager strand may be 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 nucleotides.
  • the length of an imager strand is 8 to 10 nucleotides.
  • a kit comprises at least two imager strands, each different from one another.
  • the thermal stability of a docking strand transiently bound to its complementary labeled imager strand is within 0.5 kcal/mol of the thermal stability of other docking strands transiently bound to their respective labeled imager strands.
  • a kit comprises (a) at least one docking strand linked to a monoclonal antibody or an antigen binding fragment thereof (e.g., a monoclonal antibody or an antigen binding fragment thereof that binds to a target) and (b) at least one (e.g., at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, at least 10, at least 100) labeled imager strand that is capable of transiently binding (e.g., transiently binds) to a docking strand.
  • a docking strand may comprise, for example, at least two domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
  • a kit comprises at least two different monoclonal antibodies or antigen binding fragments thereof, each specific for a different target.
  • a monoclonal antibody or an antigen binding fragment thereof in some embodiments, is linked to a docking strand through an intermediate linker that includes biotin and streptavidin (e.g., a biotin-streptavidin-biotin linker).
  • An imager strand in some embodiments, is labeled with at least one fluorescent label (e.g., at least one fluorophore).
  • the length of an imager strand is 4 to 30 nucleotides, or longer.
  • the length of an imager strand may be 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 nucleotides.
  • the length of an imager strand is 8 to 10 nucleotides.
  • a kit comprises at least two imager strands, each different from one another.
  • the thermal stability of a docking strand transiently bound to a complementary labeled imager strand is within 0.5 kcal/mol of the thermal stability of other docking strands transiently bound to their respective labeled imager strands.
  • BP-NA conjugates e.g., protein-nucleic acid conjugates or antibody-nucleic acid conjugates
  • BP-NA conjugates can be used, inter alia, in any assay in which existing target detection technologies are used.
  • assays include detection assays including diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, patient monitoring assays, screening assays, biowarfare assays, forensic analysis assays, prenatal genomic diagnostic assays and the like.
  • the assay may be an in vitro assay or an in vivo assay.
  • the present disclosure provides the advantage that many different targets can be analyzed at one time from a single sample using the methods of the present disclosure, even where such targets are spatially not resolvable (and thus spatially indistinct) using prior art imaging methods. This allows, for example, for several diagnostic tests to be performed on one sample.
  • the BP-NA conjugates can also be used to simply observe an area or region.
  • the methods of the present disclosure may be applied to the analysis of samples obtained or derived from a patient so as to determine whether a diseased cell type is present in the sample and/or to stage the disease.
  • a blood sample can be assayed according to any of the methods described herein to determine the presence and/or quantity of markers of a cancerous cell type in the sample, thereby diagnosing or staging the cancer.
  • the methods described herein can be used to diagnose pathogen infections, for example infections by intracellular bacteria and viruses, by determining the presence and/or quantity of markers of bacterium or virus, respectively, in the sample.
  • the targets detected using the methods, compositions and kits of the present disclosure may be either patient markers (such as a cancer marker) or markers of infection with a foreign agent, such as bacterial or viral markers.
  • the quantitative imaging methods of the present disclosure may be used, for example, to quantify targets (e.g., target biomolecules) whose abundance is indicative of a biological state or disease condition (e.g., blood markers that are upregulated or downregulated as a result of a disease state).
  • targets e.g., target biomolecules
  • a biological state or disease condition e.g., blood markers that are upregulated or downregulated as a result of a disease state.
  • compositions and kits of the present disclosure may be used to provide prognostic information that assists in determining a course of treatment for a patient.
  • the amount of a particular marker for a tumor can be accurately quantified from even a small sample from a patient.
  • overexpression of certain proteins, such as Her2-neu indicate a more aggressive course of treatment will be needed.
  • the methods of the present disclosure may also be used for determining the effect of a perturbation, including chemical compounds, mutations, temperature changes, growth hormones, growth factors, disease, or a change in culture conditions, on various targes, thereby identifying targets whose presence, absence or levels are indicative of a particular biological states.
  • the present disclosure is used to elucidate and discover components and pathways of disease states. For example, the comparison of quantities of targets present in a disease tissue with “normal” tissue allows the elucidation of important targets involved in the disease, thereby identifying targets for the discovery/screening of new drug candidates that can be used to treat disease.
  • the sample being analyzed may be a biological sample, such as blood, sputum, lymph, mucous, stool, urine and the like.
  • the sample may be an environmental sample such as a water sample, an air sample, a food sample and the like.
  • the assay may be carried out with one or more components of the binding reaction immobilized.
  • the targets or the BP-NA conjugates may be immobilized.
  • the assay may be carried out with one or more components of the binding reaction non-immobilized.
  • the assays may involve detection of a number of targets in a sample, essentially at the same time, in view of the multiplexing potential offered by the BP-NA conjugates and fluorescently-labeled imager strands of the present disclosure.
  • an assay may be used to detect a particular cell type (e.g., based on a specific cell surface receptor) and a particular genetic mutation in that particular cell type. In this way, an end user may be able to determine how many cells of a particular type carry the mutation of interest, as an example.
  • the device is a polymer-based (e.g., polydimethylsiloxane (PDMS)) device comprising first and second channels, each connected at one end to a sample chamber.
  • PDMS polydimethylsiloxane
  • This configuration permits one or more fluid(s) to be sequentially administered to the sample at a controlled rate.
  • a syringe may be used to administer a first fluid to the sample through a first channel of the device.
  • the syringe may then be used to administer a second fluid, which passes through the first channel of the device into the sample chamber, thereby forcing the first fluid out of the sample chamber, passing through a second channel and into, for example, a reservoir connected to the second channel ( FIG. 23A ).
  • the device is positioned on a glass slide to permit viewing from a microscope objective positioned below the device.
  • Super-resolution imaging with increased spatial resolution may be achieved, in some embodiments, by increasing the number of photons per localization event using one of two strategies, depicted in FIG. 11A .
  • the first strategy the maximum number of photons from single, replenishable fluorophores is extracted.
  • High laser excitation power, in combination with fluorophore stabilization buffers ( 16 , 17 ) may be used to “bleach” transiently bound fluorophores at docking sites (or sites of docking strands), thus extracting the maximal number of photons per binding event and dye ( FIG. 11A ).
  • a fluorescent DNA nanostructure or “metafluorophore,” may be constructed by decorating a compact DNA nanostructure with many fluorophores (FIG. 11 B 3 ). The sum of the individual dye emissions from a metafluorophore are interpreted as originating from the same point source, and thus, using the metafluorophore in place of a standard fluorophore (e.g., Cy3) further improves the localization precision.
  • a standard fluorophore e.g., Cy3
  • FIG. 11 B 4 A more advanced version of the metafluorophore with active background suppression is depicted in FIG. 11 B 4 .
  • the clam-shell-like structure acts as a conditional fluorophore that only fluoresces when it is bound to the docking strand.
  • the present disclosure also provides algorithms used for spot detection, fitting and drift correction, as described below.
  • Some embodiments are directed to methods and apparatus for correcting drift in images recorded in a time sequence.
  • a non-limiting application of the techniques for performing drift correction is to correct for drift in molecular scale DNA-based imaging described herein involving transiently binding between docking strands and imaging strands.
  • the techniques described herein may alternatively be used to correct for drift in other imaging applications where one or more transient imaging events are recorded during a time sequence of images, and embodiments related to drift correction are not limited to molecular scale DNA-based imaging.
  • a DNA nanostructure can be used as a drift marker.
  • Any suitable DNA nanostructure see, e.g., (Rothemund US-2007/0117109 A1), single-stranded tiles (Yin et al., “Programming DNA Tube Circumferences,” Science (2008): 321: 824-826), DNA hairpins (Yin et al. US-2009/0011956 A1; Yin et al., “Programming biomolecular self-assembly pathways,” Nature (2008) 451:318-323) may be used, and may be made using, e.g., DNA origami techniques.
  • Drift correction using DNA nanostructure-based drift markers in combination with advanced analysis and post-processing techniques has the advantage of high precision correction, compatibility with long time imaging and simplicity of implementation.
  • Conventional nucleic acid-based imaging techniques incorporating drift markers based on fluorescent beads suffer from the limited length of imaging time before the beads are bleached; whereas bright field imaging requires specialized equipment, e.g. dual-field camera view.
  • Drift correction techniques in accordance with some embodiments described herein may include a plurality of stages, where each of the stages uses a different technique to perform drift correction.
  • the output from one stage is provided as input to a subsequent stage for additional drift correction processing.
  • a coarse drift correction is performed by comparing localizations from neighboring frames.
  • a single drift marker is selected and its time trace is used as a different coarse correction.
  • a group of drift markers is selected, either automatically or with user input, and their time traces are then combined to compute a more precise drift correction.
  • a fourth stage localizations are pooled from template-based drift markers displaying spots in a defined and spatially resolvable geometry (e.g., 4 ⁇ 3 grid points).
  • a smoothing of the drift correction is performed to further reduce noise and enabling the resolution of the final image to approach molecular-scale resolution.
  • an amount of drift in the time sequence of images may be characterized using a quality measure, and based, at least in part, on the quality measure, one or more of the stages may be eliminated.
  • all five stages may be performed, as embodiments are not limited in this respect.
  • additional drift correction stages used in combination with at least one of the stages described herein may also be used.
  • FWHM Full Width at Half Maximum
  • the recorded image stack is referred to herein as a “movie” and each of the individual images as a “frame.”
  • Each frame of the movie is operated on with a spot finding algorithm, and then a local Gaussian fitting algorithm may be used for each identified spot; the spot and its fitted center position localization are interchangeably referred to herein as a “localization.”
  • the frames of the movie capture one or more transient events that are present in some frames but not others.
  • binding events are discussed in further detail below as one illustrative transient event that may be analyzed using the techniques described herein for performing drift correction, it should be appreciated that other types of transient events imaged in a time sequence may alternatively be used.
  • time trace the collection of all localizations throughout the entire movie is collectively referred to as the “time trace,” which reflects the movement of an observed structure, and is used for drift correction in several different ways, as described in more detail below.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a schematic overview of five stages of a drift correction procedure that may be performed in accordance with the techniques described herein. The stages are illustrated as being performed consecutively in an order from an unprocessed image to a final image that has been processed using the techniques of each of the five stages. Each of these stages will be discussed in more detail below.
  • FIG. 12A (i) illustrates schematics showing the principle of each stage of drift correction. In each image, black markers and lines indicate source data, and red values and curves indicate the calculated drift correction.
  • FIG. 12A (ii) shows a schematic drawing of the major type of drift markers (e.g., DNA drift markers) used in each stage.
  • FIG. 12B (i) illustrates an example structure showing the imaging quality after each stage or correction, and FIG.
  • FIG. 12B (ii) shows a zoomed image of the corresponding green rectangle in FIG. 12B (i) at each stage.
  • the scale bars shown in FIGS. 12 B(i) and 12 B(ii) correspond to 50 nm.
  • FIG. 12C (i) illustrates an example drift trace after each stage of correction
  • FIG. 12C (ii) shows a zoomed image of the corresponding green rectangle in FIG. 12C (i) at each stage.
  • the scale bars in FIG. 12C (i) correspond to x: 500 nm, t: 500 s
  • the scale bars in FIG. 12C (ii) correspond to x: 10 nm, t: 10 s.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates an alternate representation of stages in a drift correction process in accordance with some embodiments.
  • an image resolution output from the first stage may be on the order of 1 ⁇ m.
  • an image resolution output from the second stage may be on the order of 200 nm.
  • an image resolution output from the third stage may be on the order of 20 nm.
  • an image resolution output from the fourth stage may be on the order of 5 nm.
  • an image resolution output from the fourth stage may be on the order of less than 5 nm.
  • DNFL Distance between Neighboring Frame Localizations
  • the procedure for calculating the DNFL for an image is outlined as follows. For each pair of NF (Neighboring Frames, e.g. frame #1 and #2), all localizations from both frames are pooled and the distance between every pair of localizations from different frames (e.g. one localization from frame #1 versus another from frame #2) is calculated, assuming no drift between the frames. The resulting distances from all NF pairs are pooled to provide a bimodal distribution. The first mode of the bimodal distribution is broad, high in amplitude, and spans the width of the field of view. The second mode of the bimodal distribution is sharp, low in amplitude, and close to zero, and corresponds to localizations from the same binding event.
  • the quality of a final drift-corrected image may assessed by characterizing the Point Spread Function (PSF) of a single binding site.
  • PSF Point Spread Function
  • a statistical overlay of images of more than thousands of single docking sites may be produced as the reference for the PSF distribution.
  • image supported resolution sigma*2.35.
  • the isolation and overlay of single isolated docking sites may be performed with the help of an auxiliary DNA nanostructure.
  • This structure has a known pattern of well-separated docking sites (e.g., a lattice grid pattern), and may be the same structure used for the template-based drift correction stage, discussed in more detail below.
  • a lattice grid pattern e.g., a lattice grid pattern
  • the above determined image quality of the whole image may not reflect the true imaging quality for each single sample object in the imaging field.
  • structures closer to the center of the imaging field and better fixed to the optical surface are better illuminated, and show better resolution than those that are on the periphery and are less well fixed.
  • the image quality and resolution of a single molecule may be determined in a procedure similar to the one above.
  • a projection of a single molecule of an auxiliary DNA nanostructure may be taken along a direction that best separates the docking sites (in the case of lattice grid structures, this will be along any of the lattice directions), and a multi-Gaussian fit may be performed on the projected 1-D distribution.
  • the standard deviation of the fitted Gaussian peaks may then be determined and similarly used to infer the resolution of a single-molecule image.
  • the five stages incorporating techniques for performing drift correction operate in series to reduce the drift of an unprocessed image, where each consecutive stage reduces the drift further, and low enough for the successful operation of the next stage.
  • less than all five stages may be used. For example, if it is determined that there is low drift in the original image, the localizations in each frame may be separable, and processing may begin from the second stage without requiring processing by first stage. If it is determined that there is even lower drift in the original image, processing may be begin from the third stage without significant loss of final image quality.
  • drift correction Due to the complex origin of drift, which may involve, among other things, thermal fluctuation and expansion, microscope stage movement due to electric motor activation, vibration from the building and optical table complex, controlling drift in the original image tends to be difficult, and including the first two stages is often useful in producing a final image with desired resolution. For example, including all five stages described herein provides a robust strategy for drift correction that is applicable to images taken in most biology labs, without the requirement of specialized hardware or building requirements.
  • the amount of drift and overall image quality of the original unprocessed image may be determined using any suitable technique, and the determined image quality may be used to select a choice of drift correction stages to use in performing drift correction.
  • a technique for determining image quality may compare different temporal segments of the same image.
  • the original image may be divided into two halves by separately pooling localizations from the first half and the second half of the movie, respectively.
  • the cross-correlation between the two images may be calculated and a best offset may be estimated to provide an indication of the overall drift.
  • the indication of overall drift may be compared to one or more threshold values to determine whether one or more of the drift correction stages may be skipped in performing drift correction in accordance with the techniques described herein.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a process for performing drift correction in accordance with some embodiments.
  • drift correction is performed by considering differences in localizations across neighboring frames of a movie.
  • the process then proceeds to act 220 , where a single drift marker is selected, a time trace describing the movement of the drift marker over time during the movie is determined, and the time trace for the single drift marker is used to perform drift correction of the image.
  • the process then proceeds to act 230 , where time traces are determined for each of a plurality of drift markers identified in the image. As discussed in more detail below, differences between the time traces may be used to provide a further drift correction in the final image.
  • the process then proceeds to act 240 , where drift correction using geometrically-constrained templates is performed.
  • act 250 where the image is further drift corrected by smoothing the drift trace using suitable smoothing techniques, as discussed in more detail below.
  • suitable smoothing techniques as discussed in more detail below.
  • Each of the five stages for performing drift correction in accordance with the techniques described herein are described in further detail below. As should be appreciated from the foregoing discussion, not all embodiments require the use of all five stages for drift correction processing. For example, in some embodiments, only acts 230 and 240 may be performed. In other embodiments, acts 230 , 240 , and 250 may be performed. In yet other embodiments, acts 220 , 230 , 240 and 250 may be performed without including act 210 .
  • a first stage of drift correction (e.g., act 210 of FIG. 13 ) operates by comparing localizations from neighboring frames in a movie.
  • a procedure similar to the DNFL calculation described above (or any other suitable technique) may be used to identify pairs of localizations originating from the same transient event (e.g., a single binding event). All pairs of localizations originating from the same transient event may be pooled to create a bimodal distribution. After creating a bimodal distribution of the localizations from neighboring images, a cutoff value may be automatically determined to separate those pairs of localizations from the same event (close localizations), from those that are different.
  • the first stage of drift correction typically corrects for global drift with high amplitude (farther than 1 ⁇ m in offset), which effectively removes interference between different drift markers and allows for incorporation of the next stage.
  • the first stage of processing may be omitted. A determination of whether the first stage of processing may be omitted may be made using an image quality factor analysis, as discussed above, or using any other suitable technique (e.g., manual inspection).
  • a second stage of drift correction operates on a single drift marker or sample object.
  • the single drift marker for use in this stage of drift correction processing may be selected in any suitable way.
  • the single drift marker may be randomly selected from the set of all identified drift markers.
  • a particular drift marker associated with desirable qualities e.g., an average amount of drift over the entire movie
  • After selecting the single drift marker its time trace is automatically determined, smoothed, and output as the drift correction.
  • a drift trace may be manually drawn in cases where separation between drift markers is hard to identify automatically.
  • the second stage of drift correction further reduces global drift in the movie (typically ⁇ 200 nm), and allows automatic batch identification of drift markers in the following stages.
  • a third stage of drift correction (e.g., stage 230 of FIG. 2 ) combines the time traces of a plurality of drift markers to compute drift correction with a finer resolution than the second stage of drift correction.
  • Each drift marker has a large number of docking sites to allow a high temporal coverage; and a large number of these drift markers are deposited onto the imaging surface together with the samples.
  • the number of binding sites on each drift marker and the concentration of drift markers on the surface may be selected appropriately to ensure a high quality drift correction, as the improvement in drift correction in performing this stage is primarily determined by the spread of each drift marker in the image and the effective number of drift markers per frame.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a process for performing drift correction corresponding to stage 230 of FIG. 2 .
  • locations of a plurality of drift markers are identified. Identifying locations of the plurality of drift markers may include pooling localizations from all frames of the movie to calculate a two-dimensional (2D) histogram. Then, the locations of drift markers may be identified by appropriately tuning the histogram binning size and a combination of other selection criteria. For example, the binning size of the histogram may be tuned to reflect the feature size of the drift marker, e.g., a fourth or third of their overall size.
  • the range of selection criteria includes, but it is not limited to, a lower-bound threshold of the histogram value and filtering based on geometrical properties (e.g., area, dimensions). Adequate separation between nearby drift markers is often necessary to exclude false localizations, which, for example, arise from spurious localizations of double-binding events.
  • the process to act 320 where the time trace for each drift marker is determined and the relative time trace determined as the offset of each time trace from the center of the combined trace is computed. Because the images capture transient events (e.g., nucleic acid-binding events), not all time traces for a drift marker may cover all time points in the movie. In such cases, the time traces may be linearly interpolated at the “missing points” to achieve a finer and smoother result.
  • the process proceeds to act 330 , where the drift correction for the image is determined based on the time traces determined for each drift marker. Any suitable combination of the time traces may be used to determine the drift correction, and embodiments are not limited in this respect.
  • a weighted average of the time traces is used to determine the drift correction output from this stage. For example, a weighted average of the pool of relative time traces may be computed as the result of drift correction, where the correction is weighted by the quality of drift marker traces.
  • the quality of drift marker traces may be determined in any suitable way including, but not limited to, determining the quality by assessing drift marker quality or individual localization quality.
  • the quality of each drift marker trace is computed by taking the standard deviation (sigma) of the trace over time.
  • the inverse of this measure e.g., 1/sigma
  • the quality of each individual localization within the time traces may be computed as the localization uncertainty given by the formula in Thomson, 2002.
  • the inverse of the standard deviation of this calculation may be used as the weight factor for each time trace.
  • This stage of drift correction may be performed any number of times. In some embodiments, this stage of drift correction is iteratively performed with different parameters used for each iteration. As drift correction proceeds, the remaining drift amplitude is decreased further and further, the spatial spread-out of drift markers becomes smaller and smaller, and selection of drift markers may be performed more and more stringently. Consequently, in initial iterations, the threshold histogram count may be set to a lower value, and this value may be adjusted during later iterations to higher values. Additionally, in some embodiments, the valid area and dimensions of drift markers may be set to larger values in initial iterations, and later adjusted to smaller values during subsequent iterations. Yet further, in some embodiments, separation between drift markers may be shifted from larger values to smaller values in later iterations. In some embodiments, an interactive quality check (either manually or automatically performed) may be determined between iterations to facilitate a determination of further operations.
  • this stage of drift correction typically brings the obtained image resolution to within a factor of two from the best allowed resolution (i.e. if the precision of each individual localization supports resolution of ⁇ 5 nm, then this stage usually yields ⁇ 10 nm resolution).
  • this stage usually yields ⁇ 10 nm resolution.
  • a resolution ⁇ 10 nm may be obtained following processing with this stage.
  • a fourth stage of drift correction uses drift marker “templates,” and thus this stage is termed “templated drift correction.”
  • One or more drift marker templates e.g., DNA nanostructures with docking sites in a known and well-separated geometric arrangement
  • the separation between these docking sites is preferably chosen not to be not smaller than twice the resulting resolution from the previous stage (e.g., stage three), allowing easy separation between localizations from different docking sites.
  • the number of docking sites on these templates as well as the concentration of the docking sites on the surface is preferably chosen to achieve effective template correction, similar that described for the third stage.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a process for performing drift correction corresponding to stage 240 of FIG. 2 .
  • act 410 a plurality of drift correction templates are identified from a 2-D histogram of localizations pooled across all frames of the movie. To distinguish the drift templates from the drift markers used in the third stage, an extra upper-bound threshold in histogram count may be incorporated in addition to the range of selection criteria as mentioned above.
  • act 420 the time trace of each drift template is determined. Because the docking sites are designed to be well separated in the templates, several non-overlapping time traces from individual docking sites may be isolated from each time trace of a full drift template. This identification and separation step may be carried out in a similar manner as the identification of drift markers from the entire image. For example, a combination of local histogram thresholding and filtering on standard deviation of the individual time traces for each drift template may be used.
  • the process proceeds to act 430 , where the combination of time traces is used to determine a drift correction for this stage. In some embodiments, this is accomplished by computing relative time traces for each time trace, and the relative time traces are used, at least in part, to determine the drift correction.
  • the relative time traces may be used in any suitable way to determine the drift correction. For example, in some embodiments, a weighted average of all the time traces of individual docking sites may be averaged to produce the final drift correction.
  • the weight factors may be determined in any suitable way. For example, the weight factors may be based on the quality of each individual site, or the quality of each individual localization in the time trace.
  • the process proceeds to act 440 where the image is corrected using the determined drift correction.
  • this stage of drift correction may result in a resolution of the final image being close to the best possible resolution. That is, if the precision of each individual localization supports a resolution of ⁇ 5 nm, performing template drift correction in accordance with the techniques described herein may achieve a resolution close to ⁇ 6 nm.
  • a DNA nanostructure with 12 docking sites arranged in a 4 ⁇ 3 grid of lattice spacing 20 nm may be used as the drift correction template. Template-based drift correction using the techniques described in this section may enable the achievement of 6-7 nm resolution after this stage.
  • a fifth stage of drift correction performs smoothing of the drift correction trace, and the smoothed drift correction trace may be used to perform drift correction.
  • the resultant drift correction may be smoothed using any suitable technique to produce the final drift correction result. Smoothing effectively increases the number of drift markers or drift templates in each frame, by taking the localizations in neighboring frames into account. Smoothing may be performed in any suitable manner using any suitable window period. For example, in some embodiments, smoothing is performed with a robust local regression method that operates over a window period determined by the characteristic drift time scale. A non-limiting example of a smoothing window period may be 10-30 s.
  • All stages described above can be directly applied to correct a 3D image (e.g., super-resolution image) as well.
  • a 3D image e.g., super-resolution image
  • an astigmatism lens may be introduced in the imaging path and the ellipticity of the resulting Gaussian emission profile may be used to determine a z-position of a molecule.
  • the above-described origami drift marker structures e.g., geometric-constrained templates
  • a DNA origami structure with a defined 3D shape e.g., a tetrahedron
  • FIG. 16 illustrates 3D tetrahedrons used as templates for 3D drift correction.
  • the four corners are labeled with docking sites.
  • FIG. 16A shows that the four corners are clearly resolved.
  • FIG. 16B illustrates the X-Z projection of the structures with a height of ⁇ 85 nm.
  • the above-described techniques for correcting drift in a plurality of time sequence images is described with respect to imaging a transient event identified using a single color in the images.
  • these techniques may be extended to multicolor imaging in which different transient events (e.g., binding of different nucleic acid drift markers with docking sites) are labeled with different colors that can be identified in the same image.
  • the geometric templates discussed above for template-based drift correction may include information describing a particular known geometry for the different transient events that correspond to the different colors.
  • the computer system 600 may include one or more processors 610 and one or more computer-readable non-transitory storage media (e.g., memory 620 and one or more non-volatile storage media 630 ).
  • the processor 610 may control writing data to and reading data from the memory 620 and the non-volatile storage device 630 in any suitable manner, as the aspects of the present disclosure described herein are not limited in this respect.
  • the processor 610 may execute one or more instructions stored in one or more computer-readable storage media (e.g., the memory 620 ), which may serve as non-transitory computer-readable storage media storing instructions for execution by the processor 610 .
  • computer-readable storage media e.g., the memory 620
  • the embodiments can be implemented in any of numerous ways.
  • the embodiments may be implemented using hardware, software or a combination thereof.
  • the software code can be executed on any suitable processor or collection of processors, whether provided in a single computer or distributed among multiple computers.
  • any component or collection of components that perform the functions described above can be generically considered as one or more controllers that control the above-discussed functions.
  • the one or more controllers can be implemented in numerous ways, such as with dedicated hardware, or with general purpose hardware (e.g., one or more processors) that is programmed using microcode or software to perform the functions recited above.
  • one implementation of the embodiments of the present disclosure comprises at least one non-transitory computer-readable storage medium (e.g., a computer memory, a floppy disk, a compact disk, a tape, etc.) encoded with a computer program (i.e., a plurality of instructions), which, when executed on a processor, performs the above-discussed functions of the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be transportable such that the program stored thereon can be loaded onto any computer resource to implement the aspects of the present disclosure discussed herein.
  • the reference to a computer program which, when executed, performs the above-discussed functions is not limited to an application program running on a host computer. Rather, the term computer program is used herein in a generic sense to reference any type of computer code (e.g., software or microcode) that can be employed to program a processor to implement the above-discussed aspects of the present disclosure.
  • inventive embodiments are presented by way of example only and that, within the scope of the appended claims and equivalents thereto, inventive embodiments may be practiced otherwise than as specifically described and claimed.
  • inventive embodiments of the present disclosure are directed to each individual feature, system, article, material, kit, and/or method described herein.
  • a reference to “A and/or B”, when used in conjunction with open-ended language such as “comprising” can refer, in one embodiment, to A only (optionally including elements other than B); in another embodiment, to B only (optionally including elements other than A); in yet another embodiment, to both A and B (optionally including other elements); etc.
  • the phrase “at least one,” in reference to a list of one or more elements, should be understood to mean at least one element selected from any one or more of the elements in the list of elements, but not necessarily including at least one of each and every element specifically listed within the list of elements and not excluding any combinations of elements in the list of elements.
  • This definition also allows that elements may optionally be present other than the elements specifically identified within the list of elements to which the phrase “at least one” refers, whether related or unrelated to those elements specifically identified.
  • “at least one of A and B” can refer, in one embodiment, to at least one, optionally including more than one, A, with no B present (and optionally including elements other than B); in another embodiment, to at least one, optionally including more than one, B, with no A present (and optionally including elements other than A); in yet another embodiment, to at least one, optionally including more than one, A, and at least one, optionally including more than one, B (and optionally including other elements); etc.
  • FIG. 2 Multiplexed super-resolution imaging of intra-cellular components in fixed cells was achieved by linking docking strands to antibodies ( FIG. 2 ). These antibody-DNA conjugates were formed by first reacting biotinylated docking strands with streptavidin, and then incubating with a biotinylated antibody against the protein of interest. Fixed HeLa cells were then immunostained using a preassembled antibody-DNA conjugate against beta-tubulin. Prior to imaging, ATTO655-labeled imager strands were introduced to the sample in hybridization buffer (1 ⁇ PBS supplemented with 500 mM NaCl), and single-molecule imaging was carried out using oblique illumination (9).
  • the resulting super-resolution images show a clear increase in spatial resolution in contrast to the diffraction-limited representation ( FIGS. 3 a -3 c ).
  • a cross-sectional profile taken at position ⁇ i> in FIG. 3B yields a distance of ⁇ 79 nm between two adjacent microtubules with an apparent width of ⁇ 47 and ⁇ 44 nm for each of the microtubules, which is in agreement with earlier reports for immunostained microtubules (13).
  • the antibody-DNA conjugation approach of the present disclosure yields a high labeling density, and little to no non-specific binding of imager strands to non-labeled cellular components occurs.
  • the microtubule network in a fixed HeLa cell was labeled with a preassembled antibody-DNA conjugate carrying a docking sequence for Cy3b-labeled strands, and mitochondria were stained using a second antibody linked to an orthogonal sequence for ATTO655 imager sequences. While both Cy3b- and ATTO655-labeled imager strands were present in solution at the same time, imaging was carried out sequentially in the Cy3b and ATTO655 channels and the resulting super-resolution images showed a clear increase in spatial resolution as compared to the diffraction-limited representation ( FIGS.
  • FIG. 5A shows a single DNA nanostructure, displaying four distinct sets of DNA sequences, designed to resemble the digits from 0 to 3, respectively. Imaging was performed sequentially using a simple flow chamber setup, first flushing in imager strands complementary to the docking strands of the number 0, and then exchanging the solution for imager strands with a sequence complementary to docking strands of the number 1 and so forth. The resulting images were pseudo-colored to represent the respective imaging rounds. The demonstration using DNA origami structures showed the high imaging efficiency as well as no crosstalk between consecutive imaging runs.
  • FIG. 5B (iii) shows a combined image of all ten rounds, demonstrating specific interaction of imager strands with respective targets with no observable crosstalk between cycles. Digits 8 and 9 are not present in the selected area. An apparent “green” digit 5 instead of 2 was observed ( ⁇ i> in FIG. 5B (iii)). This is likely not a falsely imaged digit 5 from crosstalk, but rather a “mirrored” digit 2. A mirrored image likely results from an origami immobilized upside-down, with docking strands trapped underneath, yet still accessible to imager strands.
  • the fluidic setup is designed to minimize sample movement by “decoupling” the fluid reservoir and syringe from the actual flow chamber via flexible tubing. To avoid sample distortion, special care was taken to ensure gentle fluid flow during washing steps. To verify that the sample indeed exhibited little movement and little-to-no distortion, a ten-round Exchange-PAINT experiment was performed. The DNA origami was imaged for digit 4 in the first round and reimaged after ten rounds of buffer exchange. The total sample movement (physical movement of the fluidic chamber with respect to the objective) was less than 2 ⁇ m, which could easily be corrected using fiducial markers. Normalized cross-correlation analysis for select structures produced a correlation coefficient 0.92, demonstrating almost no sample distortion (also see the discussion in the cellular imaging section).
  • Exchange-PAINT four different digit patterns were successfully imaged on the same DNA origami structure ( FIG. 5B (iv)).
  • Exchange-PAINT is not limited to spatially separate species and can resolve sub-diffraction patterns on the same structure with no observable crosstalk or sample distortion. Aligning images from different Exchange-PAINT rounds is straightforward using DNA origami-based drift markers. Additionally, because imaging is performed using the same dye, no chromatic aberration needs to be corrected between imaging rounds.
  • FIG. 7C a DNA origami nanostructure with 13 binding sites in a grid-like arrangement was used ( FIG. 7C ).
  • the incorporation efficiency for docking sites was not 100%, leading to a distribution of actually incorporated sites ( FIGS. 7C and 7 D 1 ). Nonetheless, the structures were an ideal test system because the number of available sites could be determined visually by counting the number of spots (“direct”) and comparing it with the corresponding number of sites calculated using the proposed binding kinetic analysis (“kinetics”).
  • FIG. 7 D 1 shows the binding site distribution for 377 origami structures obtained by direct counting.
  • the binding site distribution for the same structures obtained by binding kinetic analysis is shown in FIG. 7 D 2 .
  • the “offset” between direct and kinetic counting was calculated for each structure. The counting “error” or uncertainty for the method was less than 7% (determined by the coefficient of variation of the Gaussian distribution) with an imaging time of ⁇ 25 min.
  • binding frequency analysis rather than geometrical or spectral encoding.
  • Binding frequencies of BP-NA conjugates, or docking strands, to a molecule of interest is linearly dependent on the number of binding sites on this molecule.
  • binding frequency scales linearly with the number of binding sites, and can thus be used for identification.
  • 124 distinct dynamic “blinking signatures” were created using 3 colors and 4 levels of binding frequency per color ( FIG. 8 ). Compared to geometrical encoding, this approach features much more compact, unstructured probes.
  • the method of the present disclosure is more cost effective, scalable, and easier to implement. Only 3 fluorescently-labeled imager strands are required in this frequency encoding method, making it very cost-efficient for high-throughput screening experiments.
  • In vitro tests on a DNA origami test structure are shown in FIG. 8C .
  • the fluorescence ON-time or ⁇ b and thus the dissociation constant k off can also be used to encode information.
  • k off can be precisely tuned by the base-composition and/or length of the duplex of docking and imager strand.
  • the feasibility of this approach is illustrated in FIG. 9 : 1/ ⁇ d and 1/ ⁇ b are plotted vs. the length of the docking/imaging duplex. 1/ ⁇ d , and thus k on , is independent of the duplex stability.
  • extending the imaging/docking duplex from 9 to 10 nt by adding a single CG base pair reduces the kinetic OFF-rate by almost one order of magnitude.
  • a “microbarcode,” a minimal barcode that uses our ability to detect differences in thermodynamic stability of the imager/docking duplex was produced to identify a large number of molecules using a short, economical and unstructured probe.
  • the barcode contains only of a single DNA molecule, roughly 50 nt in length, which is used to tag a molecule of interest using a 21 nt target detection domain t* ( FIG. 10A ) followed by a ⁇ 30 nt long “barcode” region with a combination of 8, 9, or 10 nt long binding domain for red, green, or blue imager strands.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates a8, 9, or 10 nt long docking strands for three colors with a k off of 10, 1 and 0.1 per second, respectively.
  • FIG. 10A shows an example barcode consisting of an 8 nt long binding domain for a red imager strand, two 9 nt long binding domains for the green, and blue imager strand, respectively. This produces characteristic intensity vs. time traces with increased fluorescence ON-times ⁇ b for the 9 nt interaction domain compared to the 8 nt interaction domain ( FIG. 10B ). Stochastic simulations show that it is clearly possible to distinguish between k off values of 10, 1 and 0.1 per second, respectively ( FIG. 10C ).
  • a significant advantage of fluorescence imaging lies in its potential to visualize biomolecular processes in living cells.
  • One such challenge is in the delivery of a sufficient concentration of synthetic imaging probes to living cells in a biocompatible manner while also allowing for proper imaging conditions.
  • Another challenge is the extent of background fluorescence for unbound probes in the context of a live cell environment where macromolecular crowding may be more of a significant factor compared to fixed cell environments, and “live” helicases may influence binding kinetics.
  • RNA probe that can specifically bind to a target molecule in a living cell, and only then start to fluoresce and blink to enable super-resolution imaging of the specific target.
  • This conditional “blinking” probe is a small single-stranded RNA ( ⁇ 100 nt) with a target binding domain (TBD) and a conditional blinking domain (CBD).
  • TBD target binding domain
  • CBD conditional blinking domain
  • the CBD is under mechanical control of the TBD and is dark when the TBD is not bound to a target T.
  • the binding of TBD with target “T” results in a reconfiguration of the CBD and enables it to blink with an intensity and frequency suitable for the super-resolution imaging of T.
  • the blinking RNA probe is based on the Spinach aptamer system (ref. 19), a fluorescent RNA mimic of GFP ( FIG. 19 ).
  • Spinach can turn on the fluorescence of an initially dark small molecule DFHBI (similar to DMHBI), which is non-toxic and cell-permeable.
  • DFHBI dark small molecule
  • DFHBI binds and unbinds Spinach, it will alternate between a fluorescence ON- and OFF-state. The resulting blinking behavior is used to perform super-resolution fluorescence microscopy, which is referred to herein as “Spinach-PAINT” ( FIG. 20 ). Unlike most live cell super-resolution imaging techniques, Spinach-PAINT needs no special imaging conditions such as special buffer systems or external photoswitching or activation. More importantly, DFHBI is a small, cell-permeable molecule and has been shown to provide non-toxic imaging for living cells.
  • the necessary “blinking” behavior for super-resolution imaging can be obtained by altering the fluorescence ON- and OFF-times by adjusting the DFHBI concentration in solution and modifying/mutating Spinach to enhance/weaken the binding of DFHBI to it in the same spirit as one would tune the DNA-DNA binding interaction of an imaging strand with its partner. It is possible to characterize and optimize the binding kinetics of DFHBI to surface-immobilized Spinach based on single-molecule measurements ( FIG. 20 ). The binding kinetics are checked for compatibility with super-resolution microscopy based on transient binding.
  • a “doped” library of Spinach variants will be prepared, using a dNTP mixture containing the dNTP that is found in Spinach for each position and the other three dNTPs in a 2:1:1:1 ratio. This approach is typically used to optimize aptamer sequences (SELEX) (ref. 23). The Spinach variants will then be screened for variants with shorter DFHBI residence times. After 5-10 rounds of SELEX, clones will be individually characterized. A first step is to confirm that all the Spinach variants still exhibit Spinach-like fluorescence with comparable quantum yield and extinction coefficient upon binding DFHBI. It is generally easy to weaken rather than to strengthen the binding interaction between an aptamer and a small molecule.
  • a second step involves measuring the binding and unbinding rate constants of these Spinach variants by single-molecule imaging.
  • Spinach variants that exhibit binding durations that provide sufficient photon counts for obtaining precise super-resolution imaging will be chosen.
  • the DNA origami substrate has the advantage of providing a programmable environment for placing multiple Spinach molecules in a defined distance and geometry. This nanoscopic ruler system will enable us to precisely quantify the obtainable resolution of this super-resolution imaging technique ( FIG. 21 ).
  • RNAs that Exhibit Blinking upon Binding Tubulin for Super-Resolution Imaging of Cytoskeleton Proteins Spinach-based sensors that are activated by metabolites (ref. 24) and by proteins (ref. 25) have been generated. The approach of this disclosure will be used to generate Spinach-based sensors that are activated by binding tubulin, using tubulin-binding aptamers and the blinking Spinach variants described herein.
  • the allosteric form of Spinach is compromised of the modified Spinach aptamer domain fused to a “control” or “sensing” module consisting of an aptamer that binds a target of interest (ref. 24). Binding of the target results in the allosteric folding of the modified Spinach aptamer into an “active” conformation, enabling DFHBI binding and fluorescence ( FIG. 22 ).
  • a “control” or “sensing” module consisting of an aptamer that binds a target of interest
  • Binding of the target results in the allosteric folding of the modified Spinach aptamer into an “active” conformation, enabling DFHBI binding and fluorescence ( FIG. 22 ).
  • Several tubulin-binding DNA aptamers have been described (ref. 26). This disclosure provides for the evolution of control modules for Spinach capable of sensing tubulin using previously established protocols. Briefly, candidate aptamers will be fused to Spinach to
  • Spinach-PAINT can be used for, for example, super-resolution imaging of microtubules in live mammalian cells.
  • FIG. 23A shows an example of an experimental setup used for in vitro DNA origami experiments, as provided herein.
  • the sample is immobilized on a glass coverslip in a PDMS channel.
  • Imaging and washing buffers are added to a reservoir and pulled through the channel by a syringe.
  • Reservoirs and syringes are connected to the PDMS channel via flexible tubing and are, thus, mechanically decoupled.
  • FIG. 23B shows an experimental setup used for in situ cell imaging. Cells are imaged in a Lab-Tek II chamber. One syringe supplies new buffer solution, the second one removes the previous buffer.
  • Unmodified DNA oligonucleotides were purchased from Integrated DNA Technologies. Fluorescently modified DNA oligonucleotides were purchased from Biosynthesis. Biotinylated monoclonal antibodies against ⁇ -tubulin (9F3; Catalog number: 6181) and COX IV (3E11; Catalog number: 6014) were purchased from Cell Signaling. Anti-PMP70 (Catalog number: ab28499) was purchased from Abcam. Anti-TGN46 (Catalog number: NBP1-49643B) was purchased from VWR. Streptavidin was purchased from Invitrogen (Catalog number: S-888). Bovine serum albumin (BSA), and BSA-biotin was obtained from Sigma Aldrich (Catalog Number: A8549).
  • Buffer A (10 mM Tris-HCl, 100 mM NaCl, 0.05% Tween-20, pH 7.5
  • buffer B (5 mM Tris-HCl, 10 mM MgCl2, 1 mM EDTA, 0.05% Tween-20, pH 8)
  • buffer C (1 ⁇ PBS, 500 mM NaCl, pH 8).
  • Optical setup Fluorescence imaging was carried out on an inverted Nikon Eclipse Ti microscope (Nikon Instruments) with the Perfect Focus System, applying an objective-type TIRF configuration using a Nikon TIRF illuminator with an oil-immersion objective (CFI Apo TIRF 100 ⁇ , NA 1.49, Oil). For 2D imaging an additional 1.5 magnification was used to obtain a final magnification of ⁇ 150-fold, corresponding to a pixel size of 107 nm. Three lasers were used for excitation: 488 nm (200 mW nominal, Coherent Sapphire), 561 nm (200 mW nominal, Coherent Sapphire) and 647 nm (300 mW nominal, MBP Communications).
  • the laser beam was passed through cleanup filters (ZT488/10, ZET561/10, and ZET640/20, Chroma Technology) and coupled into the microscope objective using a multi-band beam splitter (ZT488rdc/ZT561rdc/ZT640rdc, Chroma Technology). Fluorescence light was spectrally filtered with emission filters (ET525/50m, ET600/50m, and ET700/75m, Chroma Technology) and imaged on an EMCCD camera (iXon X3 DU-897, Andor Technologies).
  • DNA origami self-assembly The microtubule-like DNA origami structures were formed in a one-pot reaction with 40 ⁇ l total volume containing 10 nM scaffold strand (p8064), 500 nM folding staples and biotin handles, 750 nM biotin anti-handles and 1.1 ⁇ M DNA-PAINT docking strands in folding buffer (1 ⁇ TAE Buffer with 20 mM MgCl 2 ). The solution was annealed using a thermal ramp13 cooling from 80° C. to 14° C. over the course of 15 h.
  • monomeric structures were purified by agarose gel electrophoresis (1.5% agarose, 0.5 ⁇ TBE, 10 mM MgCl 2 , 1 ⁇ SybrSafe) at 4.5 V/cm for 1.5 h. Gel bands were cut, crushed and filled into a ‘Freeze ‘N Squeeze’ column and spun for 5 min at 1000 ⁇ g at 4° C. Polymerization was carried out at 30° C. for 48 h with a 5-fold excess of polymerization staples in folding buffer. Polymerized structures were used for imaging without further purification.
  • DNA origami drift markers were self-assembled in a one-pot reaction (40 ⁇ l total volume, 20 nM M13mp18 scaffold, 100 nM biotinylated staples, 530 nM staples with DNA-PAINT docking sites, 1 ⁇ TAE with 12.5 mM MgCl2). Self-assembled structures were purified as described before.
  • DNA origami structures for the 4-“color” in vitro Exchange-PAINT demonstration were self-assembled in a one-pot reaction (40 ⁇ l total volume, 30 nM M13mp18 scaffold, 470 nM biotinylated staples, 400 nM staples with docking sites for number imaging, 370 nM core structure staples, 1 ⁇ TAE with 12.5 mM MgCl2). Self-assembled structures were purified as described before.
  • DNA origami structures for the 10-“color” in vitro Exchange-PAINT demonstration were self-assembled in a one-pot reaction (40 ⁇ l total volume, 30 nM M13mp18 scaffold, 36 nM biotinylated staples, 750 nM staples with docking sites for number imaging, 300 nM core structure staples, 1 ⁇ TAE with 12.5 mM MgCl2). Structures were not purified. Excessive staples are washed out of the sample after immobilization of the structure on the surface.
  • DNA strand sequences for the microtubule-like DNA origami structures can be found in Table 1.
  • DNA strand sequences for DNA origami drift markers can be found in Table 2.
  • DNA strand sequences for DNA origami structures for 10-“color” in vitro Exchange-PAINT demonstration can be found in Tables 3 and 4 for odd and even digits, respectively.
  • DNA strand sequences for DNA origami structures for in vitro Exchange-PAINT demonstration (digits 0 to 3) can be found in Table 5.
  • the scaffold sequence for p8064 and M13mp18 correspond to SEQ ID NO: 882 and 883, respectively.
  • DNA-PAINT imager and docking sequences as well as sequences for surface attachment via Biotin are listed in Table 6.
  • Antibody-DNA conjugates used to specifically label proteins of interest with DNA-PAINT docking sites were preassembled in two steps: First, 3.2 ⁇ l of 1 mg/ml streptavidin (dissolved in buffer A) was reacted with 0.5 ⁇ l biotinylated DNA-PAINT docking strands at 100 ⁇ M and an additional 5.3 ⁇ l of buffer A for 30 min at room temperature (RT) while gently shaking. The solution was then incubated in a second step with 1 ⁇ l of monoclonal biotinylated antibodies at 1 mg/ml against the protein of interest for 30 min at RT. Filter columns (Amicon 100 kDa, Millipore) were used to purify the preassembled conjugates from unreacted streptavidin-oligo conjugates.
  • HeLa and DLD1 cells were cultured with Eagle's minimum essential medium fortified with 10% FBS with penicillin and streptomycin and were incubated at 37° C. with 5% CO2. Approximately 30% confluence cells per well were seeded into Lab-Tek II chambered cover glass 24 h before fixation.
  • Microtubules, mitochondria, Golgi complex, and peroxisomes were immunostained using the following procedure: washing in PBS; fixation in a mixture of 3% paraformaldehyde and 0.1% glutaraldehyde in PBS for 10 min; 3-times washing with PBS; reduction with ⁇ 1 mg/ml NaBH4 for 7 min; 3-times washing with PBS; permeabilization with 0.25% (v/v) Triton X-100 in PBS for 10 min; 3-times washing with PBS; blocking with 3% (w/v) bovine serum albumin for 30 min and staining over night with the preassembled antibody-DNA conjugates against ⁇ -tubulin, COX IV, PMP70, or TGN46 (conjugates were diluted to 10 ⁇ g/ml in 5% BSA); 3-times washing with PBS; post-fixation in a mixture of 3% paraformaldehyde and 0.1% glutaraldehyde in PBS for 10 min; and 3-times
  • Imaging was performed using TIR illumination with an excitation intensity of 166 W/cm2 at 561 nm (Ten-“color” Exchange-PAINT with 3 nM Cy3b-labeled imager strands in buffer B, FIG. 5B (iii) and 5 B(v)) and 600 W/cm2 at 647 nm (Four-“color” Exchange-PAINT with 3 nM ATTO655-labeled imager strands in buffer B, FIG. 5B (iv)).
  • FIG. 3A 700 pM ATT0655-labeled imager strands in buffer C.
  • FIGS. 6B and 6C Super-resolution Exchange-PAINT imaging of cells.
  • a Lab-Tek II chamber was adapted for fluid exchange.
  • 2D images ( FIGS. 6B and 6C ) were acquired with an EMCCD readout bandwidth of 5 MHz at 14 bit, 5.1 preamp gain and 255 EM gain.
  • 3D images ( FIG. 6 ) were acquired with a CCD readout bandwith of 3 MHz at 154 bit, 5.1 pre-amp gain and no EM gain. Imaging was performed using HILO illumination in both cases. Sequential imaging was done as described for the 2D origami nanostructures, but the washing steps were performed using buffer C.
  • 3D DNA-PAINT imaging 3D images were acquired with a cylindrical lens in the detection path (Nikon).
  • the N-STORM analysis package for NIS Elements (Nikon) was used for data processing. Imaging was performed without additional magnification in the detection path, yielding 160 nm pixel size. 3D calibration was carried out according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Imager strand concentration determination Optimal imager concentrations are determined empirically according to the labeling density. Generally, a high enough fluorescence OFF/ON-ratio has to be ensured in order to guarantee binding of only a single imager strand per diffraction-limited area. Additionally, a sufficient imager strand concentration (and thus sufficiently low fluorescence OFF-time) is necessary to ensure sufficient binding events and thereby robust detection of every docking strand during image acquisition.
  • Normalized cross-correlation analysis Normalized cross-correlation coefficients were obtained by first normalizing the respective reconstructed gray-scale super-resolution images and subsequently performing a cross-correlation analysis in MATLAB R2013b (MathWorks, Natick, Mass., USA).
  • DNA origami structures are used for drift correction and as alignment markers in in vitro DNA-PAINT and Exchange-PAINT imaging. Drift correction was performed by tracking the position of each origami drift marker throughout the duration of each movie. The trajectories of all detected drift markers were then averaged and used to globally correct the drift in the final super-resolution reconstruction. For channel alignment between different imaging cycles in Exchange-PAINT, these structures are used as alignment points by matching their positions in each Exchange-PAINT image. For cellular imaging, 100 nm gold nanoparticles (Sigma Aldrich;10 nM in buffer C, added before imaging) were used as drift and alignment markers. The gold nanoparticles adsorb non-specifically to the glass bottom of the imaging chambers.
  • Drift correction and alignment is performed in a similar fashion as for the origami drift markers. Again, the apparent movement of all gold nanoparticles in a field of view is tracked throughout the movie. The obtained trajectories are then averaged and used for global drift correction of the final super-resolution image. For the dual-color image of mitochondria and microtubules in FIG. 3D-3F , the gold particles are visible in both color channels. The same gold nanoparticles are also used for drift-correction and re-alignment of the different imaging rounds in the in situ Exchange-PAINT experiments ( FIG. 6 ).
  • Imaging 3.5 ⁇ l of undiluted microtubules-like DNA structures were adsorbed for 2 minutes onto glow-discharged, carbon-coated TEM grids. The grids were then stained for 10 seconds using a 2% aqueous ultra-filtrated (0.2 ⁇ m filter) uranyl formate solution containing 25 mM NaOH. Imaging was performed using a JEOL JEM-1400 operated at 80 kV.
  • Atomic force microscopy imaging Imaging was performed using tapping mode on a Multimode VIII atomic force microscope (AFM) with an E-scanner (Bruker). Imaging was performed in TAE/Mg2+ buffer solution with DNP-S oxide-sharpened silicon nitride cantilevers and SNL sharp nitride levers (Bruker Probes) using resonance frequencies between 7-9 kHz of the narrow 100 ⁇ m, 0.38 N/m force constant cantilever. After self-assembly of the origami structure ⁇ 20 ⁇ l of TAE/Mg2+ buffer solution was deposited onto a freshly cleaved mica surface (Ted Pella) glued to a metal puck (Ted Pella).
  • the mica surface was dried using a gentle stream of N2 and 5 ⁇ l of the origami solution was deposited onto the mica surface. After another 30 s, 30 ⁇ l of additional buffer solution was added to the sample. Imaging parameters were optimized for best image quality while maintaining the highest possible setpoint to minimize damage to the samples. Images were post-processed by subtracting a 1st order polynomial from each scan line. Drive amplitudes were approximately 0.11 V, integral gains ⁇ 2, and proportional gains ⁇ 4.
  • each oligonucleotide position in a described structure is set forth.
  • Each oligonucleotide position (e.g., n[n]n[n]) in the first column is separated by a comma and corresponds respectively to a sequence identification number in the second column within the same row.
  • Each sequence identification number identifies a corresponding oligonucleotide sequence in the attached sequence listing, incorporated by reference herein.
  • position 0[39]21[39] corresponds to the oligonucleotide represented by SEQ ID NO: 1
  • position 0[79]1[79] corresponds to the oligonucleotide represented by SEQ ID NO: 2 and so forth.

Abstract

The present disclosure provides, inter alia, methods and compositions (e.g., conjugates) for imaging, at high spatial resolution, targets of interest.

Description

    RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application claims the benefit under 35 U.S.C. §119(e) of U.S. provisional application No. 61/934,759, filed Feb. 1, 2014, U.S. provisional application No. 61/884,126, filed Sep. 29, 2013, and U.S. provisional application No. 61/859,891, filed Jul. 30, 2013, each of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present disclosure relates generally to the field of detection and quantification of targets.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Far-field fluorescence microscopy has seen major advances since the advent of methods that circumvent the classical diffraction limit, e.g., super-resolution microscopy (refs. 1, 2). Most implementations switch molecules between fluorescent ON- and OFF-states to allow consecutive localization of individual molecules. Switching is traditionally obtained in one of two ways: “targeted” switching actively confines the fluorescence excitation to an area smaller than the diffraction of light (e.g., stimulated emission depletion microscopy, or STED (ref. 3)), whereas “stochastic” switching uses photoswitchable proteins (photoactivated localization microscopy, or PALM (ref. 4)) or photoswitchable organic dyes (stochastic optical reconstruction microscopy, or STORM (ref. 1)). Although these methods offer enhanced spatial resolution, they tend to require either expensive instrumentation or highly specialized experimental conditions, and thus have not yet been developed into common biological laboratory techniques.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The present disclosure provides, inter alia, methods, compositions (e.g., conjugates) and kits for imaging, at high or low spatial resolution, targets (e.g., biomolecules) of interest in, for example, a cellular environment. The methods, compositions and kits of the present disclosure take advantage of repetitive, transient binding of short, labeled (e.g., fluorescently labeled) oligonucleotides (e.g., DNA oligonucleotides), or “imager” strands, to complementary “docking” strands, which are attached to targets of interest, in some embodiments, through an intermediate molecule such as an antibody such as a primary or a secondary antibody, to obtain stochastic switching between fluorescent ON- and OFF-states (FIGS. 1A and 1B). In the unbound state, only background fluorescence from partially quenched (ref. 8) imager strands is observed (depicted by dimmer fluorescence of unbound imager strands in FIG. 1A). This is considered an “OFF” state. Upon binding and immobilization of an imager strand, fluorescence emission is detected using, for example, total internal reflection (TIR) or highly inclined and laminated optical sheet (HILO) microscopy (ref. 9). This is considered an “ON” state. In general, the methods, compositions and kits as provided herein increase the imaging resolution and thus the sensitivity of detection. In some aspects, they also increase the specificity as well as the number of utilizable fluorophores available for detecting targets of interest including but not limited to, e.g., naturally-occurring biomolecules.
  • By linking a short docking strand to a binding partner (e.g., a protein-binding moiety or a nucleic acid-binding moiety, whether primary or secondary), such as an antibody including a primary and a secondary antibody, different species of targets (e.g., biomolecules, optionally in a cellular environment) can be labeled and subsequently detected by introducing fluorescently-labeled imager strands that are complementary to and bind to the docking strands through transient Watson-Crick interactions. Unlike existing detection methods, the methods of the present disclosure are not limited by the number of spectrally distinct fluorophores available for detecting distinct targets (e.g., biomolecules). Rather, the programmability of nucleic acid (e.g., DNA and/or RNA) molecules and sequential time-lapsed imaging are used herein to provide images of up to hundreds of distinct species of targets using, in some embodiments, only a single optimized fluorophore. Further, these different species of targets (e.g., biomolecules) can be quantified using predictable kinetics of binding of single fluorescently-labeled imager strands to their complementary target docking strands.
  • In some instances, the methods can be used to generate super-resolution images, significantly even without the need for a super-resolution microscope. It should be understood that while the methods, compositions and kits as provided herein may be described for use in super-resolution imaging, they may also be used, in some embodiments, for imaging that does not require super-resolution. Thus, in some embodiments, the methods, compositions and kits of the present disclosure may be used for imaging, generally.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a protein-nucleic acid conjugate, comprising a protein linked to a docking strand that is capable of transiently binding to a complementary labeled imager strand. In some aspects, provided herein is a protein-nucleic acid conjugate, comprising a protein linked to a docking strand that is transiently bound to a complementary labeled imager strand. Imager strands, in some embodiments, are labeled with a detectable label. The detectable label may be, for example, a fluorescent label or other detectable label, e.g., gold nanoparticle. While various aspects and embodiments herein refer to fluorescently-labeled imager strands, it should be understood that such fluorescent labels, in many instances, can be interchanged with other detectable labels. Thus, in some embodiments, a fluorescently-labeled imager strand (which may be detected by, for example, fluorescent microscopy) may be interchanged with an imager strand labeled with, for example, gold nanoparticles (which may be detected by, for example, dark field microscopy). It is also to be understood that the docking strands may be capable of transiently binding a plurality of complementary labeled strands (e.g., the docking strand may comprise a plurality of binding sites for complementary labeled strands).
  • In some embodiments, a method may be carried out involving a plurality of docking strand and imager strand pairs. Such a method can be used to detect a plurality of targets (e.g., with each docking strand-imager strand pair corresponding to one target). The docking strand-imager strand pairs in the plurality must share an approximately equal probability of hybridizing under a single environment or condition (as defined for example by temperature, salt concentration, strand molarity, etc.), such that if there is an observed difference between the level of binding (and thus the detection) of a population of imager strands, an end user can conclude that such difference is a function of the amount of docking strand and thus ultimately the amount of target. In some embodiments, the docking and imager strands are typically selected such that their bound states have a thermal stability in the range of about +/−0.5 kcal/mol. With this range of thermal stability, it is possible to select at least 200 orthogonal (e.g., different) sequences to be used in these multiplexing methods. In some embodiments, a protein is an antibody such as a primary antibody or a secondary antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
  • In some embodiments, a protein is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker. In some embodiments, the intermediate linker comprises biotin and streptavidin.
  • In some embodiments, an antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
  • In some embodiments, a complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strand comprises at least one fluorophore.
  • In some embodiments, a complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides, or about 8 to about 10 nucleotides, in length. In some embodiments, a complementary labeled imager strand is longer than 30 nucleotides.
  • In this and other aspects and embodiments described herein, the docking strand may comprise a plurality of domains, each complementary to a labeled imager strand. The domains may be identical in sequence (and thus will bind to the identical imager strands) or they may be of different sequence (and thus may bind to imager strands that are not identically labeled). Such domains may also be referred to herein as binding sites for imager strands.
  • In some embodiments, a docking strand includes at least two or at least three domains, each respectively complementary to a labeled imager strand.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a target bound to at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate.
  • In some embodiments, the target is a protein. In some embodiments, the target is a nucleic acid (e.g., DNA or RNA).
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a plurality of protein-nucleic acid conjugates. In some embodiments, the plurality comprises at least two subsets of the protein-nucleic acid conjugates, and the protein-nucleic acid conjugates of each subset bind to different targets.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a composition or kit comprising a plurality of protein-nucleic acid conjugates, optionally wherein at least one of the protein-nucleic acid conjugates is bound to at least one target.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a composition or kit comprising at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate that comprises a protein linked to a docking strand, optionally wherein the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate is bound to a target, and at least one complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is transiently bound to (or is capable of transiently binding to) the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate.
  • In some embodiments, a composition or kit comprises at least two complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands, wherein the at least two complementary labeled imager strands are identical. In some embodiments, the composition or kit comprises at least two complementary labeled imager strands, wherein the at least two complementary labeled imager strands are different.
  • In some embodiments, the number of complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands is less than, greater than or equal to the number of protein-nucleic acid conjugates.
  • In some embodiments, a composition or kit comprises at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 or 10 different complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands. In some embodiments, the composition or kit comprises at least 50 or at least 100 different complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strands.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a composition or a kit comprising a (e.g., one or more) docking strand and an (e.g., one or more) imager strand. The docking strand may be modified to include an affinity label, thereby facilitating its subsequent attachment to one or more binding partners, such as an antibodies. For example, the docking strand may be biotinylated or it may be attached to avidin or streptavidin. Other affinity labels can be used instead. The imager strands may be labeled, such as fluorescently labeled. The imager strands may be a plurality of identical imager strands (e.g., with respect to sequence and label) or they may be a plurality of different imager strands (e.g., with respect to sequence and label). The composition or kit may further comprise a target-specific binding partner, such as an antibody. It is to be understood that the components may be bound to each other or they may be unbound, including physically separated from each other, in such compositions and kits. These and other compositions and kits may further comprise one or more buffers including oxygen scavengers.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a composition or kit comprising an antibody-nucleic acid conjugate, wherein the antibody is a “secondary antibody” having specificity for an antibody, typically specificity for a particular isotype or an Fc domain of an antibody from a particular species (e.g., a mouse antibody that is specific for a human IgG1 antibody). The nucleic acid in the conjugate is a docking strand, as described herein. The composition or kit may further comprise one or more imager strands (or one or more subsets or populations of imager strands), as described herein. These and other compositions and kits may further comprise one or more buffers including oxygen scavengers.
  • In some aspects, the present disclosure provides an antibody-DNA conjugate, comprising a monoclonal antibody linked to a docking strand that is bound to a complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand, wherein the antibody and the docking strand are each biotinylated and linked to each other through an avidin or streptavidin linker or a biotin-streptavidin linker.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is an aptamer-nucleic acid conjugate, comprising a nucleic acid aptamer linked to a docking strand that is transiently bound to a complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a method of detecting a target in a sample, the method comprising contacting a sample with (a) at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate that comprises a protein linked to a docking strand and (b) at least one fluorescently-labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate, and determining whether the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate binds to the target in the sample. In some embodiments, the determining step comprises imaging transient binding of the at least one fluorescently-labeled imager strand to the docking strand of the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a method of detecting a target in a sample, the method comprising contacting a sample with (a) at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate that comprises a protein linked to a docking strand and (b) at least one fluorescently-labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate, and imaging transient binding, optionally using time-lapsed imaging, of the at least one fluorescently-labeled imager strand to the docking strand of the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate.
  • In some embodiments, a protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer. In some embodiments, an antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
  • In some embodiments, a protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker. In some embodiments, an intermediate linker comprises biotin and/or streptavidin.
  • In some embodiments, a complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strand comprises at least one fluorophore.
  • In some embodiments, a complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand is about 4 to about 10 nucleotides, or about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
  • In some embodiments, a sample is a cell or cell lysate.
  • In some embodiments, a target is a protein. In some embodiments, a target is a nucleic acid (e.g., DNA or RNA).
  • In some embodiments, a target is obtained from a cell or cell lysate.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a method of detecting at least one or at least two targets in a sample, the method comprising contacting a sample with (a) at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates, each comprising a protein linked to a docking strand, and (b) at least two labeled (optionally spectrally distinct, or fluorescently labeled, or spectrally distinct and fluorescently labeled) imager strands that are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the at least one, or at least, two different protein-nucleic acid conjugates and determining whether the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates bind to at least two targets in the sample. In some embodiments, the determining step comprises, in the following order, imaging transient binding of one of the at least two labeled imager strands to a docking strand of one of the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates to produce a first image (e.g., of a fluorescent signal), and imaging transient binding of another of the at least two labeled imager strands to a docking strand of another of the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates to produce at least one other image (e.g., of a fluorescent signal). In some embodiments, the method further comprises combining the first image and the at least one other image to produce a composite image of signal (e.g., fluorescent signal), wherein the signal of the composite image is representative of the at least two targets.
  • In some embodiments, a protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer. In some embodiments, an antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
  • In some embodiments, a protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker. In some embodiments, an intermediate linker comprises biotin and streptavidin.
  • In some embodiments, each of the at least two spectrally distinct, fluorescently-labeled imager strands comprises at least one fluorophore.
  • In some embodiments, each of the at least two labeled, optionally spectrally distinct, fluorescently labeled, imager strands is about 4 to about 10 nucleotides, or about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
  • In some embodiments, a sample is a cell or cell lysate.
  • In some embodiments, at least two targets are proteins. In some embodiments, at least two targets are nucleic acids (e.g., DNA or RNA).
  • In some embodiments, at least two targets are obtained from a cell or cell lysate.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a method of detecting at least one, or at least two, protein targets in a sample, comprising (a) contacting a sample with at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates, each comprising a protein linked to a docking strand and (b) sequentially contacting the sample with at least two labeled (e.g., optionally spectrally indistinct, or fluorescently labeled, or spectrally distinct and fluorescently labeled) imager strands that are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates, and determining whether the at least one or at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates bind to at least two targets in the sample. In some embodiments, a method comprises, in the following ordered steps, contacting the sample with a first protein-nucleic acid conjugate and at least one other protein-nucleic acid conjugate, contacting the sample with a first labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first protein-nucleic acid conjugate, imaging the sample to obtain a first image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging, removing the first labeled imager strand, contacting the sample with at least one other labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other protein-nucleic acid conjugate, and imaging the sample to obtain at least one other image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging.
  • In some embodiments, a method comprises, in the following ordered steps, contacting a sample with a first protein-nucleic acid conjugate, contacting the sample with a first labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first protein-nucleic acid conjugate, imaging the sample to obtain a first image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging, removing the first labeled imager strand, contacting the sample with at least one other protein-nucleic acid conjugate, contacting the sample with at least one other labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other protein-nucleic acid conjugate, and imaging the sample to obtain at least one other image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging.
  • In some embodiments, a method further comprises determining whether the first protein-DNA conjugate binds to a first target and/or whether the at least one other protein-DNA conjugate binds to at least one other target.
  • In some embodiments, a method further comprises assigning a pseudo-color to the signal (e.g., fluorescent signal) in a first image, and assigning at least one other pseudo-color to the fluorescent signal in the at least one other image.
  • In some embodiments, a method further comprises combining a first image and the at least one other image to produce a composite image of the pseudo-colored signals, wherein the pseudo-colored signals of the composite image are representative of the at least two targets.
  • In some embodiments, the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate(s) is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer. In some embodiments, the antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
  • In some embodiments, the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate(s) is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker. In some embodiments, the intermediate linker comprises biotin and/or streptavidin.
  • In some embodiments, each of the fluorescently-labeled imager strands comprises at least one fluorophore.
  • In some embodiments, each of the fluorescently-labeled imager strands is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides, or about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
  • In some embodiments, a sample is a cell or cell lysate.
  • In some embodiments, a target(s) is a protein. In some embodiments, a target(s) is a nucleic acid (e.g., DNA or RNA).
  • In some embodiments, a target(s) is obtained from a cell or cell lysate.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a method of detecting a target, optionally a naturally-occurring biomolecule, comprising contacting a sample containing at least one target, optionally a naturally-occurring biomolecule, with (a) at least one BP-NA conjugate, optionally each BP-NA conjugate comprising a protein or nucleic acid linked to a docking strand, and (b) at least one labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds the docking strand of the at least one BP-NA conjugate, and determining whether the at least one BP-NA conjugate binds to at least one target, optionally a naturally-occurring biomolecule, in the sample. In this and other aspects or embodiments described herein, it is to be understood that the method may be carried out using a sample that is suspected of containing at least one target or a sample that an end-user desires to analyze for the presence of the at least one target without any prior knowledge of the sample respecting its likelihood of containing the target.
  • In some embodiments, the determining step comprises imaging transient binding of the at least one labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand to the docking strand of the at least one BP-NA conjugate.
  • In some embodiments, a sample is a cell or cell lysate.
  • In some embodiments, an at least one target, optionally a naturally-occurring biomolecule, is obtained from a cell or cell lysate.
  • In some embodiments, a protein is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer. In some embodiments, an antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
  • In some embodiments, a protein is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker. In some embodiments, an intermediate linker comprises biotin and/or streptavidin.
  • In some embodiments, a nucleic acid is a nucleic acid aptamer.
  • In some embodiments, a fluorescently-labeled imager strand comprises at least one fluorophore.
  • In some embodiments, an imager strand, optionally a fluorescently-labeled imager strand, is about 4 to about 30, or about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a method of detecting a target, optionally a naturally-occurring biomolecule, comprising contacting a sample containing at least two targets, optionally naturally-occurring biomolecules, with (a) at least two different BP-NA conjugates, optionally each BP-NA conjugate comprising a protein or nucleic acid linked to a DNA docking strand, and (b) at least two labeled (optionally spectrally indistinct, or fluorescently labeled, or spectrally distinct and fluorescently labeled) imager strands that are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the at least two BP-NA conjugates, and determining whether the at least two BP-NA conjugates bind to at least one or at least two naturally-occurring biomolecules in the sample.
  • In some embodiments, a method comprises, in the following ordered steps, contacting the sample with a first BP-NA conjugate and at least one other BP-NA conjugate, contacting the sample with a first labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first BP-NA conjugate, imaging the sample to obtain a first image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging, removing the first labeled imager strand, contacting the sample with at least one other labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other BP-NA conjugate, and imaging the sample to obtain at least one other image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging.
  • In some embodiments, a method comprises, in the following ordered steps, contacting the sample with a first BP-NA conjugate, contacting the sample with a first labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first BP-NA conjugate, imaging the sample to obtain a first image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging, removing the first labeled imager strand, contacting the sample with at least one other BP-NA conjugate, contacting the sample with at least one other labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other BP-NA conjugate, and imaging the sample to obtain a at least one other image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging.
  • In some embodiments, a method further comprises determining whether the first protein DNA conjugate binds to a first target, optionally a naturally-occurring biomolecule, and/or whether the at least one other protein-DNA conjugate binds to at least one other target, optionally a naturally-occurring biomolecule.
  • In some embodiments, a method further comprises assigning a pseudo-color to the signal (e.g., fluorescent signal) in a first image, and assigning at least one other pseudo-color to the signal (e.g., fluorescent signal) in at least one other image.
  • In some embodiments, a method further comprises combining a first image and at least one other image to produce a composite image of pseudo-colored signals, wherein the pseudo-colored signals of the composite image are representative of at least one, or at least two, targets (e.g., naturally-occurring biomolecules).
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a method of determining the number of targets in a test sample, comprising obtaining a sample that comprises targets transiently bound directly or indirectly to labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands, obtaining a time-lapsed image, optionally a time-lapsed diffraction-limited fluorescence image, of the sample, performing spot detection (e.g., fluorescence spot detection) and localization (e.g., through the use of Gaussian fitting) on the diffraction-limited image to obtain a high-resolution image of the sample, calibrating kon·cimager, optionally using a control sample with a known number of targets, wherein kon is a second order association constant, and cimager is concentration of labeled (e.g., fluorescently labeled) imager strands in the test sample, determining variable τd, optionally by fitting the fluorescence OFF-time distribution to a cumulative distribution function, and determining the number of test targets in the sample based on the equation, number of test targets=(kon·cimager·τd)−1.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a method of determining a relative amount of targets in a test sample, comprising obtaining a sample that comprises targets transiently bound directly or indirectly to labeled imager strands, obtaining a time-lapsed image of the sample, performing spot detection and localization on the image to obtain a high-resolution image of the sample, determining variable τd, and determining the relative amount of two or more test targets in the sample based on τd.
  • In some embodiments, test targets are protein targets.
  • In some embodiments, protein targets are bound to protein-nucleic acid conjugates that comprise a protein linked to a docking strand, and the labeled (e.g., fluorescently labeled) imager strands are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the protein-nucleic acid conjugates.
  • In some embodiments, the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
  • In some embodiments, test targets are single-stranded nucleic acids.
  • In some embodiments, single-stranded nucleic acids are DNA or RNA.
  • In some embodiments, each of the fluorescently-labeled imager strands comprises at least one fluorophore.
  • In some embodiments, each of the labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides, or about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
  • In some embodiments, a time-lapsed fluorescence image is obtained over a period of about 25 minutes.
  • In some embodiments, the number of test targets is determined with an accuracy of greater than 90%.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a single-stranded DNA probe comprising a target binding domain of about 20 nucleotides in length linked, optionally at its 3′ end, to a docking domain of at least one, at least two, or at least three subdomains, wherein the at at least one, least two, or at least three subdomains are respectively complementary to at least one, at least two, or at least three labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands of about 4 to about 30, or about 8 to 10 nucleotides in length, and wherein the target binding domain is bound to a complementary domain of a single-stranded mRNA target strand.
  • In some embodiments, at least one of the at least one, at least two, or at least three subdomains is transiently bound to at least one labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a method of performing drift correction for a plurality of images, wherein each of the plurality of images comprises a frame of a time sequence of images, wherein the time sequence of images captures a plurality of transient events, the method comprising determining a time trace for each of a plurality of drift markers identified in the plurality of images, wherein a time trace for each drift marker corresponds to movement of an object in the image over the time sequence of images, determining, with at least one computer processor, a first drift correction from at least one of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift markers, determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images, wherein each drift template in the plurality of drift templates describes a geometrical relationship between the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites of transient events in the drift template, determining a second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from the plurality of drift templates, correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the first drift correction and the second drift correction, and outputting a final image based on the corrected plurality of images.
  • In some embodiments, a method further comprises identifying a plurality of localizations in each of the plurality of images, creating a two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations, and identifying locations of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the two-dimensional histogram, wherein determining the time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers comprises determining the time traces based, at least in part, on the locations of the plurality of drift markers.
  • In some embodiments, identifying a plurality of localizations comprises identifying a plurality of spots on each of the plurality of images, and determining a fitted center position of each of the plurality of spots using a local Gaussian fitting algorithm, wherein each of the plurality of localizations comprises the spot identified on an image and its associated fitted center position.
  • In some embodiments, each of the plurality of localizations further comprises a detected photon count corresponding to the localization.
  • In some embodiments, creating the two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations comprises binning all localizations into a two-dimensional grid and using a total number of localizations in each bin as a histogram count.
  • In some embodiments, creating the two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations comprises binning all localizations into a two-dimensional grid and using a total number of photon count of the plurality of localizations in each bin as a histogram count.
  • In some embodiments, identifying locations of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the two-dimensional histogram comprises at least one of the following: binarizing the two-dimensional histogram using one or more selection criteria, wherein the one or more selection criteria include a lower-bound threshold of a histogram value or a upper-bound threshold of a histogram value; partitioning the binarized image into partitions and filtering the partitions based on one or more selection criteria, wherein the one or more selection criteria include one or more of a lower-bound threshold of an area of a partition area, an upper-bound threshold of the area, a lower-bound or an upper-bound of a longest or shortest linear dimension of a partition longest, and a lower-bound or an upper-bound of an eccentricity of a partition; and expanding and shrinking the binarized image using one or more binary image operations, wherein the one or more binary image operations include one or more of the following: dilate, erode, bridge, close, open, fill, clean, top-hat, bottom-hat, thicken, thin, and more.
  • In some embodiments, determining a first drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift markers comprises: determining a relative time trace for each of the plurality of drift markers, wherein the relative time trace is determined by comparing the time trace for the drift marker with the average position of the same trace; and determining a combined time trace based on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers, wherein determining the first drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift markers comprises determining the first drift correction based, at least in part, on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers.
  • In some embodiments, determining the first drift correction based, at least in part, on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers comprises performing a weighted average of the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers.
  • In some embodiments, performing the weighted average comprises: determining a quality score for each of the relative time traces, wherein the quality score is determined based, at least in part, on a measure of variability over time associated with the time trace and/or a measure of localization uncertainty of individual localizations within the time trace.
  • In some embodiments, the measure of variability over time comprises a standard deviation of the time trace over time.
  • In some embodiments, the measure of localization uncertainty of individual localizations comprises, at least in part, an estimate of uncertainty from a Gaussian fitting or a comparison with other simultaneous localizations, wherein the other simultaneous localizations are from within a same image and from other time traces from the plurality of drift markers, wherein the comparison comprises a mean and standard deviation of all simultaneous localizations.
  • In some embodiments, the method further comprises determining that a first drift marker of the plurality of drift markers is not present in at least one frame of the time sequence of images, and linearly interpolating the time trace for the first drift marker for the at least one frame to produce a smoothed time trace for the first drift marker.
  • In some embodiments, determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images comprises: identifying a plurality of localizations in each of the plurality of images; creating a two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations; and identifying the plurality of drift templates based, at least in part, on the two-dimensional histogram, wherein identifying the plurality of drift templates comprises evaluating the two-dimensional histogram using an lower-bound and/or an upper-bound threshold in a histogram count.
  • In some embodiments, determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images comprises determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites within each of the plurality of drift templates, and wherein determining the second drift correction comprises determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for each of the plurality of marker sites within each of the plurality of drift templates.
  • In some embodiments, determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for each of the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from each of the plurality of drift templates comprises: identifying a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites within each of the plurality of drift templates; and determining a relative time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable drift markers for each of the plurality of drift templates, wherein determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift templates comprises determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers within each of the plurality of drift templates.
  • In some embodiments, identifying a plurality of geometrically addressable marker sites from each of the plurality of drift templates comprises determining a plurality of marker sites based on, at least in part, a two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations in the corresponding drift template, and/or one or more selection criteria, wherein the one or more selection criteria include one or more of a total number of localizations, a surface density of localizations, and standard deviation of localizations.
  • In some embodiments, determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers within each of the plurality of drift templates comprises performing a weighted average of the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers within each of the drift templates.
  • In some embodiments, performing the weighted average comprises:
  • determining a quality score for each of the relative time traces, wherein the quality score is determined based, at least in part, on a measure of variability over time associated with the time trace and/or a localization uncertainty within the time trace.
  • In some embodiments, the measure of variability over time comprises a standard deviation of the time trace over time.
  • In some embodiments, the measure of localization uncertainty of individual localizations comprises an estimate of uncertainty from a Gaussian fitting or a comparison with other simultaneous localizations, wherein the other simultaneous localizations are from within a same image and from the other time traces from the plurality of marker sites from the plurality of drift templates, wherein the comparison comprises a mean and standard deviation of all simultaneous localizations.
  • In some embodiments, correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the first drift correction and the second drift correction comprises correcting the plurality images using the first drift correction to produce a first corrected plurality of images, and wherein determining a time trace for each of a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images comprises determining a time trace for each of the plurality of drift templates identified from the first corrected plurality of images.
  • In some embodiments, a method further comprises smoothing the first drift correction prior to correcting the plurality of images using the first drift correction.
  • In some embodiments, smoothing the first drift correction comprises processing the first drift correction using local regression with a window determined by a characteristic drift time scale of the first drift correction.
  • In some embodiments, a method further comprises smoothing the second drift correction prior to correcting the plurality of images using the second drift correction.
  • In some embodiments, smoothing the second drift correction comprises processing the second drift correction using local regression with a window determined by a characteristic drift time scale of the second drift correction.
  • In some embodiments, a method further comprises selecting a single drift marker of the plurality of drift markers; and determining a third drift correction based, at least in part, on the selected single drift marker, wherein correcting the plurality of images comprises correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the third drift correction.
  • In some embodiments, correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the third drift correction is performed prior to correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part on the first drift correction and the second drift correction.
  • In some embodiments, a method further comprises identifying locations of a first plurality of points in a first image of the plurality of frames; identifying locations of a second plurality of points in a second image of the plurality of images, wherein the second image corresponds to a neighboring frame of the first image in the time sequence of images; and determining a fourth drift correction based, at least in part, on differences between the locations of the first plurality of points and the second plurality of points, wherein correcting the plurality of images comprises correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the fourth drift correction.
  • In some embodiments, the second image corresponds to a frame immediately following the frame corresponding to the first image in the time sequence of images.
  • In some embodiments, determining the fourth drift correction based, at least in part, on differences between the locations of the first plurality of points and the second plurality of points comprises: creating a histogram of distances between the locations of the first plurality of points and the second plurality of points; determining based, at least in part, on the histogram, pairs of points between the first image and the second image that correspond to the same transient event; and determining a location offset between each of the determined pairs of points, wherein determining the fourth drift correction is based on a vector average of the location offsets for each of the determined pairs of points.
  • In some embodiments, the plurality of images correspond to DNA-based images and wherein the plurality of transient events are binding events between an imaging strand and a DNA docking strand.
  • In some embodiments, the imaging strand is a fluorescent imaging probe configured to fluoresce when associated with the DNA docking strand.
  • In some embodiments, at least one of the drift markers is a DNA based nanostructure.
  • In some embodiments, the DNA based nanostructure is a DNA origami nanostructure with docking strands.
  • In some embodiments, at least one of the drift templates is a DNA based nanostructure.
  • In some embodiments, the DNA based nanostructure is a DNA origami nanostructure with docking strands.
  • In some embodiments, at least one of the drift templates is a three-dimensional drift template.
  • In some embodiments, the three-dimensional drift template is a tetrahedron.
  • In some embodiments, at least one of the drift templates includes multiple colors corresponding to different types of transient events.
  • In some embodiments, the different types of transient events include a first binding event of a first imaging strand with a first type of DNA docking strand and a second binding event of a second imaging strand with a second type of DNA docking strand.
  • In some embodiments, outputting the final image comprises displaying the final image on a display.
  • In some embodiments, outputting the final image comprises sending the final image to a computer via at least one network.
  • In some embodiments, outputting the final image comprises storing the final image on at least one storage device.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a non-transitory computer readable medium encoded with a plurality of instructions that, when executed by at least one computer processor, performs a method of performing drift correction for a plurality of images, wherein each of the plurality of images comprises a frame of a time sequence of images, wherein the time sequence of images captures a plurality of transient events, the method comprising: determining a time trace for each of a plurality of drift markers identified in the plurality of images, wherein a time trace for each drift marker corresponds to movement of an object in the image over the time sequence of images; determining a first drift correction from at least one of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift markers; determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images, wherein each drift template in the plurality of drift templates describes a geometrical relationship between the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites of transient events in the drift template; determining a second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from the plurality of drift templates; correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the first drift correction and the second drift correction; and outputting a final image based on the corrected plurality of images.
  • In some aspects, provided herein is a computer, comprising: an input interface configured to receive a plurality of images, wherein each of the plurality of images comprises a frame of a time sequence of images, wherein the time sequence of images captures a plurality of transient events; at least one processor programmed to: determine a time trace for each of a plurality of drift markers identified in the plurality of images, wherein a time trace for each drift marker corresponds to movement of an object in the image over the time sequence of images; determine a first drift correction from at least one of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift markers; determine a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images, wherein each drift template in the plurality of drift templates describes a geometrical relationship between the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites of transient events in the drift template; determine a second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from the plurality of drift templates; correct the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the first drift correction and the second drift correction; and determine a final image based on the corrected plurality of images; and output interface configured to output the final image.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1A shows microtubule-like DNA origami polymers “labeled” with single-stranded DNA docking strands on a pair of opposite faces (colored in dark gray) spaced approximately 16 nanometers (nm) apart. Complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strands transiently bind from solution to the docking strands. Biotinylated DNA strands (present on the bottom two center helices) are used to bind the microtubule-like DNA structures to glass surfaces for fluorescence imaging. FIG. 1B shows a graph demonstrating that transient binding of fluorescently-labeled imager strands to the docking strands produces fluorescence “blinking”(fluorescence intensity vs. time trace). This blinking is used to consecutively localize points below the diffraction limit. FIG. 1C shows a transmission electron microscope (TEM) image of DNA origami polymers with a measured width of 16±1 nm (mean±stdv) [scale bar: 40 nm]. FIG. 1D shows super-resolution fluorescence images obtained using Cy3b-labeled imager strands (15,000 frames, 5 Hz frame rate). Two distinct lines are visible [scale bars: 40 nm]. FIG. 1E shows a cross-sectional histogram of highlighted areas <i> and <ii> in FIG. 1D (arrows denote histogram direction), which show that the designed distance of approximately 16 nm is clearly resolved (full width at half maximum (FWHM) of each distribution is observed to be approximately 9 nm).
  • FIG. 2 shows an example of a biomolecule labeling scheme of the present disclosure where a protein (e.g., protein target) is labeled with antibody-DNA conjugates of the present disclosure and complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strands. The antibodies are linked to the docking strands through a linker that contains biotin and streptavidin (e.g., biotin-streptavidin-biotin linker).
  • FIG. 3A shows a super-resolution image of a microtubule network inside a fixed HeLa cell using an antibody-DNA conjugate and Atto655-labeled imager strands (10,000 frames, 10 Hz frame rate) [scale bar: 5 μm]. FIG. 3B shows a high magnification image of the highlighted area in FIG. 3A [scale bar: 1 μm]. FIG. 3C shows a diffraction-limited representation of the same area in FIG. 3B. Arrows highlight positions where the increase in resolution of the image is clearly visible. Adjacent microtubules with an apparent width of approximately 46 nm at position <i> in FIG. 3B are separated by approximately 79 nm [scale bar: 1 μm]. FIG. 3D shows a dual-color super-resolution image (15,000 frames, 10 Hz frame rate) of microtubules and mitochondria inside a fixed HeLa cell obtained using antibody-DNA conjugates, Cy3b-labeled imager strands for microtubules (linear-like structures) and Atto655-labeled imager strands for mitochondria (patch-like structures) [scale bar: 5 μm]. FIG. 3E shows a high magnification image of the highlighted area in FIG. 3D [scale bar: 1 μm]. FIG. 3F shows a diffraction-limited image of the same area shown in FIG. 3E [scale bar: 1 μm].
  • FIG. 4A shows one embodiment of the present disclosure using spectrally indistinct imager strands (e.g., each labeled with the same color fluorophore). In step [1], three different species of docking strands (a,b,c) label a surface. Such labeling may occur using the docking strand alone or linked to a protein-binding (e.g., antibody) or a nucleic acid-binding molecule that binds to the surface/biomolecule of interest. In step [2], multiple copies of the imager strand a* are introduced (where a* has a sequence complementary to a), and points labeled with docking strands a are imaged. In step [3], copies of the imager strand a* are flushed away, and imager strand b* is introduced to image the b labeled points. Images are obtained, and imager strands b* are washed away. In step [4], c labeled points are imaged in the same manner. In step [5], images from [2-4] are assigned pseudo-colors and combined to create the final image. Although pseudo-colors may be used in the final rendering of the image, all imager strands are actually labeled with the same color dye (e.g., fluorophore). FIGS. 4B(1)-4B(3) show that reducing the image density simultaneously increases the achievable resolution by up to a factor of 2√{square root over (2)} ln 2≈2.35. Here, the resolution, previously defined as the FWHM of the reconstructed localizations, can be understood as the standard deviation of the localization as in localization microscopy with sparse points. FIG. 4B(1) shows seven points in a linear geometry spaced at 10 nm (top). Simulated super-resolution data with approximately 14 nm resolution (center). The points cannot be resolved. Cross-sectional histogram data shows a broad peak (bottom). FIGS. 4B(2) and 4B(3) show that imaging every other site allows the localization of individual spots. These localizations can then be combined to form the final image of the full pattern. FIG. 4C shows an image of a DNA origami structure that displays docking strands spaced at 10 nm intervals.
  • FIG. 5A shows one embodiment of the present disclosure using DNA origami structures with different species of docking strands at designated positions resembling numbers 0-3 (0, 1, 2 and 3). For each round, the respective imager strand sequence is added to an imaging chamber, image acquisition is carried out and the imager strands are washed out. In each imaging round the designed number is imaged, showing a very sequence-specific interaction with no crosstalk between different rounds [Scale bar: 50 nm]. Note that all imager strands are labeled with the same color dye, though each structure (e.g., 0-3 (0, 1, 2 and 3)) is rendered a distinct color (e.g., purple, yellow, blue, or red; color rendering not shown). FIGS. 5B(i)-(v) show another embodiment of the present disclosure using DNA origami structures with different species of docking strands at designated positions resembling numbers 0-9 (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9). FIG. 5B(i) shows an exchange-PAINT schematic showing sequential imaging of multiple targets using imager strands labeled with the same fluorophore. FIG. 5B(ii) shows a schematic of a DNA origami (70 100 nm) displaying docking strands that resemble digit 4. FIG. 5B(iii) shows a combined overview image of all ten Exchange-PAINT cycles, demonstrating specific interaction with the respective target with no crosstalk between imaging cycles. Scale bar: 250 nm. FIG. 5B(iv) shows a four-“color” image of digits 0 to 3 that are all present on the same DNA origami (10,000 frames each, 5 Hz frame rate; schematic at the bottom). Scale bar: 25 nm. FIG. 5B(v) shows pseudocolor images of ten different origami structures, each rendered a distinct color (e.g., orange, green, blue, purple, pink, etc.; color rendering not shown), displaying digits 0 to 9 in one sample with high resolution (FWHM of bar-like features <10 nm) and specificity. Image obtained using only one fluorophore (Cy3b) through ten imaging-washing cycles (imaging: 7,500 frames per cycle, 5 Hz frame rate; washing: 1-2 minutes per cycle). Scale bar: 25 nm.
  • FIG. 6A shows an experimental schematic for one embodiment of the present disclosure using fixed HeLa cells, where in one round, docking strands are bound to a target, labeled imager strands are then added, an image is acquired, and the imager strands are washed away. Each round is repeated with docking strands specific for different targets along with different labeled imager strands. The docking strands may be used alone or linked to a protein-binding (e.g., antibody) or a nucleic acid-binding molecule that binds to the target of interest. FIG. 6B shows two rounds of a method of the present disclosure using Cy3b-labeled imager strands in fixed HeLa cells. Here, microtubules (green pseudo-color; color rendering not shown) were labeled with docking sequence a and mitochondria (magenta pseudo-color; color rendering not shown) with orthogonal docking sequence b. FIG. 6C shows two rounds of a method of the present disclosure using ATTO655-labeled imager strands performed in fixed HeLa cells similar to FIG. 6B. [Scale bars: 5 μm]. Note that all imager strands are labeled with the same color dye.
  • FIG. 7A shows that fluorescently-labeled imager strands transiently bind from solution to complementary docking strands on a structure or molecule of interest. The transient binding produces an apparent blinking as shown in the binding vs. time trace with characteristic fluorescence ON- and OFF-times (τband τd, respectively). The detected binding frequency of imager strands from solution is linearly dependent on the number of available docking strands in a given image area (i.e., the more docking strands, the higher the binding frequency). The time in-between binding events, i.e., the fluorescence OFF-time (τd), is inversely proportional to the number of docking strands. FIG. 7B shows that the average fluorescence OFF-time (τd) can be determined by calculating a cumulative distribution function (CDF) for the OFF-time distribution. Given a known association constant kon and imager strand concentration c, the number of binding sites can be calculated by: number of binding sites=(τd·c·kon)−1. FIG. 7C shows a super-resolution image of DNA origami structures designed to display 13 binding sites as a proof-of-concept platform. The incorporation efficiency for docking sites is not 100% leading to a distribution of actually incorporated sites (FIG. 7D(1)). The structures serve as an ideal test system, as the number of displayed docking sites can be determined visually by counting the number of spots (direct counting) and comparing it with the corresponding number of sites calculated using the proposed binding kinetic analysis. FIG. 7D(1) shows the binding site distribution for 377 origami structures obtained by direct visual counting. FIG. 7D(2) shows the binding site distribution for the same structures obtained by binding kinetic analysis (kinetics) of the present disclosure. FIG. 7D(3) shows the “offset” between direct and kinetic counting: the counting “error” or uncertainty for the method of the present disclosure is less than 7% (determined by the coefficient of variation of the Gaussian distribution).
  • FIG. 8A shows mRNA molecules of interest in fixed Escherichia coli cells tagged using docking strands in a FISH-like hybridization scheme. FIG. 8B shows a readout scheme used to determine the binding frequency for each imaging color. The intensity vs. time profile of each single mRNA location yields a specific transient binding pattern (blinking) per color. The frequency of binding events depends on the number of binding sites allowing the use of the binding frequency to distinguish between different integer numbers of binding sites. FIG. 8C shows an in vitro proof-of-principle experiment on DNA origami structures displaying 3, 9, 22 and 44 binding sites for each of the red, green, and blue imager strands, respectively (color rendering not shown). The different binding levels are clearly distinguishable for each color, suggesting 4 possible “frequency levels” per color, yielding up to 124 different possible combinations for barcoding, e.g., mRNA molecules inside cells. The barcoding space can be increased by using the fluorescence ON-time as an additional coding entity.
  • FIG. 9 shows a graph demonstrating that the fluorescence ON-time (related to the dissociation rate koff) can be tuned independently of the fluorescence OFF-time (related to the association rate kon). Extending the imaging/docking duplex from 9 to 10 nucleotides (nt) by adding a single CG base pair, the kinetic OFF-rate is reduced by almost one order of magnitude (8).
  • FIG. 10A shows a barcode probe that is roughly 50 nucleotide (nt) in length and can tag a biomolecule using a 21 nt target detection domain t* followed by an approximately 30 nt long “barcode” region with a combination of 8, 9, or 10 nt long binding domain for red, green, or blue imager strands. Here, 8, 9 or 10 nt long docking strands are displayed for three colors with a koff of 10, 1 and 0.1 per second, respectively (color rendering not shown). FIG. 10B shows characteristic intensity vs. time traces with increased fluorescence ON-times σb for the 9 nt interaction domain compared to the 8 nt interaction domain. FIG. 10C shows stochastic simulations demonstrating that koff values of 10, 1 and 0.1 per second can be distinguished.
  • FIG. 11A shows that in the traditional method of detection, where a single fluorophore is stably attached to the imaging surface (see FIG. 11B(1)), a limited number of photons per “switching” event is emitted (top panel), that extraction of all photons from “replenishable” imager strands (see FIG. 11B(2)) leads to higher localization accuracy per switching event (middle panel), and that a DNA metafluorophore (see FIG. 11B(3) and FIG. 11B(4)) yields a significantly larger number of photons per switching event than the single fluorophore in FIG. 11B(2) (bottom). FIGS. 11B(1)-11B(3) show schematics of current imaging methods and methods of the present disclosure. FIG. 11B(1) shows a traditional detection method (e.g., in STORM), which uses a fluorophore stably attached to the imaging surface. FIG. 11B(2) shows one embodiment of a detection method of the present disclosure with fluorophores transiently binding to the imaging surface. FIG. 11B(3) shows a bright metafluorophore with 8 fluorophores in a compact DNA nanostructure. FIG. 11B(4) shows a conditional metafluorophore decorated with both quenchers (dark dots) and fluorophores (stars) that only fluoresces when transiently bound to the surface. FIG. 11C shows a DNA origami structure with docking sites arranged in a 4×3 grid, spacing 20 nm. Single sites are optically localized with an accuracy of approximately 3 nm, currently the highest demonstrated resolution [scale bar: 50 nm]. FIG. 11D shows a 280 nm×240 nm DNA nano-rectangle (single-stranded tile structure (15), 10× larger area than origami) displaying 2000 single-stranded docking strands (dots) with 7 or 5 nm spacing used as a test platform for ultra-resolution imaging [scale bar: 100 nm].
  • FIG. 12A(i) illustrates schematics showing the principle of each stage of drift correction. In each image, black markers and lines indicate source data, and gray values and curves indicate the calculated drift correction. FIG. 12A(ii) shows a schematic drawing of the major type of drift markers (e.g., DNA drift markers) used in each stage. FIG. 12B(i) illustrates an example structure showing the imaging quality after each stage or correction, and FIG. 12B(ii) shows a zoomed image of the corresponding green rectangle in FIG. 12B(i) at each stage. The scale bars shown in FIGS. 12B(i) and 12B(ii) correspond to 50 nm. FIG. 12C(i) illustrates an example drift trace after each stage of correction, and FIG. 12C(ii) shows a zoomed image of the corresponding rectangle in FIG. 12C(i) at each stage. The scale bars in FIG. 12C(i) correspond to x: 500 nm, t: 500 s, and the scale bars in FIG. 12C(ii) correspond to x: 10 nm, t: 10 s.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a process for performing drift correction in accordance with some embodiments.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a process for performing drift correction corresponding to stage 230 of FIG. 13.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a process for performing drift correction corresponding to stage 240 of FIG. 13.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates 3D tetrahedrons used as templates for 3D drift correction. The four corners are labeled with docking sites. FIG. 16A shows that the four corners are clearly resolved. FIG. 16B illustrates the X-Z projection of the structures with a height of ˜85 nm.
  • FIG. 17 shows an illustrative implementation of computer system 600 that may be used in connection with any of the embodiments of the present disclosure described herein.
  • FIGS. 18A-18C illustrate an alternative representation of stages in a drift correction process in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure. A super-resolved image of a 10 nm-spaced regular grid on a single-molecule DNA origami nanostructure is shown. The DNA origami structure was designed to be a 5×8 square lattice of 10 nm spacing both vertically and horizontally. FIG. 18A shows a scatter plot of collected and filtered localizations, represented by crosses. FIG. 18B shows a binned 2-D histogram view of the above structure. FIG. 18C shows a 1-D histogram by projecting all localizations in the rectangle in FIGS. 18A and 18B onto the x-axis, and least square fitting with 8 Gaussian components. The fitted Gaussian peaks all have standard deviation in the range of 1.5-2.4 nm, allowing for 3.5-5.6 nm resolution in principle; and spacing between neighboring peaks in the range of 9.8-11.0 nm, consistent with the DNA origami design. A few (5 in this case) spots are missing in the structure because of imperfect incorporation of staples in the assembly reaction, but not missed during the super-resolution imaging.
  • FIGS. 19A and 19B show that RNA aptamers modulate the fluorescence of GFP-like fluorophores. FIG. 19A shows structures of HBI (green), in the context of GFP, and DMHBI. FIG. 19B shows that the 13-2 RNA aptamer enhances the fluorescence of DMHBI by stabilizing a particular molecular arrangement favorable for fluorescence emission. Solutions containing DMHBI, 13-2 RNA, DMHBI with 13-2 RNA, or DMHBI with total HeLa cell RNA were photographed under illumination with 365 nm of light. The image is a montage obtained under identical image-acquisition conditions. (Image from Paige et al., ref. 19)
  • FIGS. 20A and 20B show single-molecule fluorescence characterization of the DFHBI binding kinetics. FIG. 20A shows a 5′-extended Spinach (green) is immobilized on a
  • BSA/Biotin-coated glass substrate using a biotinylated DNA capture sequence (labeled with a red dye, e.g. Alexa647; color rendering not shown). FIG. 20B shows a bulk fluorescence measurement of the Spinach-DFHBI before (bottom line) and after (top line) addition of the aptamer shows that the DFHBI binding activity is well maintained after the addition an extension to Spinach required for immobilizing to the glass surface in FIG. 20A.
  • FIGS. 21A and 21B show benchmarking Spinach-PAINT performance. FIG. 20A shows a six-helix DNA origami structure used for placing two Spinach molecules in a defined distance. FIG. 20B shows a simulated representation of a super-resolved reconstruction using DNA-PAINT to localize the DNA structure (P) and Spinach-PAINT to localize the Spinach molecules in three different distances.
  • FIG. 22 shows Spinach-based sensors. The allosteric variant of the Spinach-based sensor (left) comprises the Spinach domain (black), the transducer module (medium gray), and the recognition module (light gray). In the absence of the target molecule, the transducer module is in a primarily unstructured state, which prevents the stabilization of the Spinach structure needed for activation of DFHBI. Upon binding of the target molecule, the transducer module forms a duplex, leading to structural rigidification of the Spinach module, and activation of DFHBI fluorescence (ref. 24).
  • FIGS. 23A and 23B show examples of in vitro and in situ Exchange-PAINT chambers.
  • DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • The present disclosure provides, inter alia, methods, compositions and kits for multiplexed imaging, for example, in a cellular environment using nucleic acid-based imaging probes (e.g., DNA-based imaging probes). The methods, compositions and kits for multiplexed fluorescence imaging are not limited by the degree of resolution attained. Thus, the methods, compositions and kits as provided herein may be used for imaging, generally.
  • In some aspects, the present disclosure further provides, inter alia, methods, compositions and kits for multiplexed super-resolution fluorescence imaging, for example, in a cellular environment using nucleic acid-based imaging probes (e.g., DNA-based imaging probes). As used herein, “super-resolution” imaging refers to the process of combining a set of low resolution images of the same area to obtain a single image of higher resolution. Many aspects of the present disclosure may be used to “switch” targets (e.g., biomolecules) of interest between fluorescent ON- and OFF-states to permit consecutive, or in some instances simultaneous, localization of individual targets. A fluorescent “ON” state is a state in which fluorescence is emitted. A fluorescent “OFF” state is a state in which fluorescence is not emitted. Switching between the two states is achieved, in some embodiments, with diffusing molecules that are labeled with a detectable label (e.g., fluorescent molecules) that interact transiently with the targets using an intermediate moiety that comprises the detectable label (e.g., fluorescent molecule(s)) and binds to the target. The methods, compositions and kits of the present disclosure are useful, in some aspects, for detecting, identifying and quantifying target targets of interest.
  • Binding partner-nucleic acid conjugates (“BP-NA conjugates”) of the present disclosure transiently bind to complementary labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strands. As used herein, “binding partner-nucleic acid conjugate,” or “BP-NA conjugate,” refers to a molecule linked (e.g., through an N-Hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) linker) to a single-stranded nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) docking strand. The binding partner of the conjugate may be any moiety (e.g., antibody or aptamer) that has an affinity for (e.g., binds to) a target, such as a biomolecule (e.g., protein or nucleic acid), of interest. In some embodiments, the binding partner is a protein. BP-NA-conjugates that comprise a protein (or peptide) linked to a docking strand may be referred to herein as “protein-nucleic acid conjugates,” or “protein-NA conjugates.” Examples of proteins for use in the conjugates of the present disclosure include, without limitation, antibodies (e.g., monoclonal monobodies), antigen-binding antibody fragments (e.g., Fab fragments), receptors, peptides and peptide aptamers. Other binding partners may be used in accordance with the present disclosure. For example, binding partners that bind to targets through electrostatic (e.g., electrostatic particles), hydrophobic or magnetic (e.g., magnetic particles) interactions are contemplated herein.
  • As used herein, “antibody” includes full-length antibodies and any antigen binding fragment (e.g., “antigen-binding portion”) or single chain thereof. The term “antibody” includes, without limitation, a glycoprotein comprising at least two heavy (H) chains and two light (L) chains inter-connected by disulfide bonds, or an antigen binding portion thereof. Antibodies may be polyclonal or monoclonal; xenogeneic, allogeneic, or syngeneic; or modified forms thereof (e.g., humanized, chimeric).
  • As used herein, “antigen-binding portion” of an antibody, refers to one or more fragments of an antibody that retain the ability to specifically bind to an antigen. The antigen-binding function of an antibody can be performed by fragments of a full-length antibody. Examples of binding fragments encompassed within the term “antigen-binding portion” of an antibody include (i) a Fab fragment, a monovalent fragment consisting of the VH, VL, CL and CH1 domains; (ii) a F(ab′)2 fragment, a bivalent fragment comprising two Fab fragments linked by a disulfide bridge at the hinge region; (iii) a Fd fragment consisting of the VH and CH1 domains; (iv) a Fv fragment consisting of the VH and VL domains of a single arm of an antibody, (v) a dAb fragment (Ward et al., Nature 341:544 546, 1989), which consists of a VH domain; and (vi) an isolated complementarity determining region (CDR) or (vii) a combination of two or more isolated CDRs, which may optionally be joined by a synthetic linker. Furthermore, although the two domains of the Fv fragment, VH and VL, are coded for by separate genes, they can be joined, using recombinant methods, by a synthetic linker that enables them to be made as a single protein chain in which the VH and VL regions pair to form monovalent molecules (known as single chain Fv (scFv); see, e.g., Bird et al. Science 242:423 426, 1988; and Huston et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:5879-5883, 1988). Such single chain antibodies are also encompassed within the term “antigen-binding portion” of an antibody. These antibody fragments are obtained using conventional techniques known to those with skill in the art, and the fragments are screened for utility in the same manner as are intact antibodies.
  • As used herein, “receptors” refer to cellular-derived molecules (e.g., proteins) that bind to ligands such as, for example, peptides or small molecules (e.g., low molecular weight (<900 Daltons) organic or inorganic compounds).
  • As used herein, “peptide aptamer” refers to a molecule with a variable peptide sequence inserted into a constant scaffold protein (see, e.g., Baines I C, et al. Drug Discov. Today 11:334-341, 2006).
  • In some embodiments, the molecule of the BP-NA conjugate is a nucleic acid such as, for example, a nucleic acid aptamer. As used herein, “nucleic acid aptamer” refers to a small RNA or DNA molecules that can form secondary and tertiary structures capable of specifically binding proteins or other cellular targets (see, e.g., Ni X, et al. Curr Med Chem. 18(27): 4206-4214, 2011). Thus, in some embodiments, the BP-NA conjugate may be an aptamer-nucleic acid conjugate.
  • As used herein a “docking strand” refers to a single-stranded nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) that is about 5 nucleotides to about 50 nucleotides in length (or is 5 nucleotides to 50 nucleotides in length). In some embodiments, a docking strand is about 4 to about 60, about 6 nucleotides to about 40 nucleotides, about 7 nucleotides to about 30 nucleotides, about 8 to about 20 nucleotides, or about 9 nucleotides to about 15 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, a docking strand is (or is about) 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, or more nucleotides in length.
  • A docking strand may have one domain or more than one domain (i.e., a plurality of domains), each domain complementary to a respective imager strand. As used herein, a “docking strand domain” refers to a nucleotide sequence of the docking strand that is complementary to a nucleotide sequence of an imager strand. A docking strand, for example, may contain one, two three, or more domains, each domain complementary to an imager strand. Each complementary imager strand can contain a distinct label (e.g., a red fluorophore, a blue fluorophore, or a green fluorophore), or all complementary imager strands can contain the same label (e.g., red fluorophores). For example, for a three-domain docking strand, the strand may contain a first domain complementary to an imager strand labeled with a red fluorophore, a second domain complementary to an imager strand labeled with a blue fluorophore, and a third domain complementary to an imager strand labeled with a green fluorophore. Alternatively, each of three docking domains may be complementary to imager strands labeled with a red fluorophore. In some embodiments, a docking strand has at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, or more domains, each respectively complementary to an imager strand. In some embodiments, a docking strand has 1 to 5, 1 to 10, 1 to 15, 1 to 20, 1 to 25, 1 to 50, or 1 to 100 domains, each respectively complementary to an imager strand.
  • As used herein, an “imager strand” is a single-stranded nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) that is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides, about 5 to about 18 nucleotides, about 6 to about 15 nucleotides, about 7 to about 12 nucleotides, or about 8 to 10 nucleotides in length and is fluorescently-labeled. In some embodiments, the imager strand may be (or may be about) 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 nucleotides in length. An imager strand of the present disclosure is complementary to and transiently binds to a docking strand. Two nucleic acids or nucleic acid domains are “complementary” to one another if they base-pair, or bind, with each other to form a double-stranded nucleic acid molecule via Watson-Crick interactions. As used herein, “binding” refers to an association between at least two molecules due to, for example, electrostatic, hydrophobic, ionic and/or hydrogen-bond interactions under physiological conditions. An imager strand is considered to “transiently bind” to a docking strand if it binds to a complementary region of a docking strand and then disassociates (unbinds) from the docking strand within a short period of time, for example, at room temperature. In some embodiments, an imager strand remains bound to a docking strand for about 0.1 to about 10, or about 0.1 to about 5 seconds. For example, an imager strand may remain bound to a docking strand for about 0.1, about 1, about 5 or about 10 seconds.
  • Imager strands of the present disclosure may be labeled with a detectable label (e.g., a fluorescent label, and thus are considered “fluorescently labeled”). For example, in some embodiments, an imager strand may comprise at least one (i.e., one or more) fluorophore. Examples of fluorophores for use in accordance with the present disclosure include, without limitation, xanthene derivatives (e.g., fluorescein, rhodamine, Oregon green, eosin and Texas red), cyanine derivatives (e.g., cyanine, indocarbocyanine, oxacarbocyanine, thiacarbocyanine and merocyanine), naphthalene derivatives (e.g., dansyl and prodan derivatives), coumarin derivatives, oxadiazole derivatives (e.g., pyridyloxazole, nitrobenzoxadiazole and benzoxadiazole), pyrene derivatives (e.g., cascade blue), oxazine derivatives (e.g., Nile red, Nile blue, cresyl violet and oxazine 170), acridine derivatives (e.g., proflavin, acridine orange and acridine yellow), arylmethine derivatives (e.g., auramine, crystal violet and malachite green), and tetrapyrrole derivatives (e.g., porphin, phthalocyanine and bilirubin). Other detectable labels may be used in accordance with the present disclosure, such us, for example, gold nanoparticles or other detectable particles or moieties.
  • As used herein, “spectrally distinct” molecules of the present disclosure (e.g., conjugates and/or imager strands) refer to molecules with labels (e.g., fluorophores) of different spectral signal or wavelength. For example, an imager strand labeled with a Cy2 fluorophore emits a signal at a wavelength of light of about 510 nm, while an imager strand labeled with a Cy5 fluorophore emits a signal at a wavelength of light of about 670 nm. Thus, the Cy2-labeled imager strand is considered herein to be spectrally distinct from the Cy5-labeled imager strand. Conversely, “spectrally indistinct” molecules of the present disclosure herein refer to molecules with labels having the same spectral signal or wavelength—that is, the emission wavelength of the labels cannot be used to distinguish between two spectrally indistinct fluorescently labeled molecules (e.g., because the wavelengths are the same or close together).
  • The BP-NA conjugates (e.g., protein-nucleic acid conjugates) of the present disclosure may, in some embodiments, comprise an intermediate linker that links (e.g., covalently or non-covalently) the molecule to a docking strand. The intermediate linker may comprise biotin and/or streptavidin. For example, in some embodiments, an antibody and a docking strand may each be biotinylated (i.e., linked to at least one biotin molecule) and linked to each other through biotin binding to an intermediate streptavidin molecule, as shown in FIG. 2. Other intermediate linkers may be used in accordance with the present disclosure. In some embodiments, such as those where the molecule is a nucleic acid, an intermediate linker may not be required. For example, the docking strand of a BP-NA conjugate may be an extension (e.g., 5′ or 3′ extension) of a nucleic acid molecule such as, for example, a nucleic acid aptamer.
  • Pluralities of BP-NA conjugates (e.g., protein-nucleic acid conjugates) and imager strands are provided herein. A plurality may be a population of the same species or distinct species. A plurality of BP-NA conjugates of the same species may comprise conjugates that all bind to the same target (e.g., biomolecule) (e.g., the same epitope or region/domain). Conversely, a plurality of BP-NA conjugates of distinct species may comprise conjugates, or subsets of conjugates, each conjugate or subset of conjugates binding to a distinct epitope on the same target or to a distinct target. A plurality of imager strands of the same species may comprise imager strands with the same nucleotide sequence and the same fluorescent label (e.g., Cy2, Cy3 or Cy4). Conversely, a plurality of imager strands of distinct species may comprise imager strands with distinct nucleotide sequences (e.g., DNA sequences) and distinct fluorescent labels (e.g., Cy2, Cy3 or Cy4) or with distinct nucleotide sequences and the same fluorescent (e.g., all Cy2). The number of distinct species in a given plurality of BP-NA conjugates is limited by the number of binding partners (e.g., antibodies) and the number of docking strands of different nucleotide sequence (and thus complementary imager strands). In some embodiments, a plurality of BP-NA conjugates (e.g., protein-nucleic acid conjugates) comprises at least 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 104, 50000, 105, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 1010, 1011 BP-NA conjugates. Likewise, in some embodiments, a plurality of fluorescently-labeled imager strands comprises at least 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 104, 50000, 105, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 1010, 1011 fluorescently-labeled imager strands. In some embodiments, a plurality may contain 1 to about 200 or more distinct species of BP-NA conjugates and/or imager strands. For example, a plurality may contain at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200 or more distinct species. In some embodiments, a plurality may contain less than about 5 to about 200 distinct species of BP-NA conjugates and/or imager strands. For example, a plurality may contain less than 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175 or 200 distinct species.
  • The present disclosure also contemplates docking strands that can bind directly to a target. For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, a docking strand may contain, in additional to imager-binding domain(s) (e.g., one, two, three, or more, with the same or distinct fluorophores), a target domain that is complementary to and binds to a target, such as, for example, mRNA or other nucleic acid.
  • Methods
  • Methods provided herein are based, in part, on the programmability of nucleic acid docking strands and imager strands. That is, for example, docking strands and imager strands can be designed such that they bind to each other under certain conditions for a certain period of time. This programmability permits transient binding of imager strands to docking strands, as provided herein. Generally, the methods provided herein are directed to identifying one or more target(s) (e.g., biomolecule(s) such as a protein or nucleic acid) in a particular sample (e.g., biological sample). In some instances, whether or not one or more target(s) is present in sample is unknown. Thus, methods of the present disclosure may be used to determine the presence or absence of one or more target(s) in a sample suspected of containing the target(s). In any one of the aspects and embodiments provided herein, a sample may contain or may be suspected of containing one or more target(s).
  • Methods provided herein can also be used to identify the absolute quantity of a single target (e.g., such as, for example, a particular protein), or the quantity of a single target relative to one or more other targets.
  • Further, methods provided herein may be used to identify the location of a target within a sample or relative to other targets in the sample.
  • Methods provided herein may comprise, in some embodiments, contacting a sample with (a) at least one BP-NA conjugate (e.g., protein-nucleic acid conjugate) that comprises a binding partner linked to a docking strand and (b) at least one labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one BP-NA conjugate, and then determining whether the at least one BP-NA conjugate binds to at least one target (such as a biomolecule target) in the sample. In some embodiments, the determining step comprises imaging (e.g., with time-lapsed fluorescent microscopy techniques) transient binding of the at least one labeled, optionally fluorescently labeled, imager strand to the docking strand of the at least one BP-NA conjugate.
  • Other methods provided herein may comprise, in some embodiments, contacting a sample with (a) at least two BP-NA conjugates, each comprising a binding partner linked to a docking strand, and (b) at least two labeled, optionally spectrally distinct, fluorescently labeled, imager strands that are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the at least two different BP-NA conjugates, and then determining whether the at least two BP-NA conjugates bind to at least one, or at least two, targets (such as biomolecule targets) in the sample. Binding of the BP-NA conjugates to respective targets can be determined by imaging transient binding of one of the at least two labeled, optionally spectrally distinct, fluorescently labeled, imager strands to a docking strand of one of the at least two BP-NA conjugates to produce a first image, and then imaging transient binding of another of the at least two labeled, optionally spectrally distinct, fluorescently labeled, imager strands to a docking strand of another of the at least two BP-NA conjugates to produce a second image. In some embodiments, the methods further comprise combining the first image and the second image to produce a composite image of signals (e.g., fluorescent signals), wherein the signals (e.g., fluorescent signals) of the composite image are representative of the at least two targets. As used herein, a “composite image” refers to a single image produced by combining (e.g., overlaying) multiple images of the same (or substantially similar) area. A composite image may also be referred to as a super-resolution image, as described elsewhere herein.
  • FIG. 3 demonstrates one embodiment of the present disclosure in which two distinct species of BP-NA conjugates (e.g., antibody-nucleic acid conjugates) are used to label biomolecules in a fixed HeLa cell sample. One species of antibody-nucleic acid conjugate comprises an antibody that recognizes and binds to an epitope on mitochondria. The mitochondrial specific antibody is linked to a docking strand with a sequence complementary to a Cy3b-labled imager strand. The other species of antibody-nucleic acid conjugate comprises an antibody that recognizes and binds to an epitope on microtubules. The microtubule specific antibody is linked to a docking strand with a sequence complementary to an ATTO655-labeled imager strand. Two spectrally distinct species of imager strands are then introduced at the same time: one species is labeled with Cy3b and is complementary to the docking strand that is linked to the mitochondrial specific antibody, and the other species is labeled with ATTO655 and is complementary to the docking strand that is linked to the microtubule specific antibody. While both the Cy3b-labled imager strand and the ATTO655-labled imager strand are present at the same time in solution with the sample, imaging is carried our sequentially in Cy3b and ATTO655 channels.
  • Yet other methods provided herein may comprise, in some embodiments, contacting a sample with (a) at least two BP-NA conjugates, each comprising a protein linked to a docking strand and (b) at least two spectrally indistinct (e.g., labeled with the same fluorophore) fluorescently-labeled imager strands that are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the at least two BP-NA conjugates, and then determining whether the at last two BP-NA conjugates bind to at least two targets (e.g., biomolecule targets) in the sample. In some embodiments, the methods comprise, in the following ordered steps, contacting the sample with a first BP-NA conjugate and at least one other BP-NA conjugate, contacting the sample with a first fluorescently-labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first BP-NA conjugate, determining whether the first BP-NA conjugate binds to a first target, removing the first fluorescently-labeled imager strand, contacting the sample with at least one other fluorescently-labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other BP-NA conjugate, and determining whether the at least one other BP-NA conjugate binds to at least one other target.
  • Alternatively, in other embodiments, methods comprise, in the following ordered steps, contacting the sample with a first BP-NA conjugate, contacting the sample with a first fluorescently-labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first BP-NA conjugate, determining whether the first BP-NA conjugate binds to a first target (e.g., biomolecule), removing the first fluorescently-labeled imager strand, contacting the sample with at least one other BP-NA conjugate, contacting the sample with at least one other fluorescently-labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other BP-NA conjugate, and determining whether the at least one other BP-NA conjugate binds to at least one other target.
  • In some embodiments, the first determining step comprises imaging transient binding of the first fluorescently-labeled imager strand to the docking strand of the first BP-NA conjugate to produce a first image, and the second determining step comprises imaging transient binding of the at least one other fluorescently-labeled imager strand to the docking strand of the at least one other BP-NA conjugate to produce a second image. In some embodiments, the methods further comprise assigning a pseudo-color to the fluorescent signal in the first image, and assigning at least one other pseudo-color to the fluorescent signal in the second image. Further still, in some embodiments, the methods comprise combining the first image and the second image to produce a composite image of the pseudo-colored signals, wherein the pseudo-colored signals of the composite image are representative of the at least two targets (e.g., biomolecule targets). As illustrated in FIG. 4A, step [1], three distinct species of docking strands (a,b,c) label the surface of a grid (chosen for illustrative purposes). In step [2], multiple copies of the imager strand a* are introduced, and points labeled with docking strands a are imaged. In step [3], copies of the imager strand a* are flushed away, and imager strand b* is introduced to image the b labeled points. In step [4], c labeled points are imaged in the same manner. In step [5], images from steps [2-4] are assigned artificial pseudo-colors (e.g., using a software program) and combined to create the final composite image. All imager strands may be labeled with the same fluorophore—that is, the imager strands are spectrally indistinct. In some embodiments, the docking strands are linked to binding partners (e.g., proteins such as antibodies, or nucleic acids such as DNA or nucleic acid aptamers).
  • An advantage of the methods of the present disclosure is that partitioning and sequential imaging can be used to obtain multiplexed super-resolved images of up to hundreds of different species using only a single optimized fluorescent dye. Using these methods, the number of distinct nucleotide sequences (e.g., DNA sequences), as opposed to the number of spectrally distinct dyes, limits the multiplexing capability. In some methods of the present disclosure, for example, those that use an imager strand with a length of 9 nucleotides, there are several hundred species within tight bounds for binding kinetics that may be used for a single sample, representing a tremendous increase in multiplexing compared to direct “traditional” imaging approaches.
  • FIG. 5A illustrates another embodiment of the present disclosure using spectrally indistinct imager strands. A single DNA nanostructure displays four distinct species of docking strands (optionally linked to protein binding partners or nucleic acid binding partners) designed to resemble the digits from 0 to 3, respectively. Imaging is performed sequentially using a simple flow chamber setup, first flushing in fluorescently-labeled imager strands complementary to the docking strands of the number 0, and then exchanging the solution for fluorescently-labeled imager strands with a sequence complementary to docking strands of the number 1, and so forth. The resulting images have been pseudo-colored to represent the respective imaging cycles. As used herein, an “imaging cycle,” or “imaging round” refers to the process of introducing fluorescently-labeled imager strands complementary to docking strands under conditions that allow the imager strand to bind to the docking strand, even if such binding is transient, and obtaining an image (or imaging an area).
  • Aspects of the present disclosure contemplate multiplex detection using multi-domain docking strands (e.g., docking strands with more than one domain), as described above. For illustrative purposes, the following embodiments are described in terms of a docking strand binding to a target, e.g., without an intermediate binding partner. It should be understood, however, that multi-domain docking strands may be linked to a binding partner (e.g., of a BP-NA conjugate, as provided herein.
  • In some embodiments, methods comprise contacting one or more target(s) with one or more docking strands, each containing two or more binding domains. In other embodiments, methods comprise contacting one or more target(s) with two or more docking strands, each containing one binding domain. The docking strand domains may have orthogonal sequences. In the examples that follow, all three targets (protein #1-#3) are present in the sample.
  • Detection Based on Spectral Resolution. An exemplary multiplexed target detection method follows. A sample contains, or is suspected of containing, three target species—protein #1, protein #2, and protein #3. Three docking strands are designed such that: the first, containing imager binding domain A, binds to protein #1; the second, containing imager binding domain B, binds to protein #2; and the third, containing imager binding domains A and B, binds to protein #3. Complementary imager strand A′ binds to imager binding domain A of a docking strand and is labeled with a blue fluorophore, and imager strand B′ binds to imager binding domain B of a docking strand and is labeled with a red fluorophore. The sample is first contacted with the docking strands, and subsequently contacted with the imager strands A′ and B′. The sample is then imaged. The sample containing the docking strands and the imager strands is first imaged under conditions that detect the blue fluorophore. Imaging the blue fluorophore detects protein #1 and protein #3, each bound by an imager strand labeled with the blue fluorophore. Imaging the red fluorophore detects protein #2 and protein #3, each bound by an imager strand labeled with the red fluorophore. Overlapping images of the red and blue fluorophores detects protein #3 only, the only protein bound by an imager strand labeled with a red fluorophore and an imager strand labeled with a blue fluorophore. Thus, the identification and location of proteins #1-#3 are identified by the overlay of images respectively detecting the red and blue fluorophores.
  • Detection Based on Exchange of Imager Strands. Another exemplary multiplexed target detection method follows: A sample contains, or is suspected of containing, three target species—protein #1, protein #2, and protein #3. Three docking strands are designed such that: the first, containing imager binding domain A, binds to protein #1; the second, containing imager binding domain B, binds to protein #2; and the third, containing imager binding domains A and B, binds to protein #3. Complementary imager strand A′ binds to imager binding domain A of a docking strand and is labeled with a blue fluorophore, and imager strand B′ binds to imager binding domain B of a docking strand and is also labeled with a blue fluorophore. The sample is first contacted with the docking strands, and subsequently contacted with imager strands A′. The sample is then imaged under conditions that detect the blue fluorophore. Imaging the blue fluorophore detects protein #1 and protein #3, each bound by imager strand A′ labeled with the blue fluorophore. The sample is then washed to remove imager strands A′. Next, the sample is contacted with imager strands B′. The sample is then imaged again under conditions that detect the blue fluorophore. Imaging the blue fluorophore now detects protein #2 and protein #3, each bound by imager strand B′ labeled with the blue fluorophore. Overlapping images of the blue fluorophores (e.g., resulting in a stronger signal relative to non-overlapping fluorophores) detects protein #3 only, the only protein bound by two imager strands labeled with a blue fluorophore. Thus, the identification and location of proteins #1-#3 are identified by the overlay of images detecting the blue fluorophores and is based on signal intensity.
  • Detection Based on a Combination of Spectral and Exchange Detection. Yet another exemplary multiplexed target detection method follows: A sample contains, or is suspected of containing, fifteen target species. The docking strands are designed such that each target species binds to a docking strand, each docking strand containing a single distinct domain or a distinct combination of domains A-D (e.g., A, or A and B (i.e., A/B), or A/C, or A/D, or A/B/C, or A/B/D, or A/C/D, or A/B/C/D, or B, or B/C, or B/D, or B/C/D, or C, or C/D, or D). The imager strands are divided into two sets: the first set (set #1) contains imager strand A′ labeled by a red fluorophore and imager strand B′ labeled by a blue fluorophore; the second set contains imager strand C′ labeled with a red fluorophore and imager strand D′ labeled with a blue fluorophore. The sample is first contacted with the docking strands, and subsequently contacted with imager strand set #1. The sample is then imaged under conditions that detect blue and red fluorophores. Targets bound by imager strands A′ will be detected red and targets bound by imager strands B′ will be detected blue. Thus, all target species with docking domains A and B will be detected in a first image or first set of images. The sample is then washed to remove imager strand set #1. Next, the sample is contacted with imager strand set #2. The sample is then imaged again under conditions that detect blue and red fluorophores. Targets bound by imager strands C′ will be detected red and targets bound by imager strands D′ will be detected blue. Thus, all target species with docking domains C and D will be detected in a second image or second set of images. By combining all images collected, each of the 15 target species can be identified using only four imager strands and two fluorophores. It should be understood that more than four imager strands can be used as well as more than two fluorophores, depending on, for example, the number of targets.
  • Detection Based on Duration of Transient Binding. In some embodiments, the disclosure contemplates contacting target species with different docking strands domain sequence and different lengths of those sequences. The length of a docking strand imager binding domain affects the duration of transient binding to an imager strand. Docking strands with longer binding domains bind to respectively complementary imager strands for longer durations relative to shorter binding domains. In the following exemplary embodiment, a sample contains, or is suspected of containing, four target species. Four docking strands are designed such that: the first, containing binding domain A of 10 nucleotides in length (A10), binds to protein #1; the second, containing imager binding domain A10 and imager binding domain B of 8 nucleotides in length (B8), binds to protein #2; the third, containing imager binding domain A of 8 nucleotides in length (A8) and imager binding domain B of 10 nucleotides in length (B10), binds to protein #3; and four, containing imager strand binding domain B10. Imager strand A′ is 10 nucleotides in length, binds to both A8 and A10, and is labeled with a blue fluorophore. Imager strand B′ is 10 nucleotides in length, binds to both B8 and B10, and is labeled with a red fluorophore. The sample is first contacted with the docking strands, and subsequently contacted with imager strands A′ and B′. The sample is then imaged under conditions that detect the blue fluorophore. Imaging the blue fluorophore detects protein #3 and protein #4 with a longer bound time (i.e., time of binding between imager strand and docking strand) and protein #2 with a shorter bound time. Imaging the red fluorophore detects protein #1 and protein #2 with a longer bound time and protein #3 with a shorter bound time. Overlapping images of the blue and red fluorophores detects each of the four protein targets.
  • The present disclosure also contemplates combining multiplexed detection based on spectral resolution and duration, exchange and duration, and spectral resolution, exchange and duration.
  • A “sample” may comprise cells (or a cell), tissue, or bodily fluid such as blood (serum and/or plasma), urine, semen, lymphatic fluid, cerebrospinal fluid or amniotic fluid. A sample may be obtained from (or derived from) any source including, without limitation, humans, animals, bacteria, viruses, microbes and plants. In some embodiments, a sample is a cell lysate or a tissue lysate. A sample may also contain mixtures of material from one source or different sources. A sample may be a spatial area or volume (e.g., a grid on an array, or a well in a plate or dish). A sample, in some embodiments, includes target(s), BP-NA conjugate(s) and imager strand(s).
  • A “target” is any moiety that one wishes to observe or quantitate and for which a binding partner exists. A target, in some embodiments, may be non-naturally occurring. The target, in some embodiments, may be a biomolecule. As used herein, a “biomolecule” is any molecule that is produced by a living organism, including large macromolecules such as proteins, polysaccharides, lipids and nucleic acids (e.g., DNA and RNA such as mRNA), as well as small molecules such as primary metabolites, secondary metabolites, and natural products. Examples of biomolecules include, without limitation, DNA, RNA, cDNA, or the DNA product of RNA subjected to reverse transcription, A23187 (Calcimycin, Calcium Ionophore), Abamectine, Abietic acid, Acetic acid, Acetylcholine, Actin, Actinomycin D, Adenosine, Adenosine diphosphate (ADP), Adenosine monophosphate (AMP), Adenosine triphosphate (ATP), Adenylate cyclase, Adonitol, Adrenaline, epinephrine, Adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH), Aequorin, Aflatoxin, Agar, Alamethicin, Alanine, Albumins, Aldosterone, Aleurone, Alpha-amanitin, Allantoin, Allethrin, α-Amanatin, Amino acid, Amylase, Anabolic steroid, Anethole, Angiotensinogen, Anisomycin, Antidiuretic hormone (ADH), Arabinose, Arginine, Ascomycin, Ascorbic acid (vitamin C), Asparagine, Aspartic acid, Asymmetric dimethylarginine, Atrial-natriuretic peptide (ANP), Auxin, Avidin, Azadirachtin A—C35H44O16, Bacteriocin, Beauvericin, Bicuculline, Bilirubin, Biopolymer, Biotin (Vitamin H), Brefeldin A, Brassinolide, Brucine, Cadaverine, Caffeine, Calciferol (Vitamin D), Calcitonin, Calmodulin, Calmodulin, Calreticulin, Camphor—(C10H160), Cannabinol, Capsaicin, Carbohydrase, Carbohydrate, Carnitine, Carrageenan, Casein, Caspase, Cellulase, Cellulose—(C6H10O5), Cerulenin, Cetrimonium bromide (Cetrimide)—C 19H42BrN, Chelerythrine, Chromomycin A3, Chaparonin, Chitin, α-Chloralose, Chlorophyll, Cholecystokinin (CCK), Cholesterol, Choline, Chondroitin sulfate, Cinnamaldehyde, Citral, Citric acid, Citrinin, Citronellal, Citronellol, Citrulline, Cobalamin (vitamin B12), Coenzyme, Coenzyme Q, Colchicine, Collagen, Coniine, Corticosteroid, Corticosterone, Corticotropin-releasing hormone (CRH), Cortisol, Creatine, Creatine kinase, Crystallin, α-Cyclodextrin, Cyclodextrin glycosyltransferase, Cyclopamine, Cyclopiazonic acid, Cysteine, Cystine, Cytidine, Cytochalasin, Cytochalasin E, Cytochrome, Cytochrome C, Cytochrome c oxidase, Cytochrome c peroxidase, Cytokine, Cytosine—C4H5N3O, Deoxycholic acid, DON (DeoxyNivalenol), Deoxyribofuranose, Deoxyribose, Deoxyribose nucleic acid (DNA), Dextran, Dextrin, DNA, Dopamine, Enzyme, Ephedrine, Epinephrine—C9H13NO3, Erucic acid—CH3(CH2)7CH═CH(CH2)11COOH, Erythritol, Erythropoietin (EPO), Estradiol, Eugenol, Fatty acid, Fibrin, Fibronectin, Folic acid (Vitamin M), Follicle stimulating hormone (FSH), Formaldehyde, Formic acid, Formnoci, Fructose, Fumonisin B1, Gamma globulin, Galactose, Gamma globulin, Gamma-aminobutyric acid, Gamma-butyrolactone, Gamma-hydroxybutyrate (GHB), Gastrin, Gelatin, Geraniol, Globulin, Glucagon, Glucosamine, Glucose—C6H12O6, Glucose oxidase, Gluten, Glutamic acid, Glutamine, Glutathione, Gluten, Glycerin (glycerol), Glycine, Glycogen, Glycolic acid, Glycoprotein, Gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH), Granzyme, Green fluorescent protein, Growth hormone, Growth hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH), GTPase, Guanine, Guanosine, Guanosine triphosphate (+GTP), Haptoglobin, Hematoxylin, Heme, Hemerythrin, Hemocyanin, Hemoglobin, Hemoprotein, Heparan sulfate, High density lipoprotein, HDL, Histamine, Histidine, Histone, Histone methyltransferase, HLA antigen, Homocysteine, Hormone, human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG), Human growth hormone, Hyaluronate, Hyaluronidase, Hydrogen peroxide, 5-Hydroxymethylcytosine, Hydroxyproline, 5-Hydroxytryptamine, Indigo dye, Indole, Inosine, Inositol, Insulin, Insulin-like growth factor, Integral membrane protein, Integrase, Integrin, Intein, Interferon, Inulin, Ionomycin, Ionone, Isoleucine, Iron-sulfur cluster, K252a, K252b, KT5720, KT5823, Keratin, Kinase, Lactase, Lactic acid, Lactose, Lanolin, Lauric acid, Leptin, Leptomycin B, Leucine, Lignin, Limonene, Linalool, Linoleic acid, Linolenic acid, Lipase, Lipid, Lipid anchored protein, Lipoamide, Lipoprotein, Low density lipoprotein, LDL, Luteinizing hormone (LH), Lycopene, Lysine, Lysozyme, Malic acid, Maltose, Melatonin, Membrane protein, Metalloprotein, Metallothionein, Methionine, Mimosine, Mithramycin A, Mitomycin C, Monomer, Mycophenolic acid, Myoglobin, Myosin, Natural phenols, Nucleic Acid, Ochratoxin A, Oestrogens, Oligopeptide, Oligomycin, Orcin, Orexin, Ornithine, Oxalic acid, Oxidase, Oxytocin, p53, PABA, Paclitaxel, Palmitic acid, Pantothenic acid (vitamin B5), parathyroid hormone (PTH), Paraprotein, Pardaxin, Parthenolide, Patulin, Paxilline, Penicillic acid, Penicillin, Penitrem A, Peptidase, Pepsin, Peptide, Perimycin, Peripheral membrane protein, Perosamine, Phenethylamine, Phenylalanine, Phosphagen, phosphatase, Phospholipid, Phenylalanine, Phytic acid, Plant hormones, Polypeptide, Polyphenols, Polysaccharides, Porphyrin, Prion, Progesterone, Prolactin (PRL), Proline, Propionic acid, Protamine, Protease, Protein, Proteinoid, Putrescine, Pyrethrin, Pyridoxine or pyridoxamine (Vitamin B6), Pyrrolysine, Pyruvic acid, Quinone, Radicicol, Raffinose, Renin, Retinene, Retinol (Vitamin A), Rhodopsin (visual purple), Riboflavin (vitamin B2), Ribofuranose, Ribose, Ribozyme, Ricin, RNA—Ribonucleic acid, RuBisCO, Safrole, Salicylaldehyde, Salicylic acid, Salvinorin-A—C23H2808, Saponin, Secretin, Selenocysteine, Selenomethionine, Selenoprotein, Serine, Serine kinase, Serotonin, Skatole, Signal recognition particle, Somatostatin, Sorbic acid, Squalene, Staurosporin, Stearic acid, Sterigmatocystin, Sterol, Strychnine, Sucrose (sugar), Sugars (in general), superoxide, T2 Toxin, Tannic acid, Tannin, Tartaric acid, Taurine, Tetrodotoxin, Thaumatin, Topoisomerase, Tyrosine kinase, Taurine, Testosterone, Tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), Tetrodotoxin, Thapsigargin, Thaumatin, Thiamine (vitamin B1)—C12H17ClN4OS.HCl, Threonine, Thrombopoietin, Thymidine, Thymine, Triacsin C, Thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH), Thyrotropin-releasing hormone (TRH), Thyroxine (T4), Tocopherol (Vitamin E), Topoisomerase, Triiodothyronine (T3), Transmembrane receptor, Trichostatin A, Trophic hormone, Trypsin, Tryptophan, Tubulin, Tunicamycin, Tyrosine, Ubiquitin, Uracil, Urea, Urease, Uric acid—C5H4N4O3, Uridine, Valine, Valinomycin, Vanabins, Vasopressin, Verruculogen, Vitamins (in general), Vitamin A (retinol), Vitamin B, Vitamin B1 (thiamine), Vitamin B2 (riboflavin), Vitamin B3 (niacin or nicotinic acid), Vitamin B4 (adenine), Vitamin B5 (pantothenic acid), Vitamin B6 (pyridoxine or pyridoxamine), Vitamin B12 (cobalamin), Vitamin C (ascorbic acid), Vitamin D (calciferol), Vitamin E (tocopherol), Vitamin F, Vitamin H (biotin), Vitamin K (naphthoquinone), Vitamin M (folic acid), Wortmannin and Xylose.
  • In some embodiments, a target may be a protein target such as, for example, proteins of a cellular environment (e.g., intracellular or membrane proteins). Examples of proteins include, without limitation, fibrous proteins such as cytoskeletal proteins (e.g., actin, arp2/3, coronin, dystrophin, FtsZ, keratin, myosin, nebulin, spectrin, tau, titin, tropomyosin, tubulin and collagen) and extracellular matrix proteins (e.g., collagen, elastin, f-spondin, pikachurin, and fibronectin); globular proteins such as plasma proteins (e.g., serum amyloid P component and serum albumin), coagulation factors (e.g., complement proteins,C1-inhibitor and C3-convertase, Factor VIII, Factor XIII, fibrin, Protein C, Protein S, Protein Z, Protein Z-related protease inhibitor, thrombin, Von Willebrand Factor) and acute phase proteins such as C-reactive protein; hemoproteins; cell adhesion proteins (e.g., cadherin, ependymin, integrin, Ncam and selectin); transmembrane transport proteins (e.g., CFTR, glycophorin D and scramblase) such as ion channels (e.g., ligand-gated ion channels such nicotinic acetylcholine receptors and GABAa receptors, and voltage-gated ion channels such as potassium, calcium and sodium channels), synport/antiport proteins (e.g., glucose transporter); hormones and growth factors (e.g., epidermal growth factor (EGF), fibroblast growth factor (FGF), vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF), peptide hormones such as insulin, insulin-like growth factor and oxytocin, and steroid hormones such as androgens, estrogens and progesterones); receptors such as transmembrane receptors (e.g., G-protein-coupled receptor, rhodopsin) and intracellular receptors (e.g., estrogen receptor); DNA-binding proteins (e.g., histones, protamines, CI protein); transcription regulators (e.g., c-myc, FOXP2, FOXP3, MyoD and P53); immune system proteins (e.g., immunoglobulins, major histocompatibility antigens and T cell receptors); nutrient storage/transport proteins (e.g., ferritin); chaperone proteins; and enzymes.
  • In some embodiments, a target may be a nucleic acid target such as, for example, nucleic acids of a cellular environment. As used herein with respect to targets, docking strands, and imager strands, a “nucleic acid” refers to a polymeric form of nucleotides of any length, such as deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, or analogs thereof. For example, a nucleic acid may be a DNA, RNA or the DNA product of RNA subjected to reverse transcription. Non-limiting examples of nucleic acids include coding or non-coding regions of a gene or gene fragment, loci (locus) defined from linkage analysis, exons, introns, messenger RNA (mRNA), transfer RNA, ribosomal RNA, ribozymes, cDNA, recombinant nucleic acids, branched nucleic acids, plasmids, vectors, isolated DNA of any sequence, isolated RNA of any sequence, nucleic acid probes, and primers. Other examples of nucleic acids include, without limitation, cDNA, aptamers, peptide nucleic acids (“PNA”), 2′-5′ DNA (a synthetic material with a shortened backbone that has a base-spacing that matches the A conformation of DNA; 2′-5′ DNA will not normally hybridize with DNA in the B form, but it will hybridize readily with RNA), locked nucleic acids (“LNA”), and nucleic acids with modified backbones (e.g., base- or sugar-modified forms of naturally-occurring nucleic acids). A nucleic acid may comprise modified nucleotides, such as methylated nucleotides and nucleotide analogs (“analogous” forms of purines and pyrimidines are well known in the art). If present, modifications to the nucleotide structure may be imparted before or after assembly of the polymer. A nucleic acid may be a single-stranded, double-stranded, partially single-stranded, or partially double-stranded DNA or RNA.
  • In some embodiments, a nucleic acid (e.g., a nucleic acid target) is naturally-occurring. As used herein, a “naturally occurring” refers to a nucleic acid that is present in organisms or viruses that exist in nature in the absence of human intervention. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid naturally occurs in an organism or virus. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid is genomic DNA, messenger RNA, ribosomal RNA, micro-RNA, pre-micro-RNA, pro-micro-RNA, viral DNA, viral RNA or piwi-RNA. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid target is not a synthetic DNA nanostructure (e.g., two-dimensional (2-D) or three-dimensional (3-D) DNA nanostructure that comprises two or more nucleic acids hybridized to each other by Watson-Crick interactions to form the 2-D or 3-D nanostructure).
  • The nucleic acid docking strands and imager strands described herein can be any one of the nucleic acids described above (e.g., DNA, RNA, modified nucleic acids, nucleic acid analogues, naturally-occurring nucleic acids, synthetic nucleic acids).
  • Quantitative Imaging
  • The present disclosure also provides methods for quantitating fluorescent moieties or emitters in a dense cluster that cannot be spatially resolved using prior art imaging techniques. Prior to the invention, no systematic model existed that describes the kinetics of photoswitching of fluorescent signals.
  • Stochastic super-resolution imaging using transient binding of short oligonucleotides (e.g., imager strands) to their targets offers a unique possibility to quantitatively count integer numbers of labeled molecules in a diffraction-limited area. “Switching” molecules from a fluorescent OFF- to an ON-state in the method of the present disclosure is facilitated by single-molecule nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) hybridization events, which are governed by a very predictable kinetic model with a second order association rate kon and a first order dissociation rate koff:
  • Figure US20160161472A1-20160609-C00001
  • The kinetic parameters kon and koff are now directly linked to fluorescent ON- and OFF-times (τb and τd, respectively) depicted in FIG. 7A. The fluorescence ON-time τb is determined by the dissociation rate koff: τb=1/koff, and the fluorescence OFF-time τd is determined by the association rate kon, the concentration of imager strands in solution cimager, and the number of observed binding sites bs:
  • τ d = 1 k on · c imager · bs
  • After calibrating kon·cimager using a sample with a known number of binding sites bs (which can be easily done using, e.g., a DNA nanostructure), the number of binding sites for an unknown molecule or area can be obtained according to the equation:
  • bs = 1 k on · c imager · τ d
  • Accordingly, the quantification of a fluorescence image may be done automatically using binding kinetics analysis software. In brief, a typical image is recorded in a time-lapsed fashion (e.g., 15000 frames with a frame rate of 10 Hz). Fluorescence spot detection and fitting (e.g., Gaussian fitting, Centroid fitting, or Bessel fitting) is performed on the diffraction-limited image, and thus a super-resolved image is obtained. In the next step, a calibration marker is selected (e.g., a DNA origami structure with a defined number of spots as in FIG. 7C). The software automatically calculates the fluorescence dark time τd by fitting the OFF-time distribution to a cumulative distribution function. Using the equations described above, the product of kon·cimager can be calculated. This product is used to calculate the number of docking sites, and thus targets in the imaged area.
  • In some embodiments, the selection of areas of interest in the resolved (e.g., super-resolved) imaged can be performed automatically by applying a second spot detection step, e.g., to calculate the number of targets in a cluster.
  • Thus, in some embodiments, the methods of the present disclosure comprise providing a sample that comprises targets transiently bound directly or indirectly to fluorescently-labeled imager strands, obtaining a time-lapsed diffraction-limited fluorescence image of the sample, performing fluorescence spot detection and fitting (e.g., Gaussian fitting, Centroid fitting, or Bessel fitting) on the diffraction-limited image to obtain a high-resolution image of the sample, calibrating kon·cimager using a sample with a known number of targets, wherein kon is a second order association constant, and cimager is the concentration of fluorescently-labeled imager strands in the sample, including unbound imager strands, determining variable τd by fitting the fluorescence OFF-time distribution to a cumulative distribution function, and determining the number of targets in the sample based on the equation, number of targets=(kon·cimager·τd)−1.
  • Some aspects of the present disclosure relate to fitting functions. A “fitting function,” as used herein, refers to a mathematical function used to fit the intensity profile of molecules. Examples of fitting functions for use as provided herein include, without limitation, Gaussian fitting, Centroid fitting, and Bessel fitting. It should be understood that while many aspects and embodiments of the present disclosure refer to Gaussian fitting, other fitting functions may be used instead of, or in addition to, Gaussian fitting.
  • Compositions
  • Provided herein are compositions that comprise at least one or at least two (e.g., a plurality) BP-NA conjugate(s) (e.g., protein-nucleic acid conjugate(s)) of the present disclosure. The BP-NA conjugates may be bound to a target of interest (e.g., biomolecule) and/or transiently bound to a complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strand. A composition may comprise a plurality of the same species or distinct species of BP-NA conjugates. In some embodiments, a composition may comprise at least 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 104, 50000, 105, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 1010, 1011 BP-NA conjugates. In some embodiments, a composition may comprise at least 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 104, 50000, 105, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 1010, 1011 complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strands. In some embodiments, a composition may contain 1 to about 200 or more distinct species of BP-NA conjugates and/or imager strands. For example, a composition may contain at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200 or more distinct species. In some embodiments, a composition may contain less than about 5 to about 200 distinct species of BP-NA conjugates and/or imager strands. For example, a composition may contain less than 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175 or 200 distinct species.
  • It should be understood that the number of complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strands imager stands in a composition may be less than, equal to or greater than the number of BP-NA conjugates in the composition.
  • Kits
  • The present disclosure further provides kits comprising one or more components as provided herein. The kits may comprise, for example, a BP-NA conjugate and/or a fluorescently-labeled imager strands. The kits may also comprise components for producing a BP-NA conjugate or for labeling an imager strand. For example, the kits may comprise a binding partner (e.g., antibody), docking strands and intermediate linkers such as, for example, biotin and streptavidin molecules, and/or imager strands. The kits can be used for any purpose apparent to those of skill in the art, including, those described above.
  • The kits may include other reagents as well, for example, buffers for performing hybridization reactions. The kit may also include instructions for using the components of the kit, and/or for making and/or using the BP-NA conjugates and/or labeled imager strands.
  • In some embodiments, a kit comprises at least one docking strand and at least one labeled imager strand that is capable of transiently binding to a docking strand. The docking strands may or may not be conjugated to a binding partner. In some embodiments, the docking strands are conjugated to “generic” non-target-specific affinity molecule (e.g., biotin or streptavidin), which may be used to link a docking strand to binding partner chosen by an end user. In some embodiments, the affinity molecule is a secondary antibody. Thus, in some embodiments, a kit comprises at least one docking strand, at least one affinity molecule such as a secondary antibody, and at least one imager strand.
  • In some embodiments, a kit comprises (a) at least one docking strand linked to a binding partner such as a protein (e.g., a protein that binds to a target) and (b) at least one (e.g., at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, at least 10, at least 100) labeled imager strand that is capable of transiently binding (e.g., transiently binds) to a docking strand. A docking strand may comprise, for example, at least two domains or at least three domain, wherein each domain binds to a respective complementary labeled imager strand. The number of labeled imager strands may be, for example, less than, greater than or equal to the number of docking strands. The binding partner may be a protein such as, for example, an antibody (e.g., monoclonal antibody), an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer. In some embodiments, a kit comprises at least two different binding partners (e.g., proteins), each specific for a different target. A binding partner (e.g., protein), in some embodiments, is linked to a docking strand through an intermediate linker such as, for example, a linker that includes biotin and streptavidin (e.g., a biotin-streptavidin-biotin linker). In some embodiments, a docking strand is modified to contain an affinity molecule that can be used to link the docking strand to a binding partner. In some embodiments, the affinity molecule is a secondary antibody. An imager strand, in some embodiments, is labeled with at least one fluorescent label (e.g., at least one fluorophore). In some embodiments, the length of an imager strand is 4 to 30 nucleotides, or longer. For example, the length of an imager strand may be 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 nucleotides. In some embodiments, the length of an imager strand is 8 to 10 nucleotides. In some embodiments, a kit comprises at least two imager strands, each different from one another. In some embodiments, the thermal stability of a docking strand transiently bound to its complementary labeled imager strand is within 0.5 kcal/mol of the thermal stability of other docking strands transiently bound to their respective labeled imager strands.
  • In some embodiments, a kit comprises (a) at least one docking strand linked to a monoclonal antibody or an antigen binding fragment thereof (e.g., a monoclonal antibody or an antigen binding fragment thereof that binds to a target) and (b) at least one (e.g., at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, at least 10, at least 100) labeled imager strand that is capable of transiently binding (e.g., transiently binds) to a docking strand. A docking strand may comprise, for example, at least two domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand. The number of labeled imager strands may be, for example, less than, greater than or equal to the number of docking strands. In some embodiments, a kit comprises at least two different monoclonal antibodies or antigen binding fragments thereof, each specific for a different target. A monoclonal antibody or an antigen binding fragment thereof, in some embodiments, is linked to a docking strand through an intermediate linker that includes biotin and streptavidin (e.g., a biotin-streptavidin-biotin linker). An imager strand, in some embodiments, is labeled with at least one fluorescent label (e.g., at least one fluorophore). In some embodiments, the length of an imager strand is 4 to 30 nucleotides, or longer. For example, the length of an imager strand may be 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 nucleotides. In some embodiments, the length of an imager strand is 8 to 10 nucleotides. In some embodiments, a kit comprises at least two imager strands, each different from one another. In some embodiments, the thermal stability of a docking strand transiently bound to a complementary labeled imager strand is within 0.5 kcal/mol of the thermal stability of other docking strands transiently bound to their respective labeled imager strands.
  • Applications
  • The BP-NA conjugates (e.g., protein-nucleic acid conjugates or antibody-nucleic acid conjugates) of the present disclosure can be used, inter alia, in any assay in which existing target detection technologies are used.
  • Typically assays include detection assays including diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, patient monitoring assays, screening assays, biowarfare assays, forensic analysis assays, prenatal genomic diagnostic assays and the like. The assay may be an in vitro assay or an in vivo assay. The present disclosure provides the advantage that many different targets can be analyzed at one time from a single sample using the methods of the present disclosure, even where such targets are spatially not resolvable (and thus spatially indistinct) using prior art imaging methods. This allows, for example, for several diagnostic tests to be performed on one sample.
  • The BP-NA conjugates can also be used to simply observe an area or region.
  • The methods of the present disclosure may be applied to the analysis of samples obtained or derived from a patient so as to determine whether a diseased cell type is present in the sample and/or to stage the disease. For example, a blood sample can be assayed according to any of the methods described herein to determine the presence and/or quantity of markers of a cancerous cell type in the sample, thereby diagnosing or staging the cancer.
  • Alternatively, the methods described herein can be used to diagnose pathogen infections, for example infections by intracellular bacteria and viruses, by determining the presence and/or quantity of markers of bacterium or virus, respectively, in the sample. Thus, the targets detected using the methods, compositions and kits of the present disclosure may be either patient markers (such as a cancer marker) or markers of infection with a foreign agent, such as bacterial or viral markers.
  • The quantitative imaging methods of the present disclosure may be used, for example, to quantify targets (e.g., target biomolecules) whose abundance is indicative of a biological state or disease condition (e.g., blood markers that are upregulated or downregulated as a result of a disease state).
  • Further, the methods, compositions and kits of the present disclosure may be used to provide prognostic information that assists in determining a course of treatment for a patient. For example, the amount of a particular marker for a tumor can be accurately quantified from even a small sample from a patient. For certain diseases like breast cancer, overexpression of certain proteins, such as Her2-neu, indicate a more aggressive course of treatment will be needed.
  • The methods of the present disclosure may also be used for determining the effect of a perturbation, including chemical compounds, mutations, temperature changes, growth hormones, growth factors, disease, or a change in culture conditions, on various targes, thereby identifying targets whose presence, absence or levels are indicative of a particular biological states. In some embodiments, the present disclosure is used to elucidate and discover components and pathways of disease states. For example, the comparison of quantities of targets present in a disease tissue with “normal” tissue allows the elucidation of important targets involved in the disease, thereby identifying targets for the discovery/screening of new drug candidates that can be used to treat disease.
  • The sample being analyzed may be a biological sample, such as blood, sputum, lymph, mucous, stool, urine and the like. The sample may be an environmental sample such as a water sample, an air sample, a food sample and the like. The assay may be carried out with one or more components of the binding reaction immobilized. Thus, the targets or the BP-NA conjugates may be immobilized. The assay may be carried out with one or more components of the binding reaction non-immobilized. The assays may involve detection of a number of targets in a sample, essentially at the same time, in view of the multiplexing potential offered by the BP-NA conjugates and fluorescently-labeled imager strands of the present disclosure. As an example, an assay may be used to detect a particular cell type (e.g., based on a specific cell surface receptor) and a particular genetic mutation in that particular cell type. In this way, an end user may be able to determine how many cells of a particular type carry the mutation of interest, as an example.
  • Devices
  • Also provided herein are fluidic chamber devices for liquid handling, as shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B. In some embodiments, the device is a polymer-based (e.g., polydimethylsiloxane (PDMS)) device comprising first and second channels, each connected at one end to a sample chamber. This configuration permits one or more fluid(s) to be sequentially administered to the sample at a controlled rate. For example, a syringe may be used to administer a first fluid to the sample through a first channel of the device. The syringe may then be used to administer a second fluid, which passes through the first channel of the device into the sample chamber, thereby forcing the first fluid out of the sample chamber, passing through a second channel and into, for example, a reservoir connected to the second channel (FIG. 23A). In some embodiments, the device is positioned on a glass slide to permit viewing from a microscope objective positioned below the device.
  • Super Resolution Imaging
  • Super-resolution imaging with increased spatial resolution (referred to herein as “ultra-resolution” imaging) may be achieved, in some embodiments, by increasing the number of photons per localization event using one of two strategies, depicted in FIG. 11A. In the first strategy, the maximum number of photons from single, replenishable fluorophores is extracted. High laser excitation power, in combination with fluorophore stabilization buffers (16,17) may be used to “bleach” transiently bound fluorophores at docking sites (or sites of docking strands), thus extracting the maximal number of photons per binding event and dye (FIG. 11A). The repetitive binding of imager strands permits “photobleaching” of every bound strand, thus making maximal use of emitted photons and resulting in a significant increase in localization accuracy over traditional imaging techniques. In the second strategy, bright metafluorophores are used. A fluorescent DNA nanostructure, or “metafluorophore,” may be constructed by decorating a compact DNA nanostructure with many fluorophores (FIG. 11B3). The sum of the individual dye emissions from a metafluorophore are interpreted as originating from the same point source, and thus, using the metafluorophore in place of a standard fluorophore (e.g., Cy3) further improves the localization precision. A more advanced version of the metafluorophore with active background suppression is depicted in FIG. 11B4. Here, the clam-shell-like structure acts as a conditional fluorophore that only fluoresces when it is bound to the docking strand.
  • The present disclosure also provides algorithms used for spot detection, fitting and drift correction, as described below.
  • Software Algorithm for Drift Correction
  • Some embodiments are directed to methods and apparatus for correcting drift in images recorded in a time sequence. A non-limiting application of the techniques for performing drift correction, discussed in further detail below, is to correct for drift in molecular scale DNA-based imaging described herein involving transiently binding between docking strands and imaging strands. However, it should be appreciated that the techniques described herein may alternatively be used to correct for drift in other imaging applications where one or more transient imaging events are recorded during a time sequence of images, and embodiments related to drift correction are not limited to molecular scale DNA-based imaging.
  • In some embodiments, a DNA nanostructure can be used as a drift marker. Any suitable DNA nanostructure (see, e.g., (Rothemund US-2007/0117109 A1), single-stranded tiles (Yin et al., “Programming DNA Tube Circumferences,” Science (2008): 321: 824-826), DNA hairpins (Yin et al. US-2009/0011956 A1; Yin et al., “Programming biomolecular self-assembly pathways,” Nature (2008) 451:318-323) may be used, and may be made using, e.g., DNA origami techniques. Drift correction using DNA nanostructure-based drift markers in combination with advanced analysis and post-processing techniques has the advantage of high precision correction, compatibility with long time imaging and simplicity of implementation. Conventional nucleic acid-based imaging techniques incorporating drift markers based on fluorescent beads suffer from the limited length of imaging time before the beads are bleached; whereas bright field imaging requires specialized equipment, e.g. dual-field camera view.
  • Drift correction techniques in accordance with some embodiments described herein may include a plurality of stages, where each of the stages uses a different technique to perform drift correction. In some embodiments, the output from one stage is provided as input to a subsequent stage for additional drift correction processing. In a first stage, a coarse drift correction is performed by comparing localizations from neighboring frames. In a second stage, a single drift marker is selected and its time trace is used as a different coarse correction. In a third stage, a group of drift markers is selected, either automatically or with user input, and their time traces are then combined to compute a more precise drift correction. In a fourth stage, localizations are pooled from template-based drift markers displaying spots in a defined and spatially resolvable geometry (e.g., 4×3 grid points). In a fifth stage, a smoothing of the drift correction is performed to further reduce noise and enabling the resolution of the final image to approach molecular-scale resolution.
  • Any number and/or combination of these five stages may be performed in accordance with the techniques described herein. For example, in some embodiments, an amount of drift in the time sequence of images may be characterized using a quality measure, and based, at least in part, on the quality measure, one or more of the stages may be eliminated. In other embodiments, all five stages may be performed, as embodiments are not limited in this respect. In yet other embodiments, additional drift correction stages used in combination with at least one of the stages described herein may also be used.
  • In the following description of techniques for performing drift correction, the term FWHM (Full Width at Half Maximum) is used as the mathematical surrogate for “resolution.” The approximation that FWHM˜=sigma*2.35 for a Gaussian distribution, where sigma is the standard deviation, is also used. The techniques described herein for performing drift correction relate to processing a time sequence of images. The recorded image stack is referred to herein as a “movie” and each of the individual images as a “frame.” Each frame of the movie is operated on with a spot finding algorithm, and then a local Gaussian fitting algorithm may be used for each identified spot; the spot and its fitted center position localization are interchangeably referred to herein as a “localization.” The frames of the movie capture one or more transient events that are present in some frames but not others.
  • In the illustrative application of the techniques where the frames of the movie related to nucleic acid-based imaging as discussed above, the hybridization of an imager strand to a docking strand until their disassociation is referred to herein as a binding “event”; thus an event could have, and typically will consist of, several localizations in a series of neighboring frames. Although binding events are discussed in further detail below as one illustrative transient event that may be analyzed using the techniques described herein for performing drift correction, it should be appreciated that other types of transient events imaged in a time sequence may alternatively be used. Within a certain area of the field of view, the collection of all localizations throughout the entire movie is collectively referred to as the “time trace,” which reflects the movement of an observed structure, and is used for drift correction in several different ways, as described in more detail below.
  • Overview of Drift Correction Techniques
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a schematic overview of five stages of a drift correction procedure that may be performed in accordance with the techniques described herein. The stages are illustrated as being performed consecutively in an order from an unprocessed image to a final image that has been processed using the techniques of each of the five stages. Each of these stages will be discussed in more detail below. Briefly, FIG. 12A(i) illustrates schematics showing the principle of each stage of drift correction. In each image, black markers and lines indicate source data, and red values and curves indicate the calculated drift correction. FIG. 12A(ii) shows a schematic drawing of the major type of drift markers (e.g., DNA drift markers) used in each stage. FIG. 12B(i) illustrates an example structure showing the imaging quality after each stage or correction, and FIG. 12B(ii) shows a zoomed image of the corresponding green rectangle in FIG. 12B(i) at each stage. The scale bars shown in FIGS. 12B(i) and 12B(ii) correspond to 50 nm. FIG. 12C(i) illustrates an example drift trace after each stage of correction, and FIG. 12C(ii) shows a zoomed image of the corresponding green rectangle in FIG. 12C(i) at each stage. The scale bars in FIG. 12C(i) correspond to x: 500 nm, t: 500 s, and the scale bars in FIG. 12C(ii) correspond to x: 10 nm, t: 10 s. FIG. 18 illustrates an alternate representation of stages in a drift correction process in accordance with some embodiments.
  • In some embodiments, an image resolution output from the first stage may be on the order of 1 μm.
  • In some embodiments, an image resolution output from the second stage may be on the order of 200 nm.
  • In some embodiments, an image resolution output from the third stage may be on the order of 20 nm.
  • In some embodiments, an image resolution output from the fourth stage may be on the order of 5 nm.
  • In some embodiments, an image resolution output from the fourth stage may be on the order of less than 5 nm.
  • Imaging Quality and Limit of Achievable Resolution
  • The finest possible quality of a drift-corrected image is limited by the quality of individual localizations, which is determined by the various conditions used during an imaging session (e.g., a microscopy imaging session). To quantitatively assess and effectively compare between the quality of different imaging conditions, a quantity called Distance between Neighboring Frame Localizations (DNFL) is defined as the mean separation between localizations detected from consecutive image frames, which originated from the same transient event (e.g., a binding event).
  • The procedure for calculating the DNFL for an image is outlined as follows. For each pair of NF (Neighboring Frames, e.g. frame #1 and #2), all localizations from both frames are pooled and the distance between every pair of localizations from different frames (e.g. one localization from frame #1 versus another from frame #2) is calculated, assuming no drift between the frames. The resulting distances from all NF pairs are pooled to provide a bimodal distribution. The first mode of the bimodal distribution is broad, high in amplitude, and spans the width of the field of view. The second mode of the bimodal distribution is sharp, low in amplitude, and close to zero, and corresponds to localizations from the same binding event. The maximum of the second mode may be determined and a local Gaussian fitting algorithm may be performed around the maximum to determine the center of the peak. This value may be considered the DNFL of a certain image. Without combining localizations from consecutive frames, the DNFL value sets the limit of the finest possible resolution that can be achieved from a certain image, with a mathematical relation between the best achievable resolution and DNFL being: best achievable resolution=DNFL/sqrt(2)*2.35.
  • Drift Correction Quality and Supported Resolution
  • The quality of a final drift-corrected image may assessed by characterizing the Point Spread Function (PSF) of a single binding site. A statistical overlay of images of more than thousands of single docking sites may be produced as the reference for the PSF distribution. A 2-D Gaussian fitting may be performed on the statistical overlay to determine the standard deviation (sigma) of the PSF, which in turn determines the best supported resolution of the produced image, given by a similar formula as above: image supported resolution=sigma*2.35. The isolation and overlay of single isolated docking sites may be performed with the help of an auxiliary DNA nanostructure. This structure has a known pattern of well-separated docking sites (e.g., a lattice grid pattern), and may be the same structure used for the template-based drift correction stage, discussed in more detail below. Because of variation of laser intensity, unevenness of optical surface deposition and other systematic factors, as well as the possible stochastic nature of the imaging process, the above determined image quality of the whole image may not reflect the true imaging quality for each single sample object in the imaging field. Typically, structures closer to the center of the imaging field and better fixed to the optical surface, are better illuminated, and show better resolution than those that are on the periphery and are less well fixed. The image quality and resolution of a single molecule may be determined in a procedure similar to the one above. A projection of a single molecule of an auxiliary DNA nanostructure (same as above) may be taken along a direction that best separates the docking sites (in the case of lattice grid structures, this will be along any of the lattice directions), and a multi-Gaussian fit may be performed on the projected 1-D distribution. The standard deviation of the fitted Gaussian peaks may then be determined and similarly used to infer the resolution of a single-molecule image.
  • Drift Assessment and Choice of Drift Correction Stages
  • In some embodiments, the five stages incorporating techniques for performing drift correction, discussed in further detail below, operate in series to reduce the drift of an unprocessed image, where each consecutive stage reduces the drift further, and low enough for the successful operation of the next stage. Depending on the amount of drift in the captured images, less than all five stages may be used. For example, if it is determined that there is low drift in the original image, the localizations in each frame may be separable, and processing may begin from the second stage without requiring processing by first stage. If it is determined that there is even lower drift in the original image, processing may be begin from the third stage without significant loss of final image quality. Due to the complex origin of drift, which may involve, among other things, thermal fluctuation and expansion, microscope stage movement due to electric motor activation, vibration from the building and optical table complex, controlling drift in the original image tends to be difficult, and including the first two stages is often useful in producing a final image with desired resolution. For example, including all five stages described herein provides a robust strategy for drift correction that is applicable to images taken in most biology labs, without the requirement of specialized hardware or building requirements.
  • In some embodiments, the amount of drift and overall image quality of the original unprocessed image may be determined using any suitable technique, and the determined image quality may be used to select a choice of drift correction stages to use in performing drift correction. For example, a technique for determining image quality may compare different temporal segments of the same image. In this illustrative technique, the original image may be divided into two halves by separately pooling localizations from the first half and the second half of the movie, respectively. The cross-correlation between the two images may be calculated and a best offset may be estimated to provide an indication of the overall drift. The indication of overall drift may be compared to one or more threshold values to determine whether one or more of the drift correction stages may be skipped in performing drift correction in accordance with the techniques described herein.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a process for performing drift correction in accordance with some embodiments. In act 210, drift correction is performed by considering differences in localizations across neighboring frames of a movie. The process then proceeds to act 220, where a single drift marker is selected, a time trace describing the movement of the drift marker over time during the movie is determined, and the time trace for the single drift marker is used to perform drift correction of the image. The process then proceeds to act 230, where time traces are determined for each of a plurality of drift markers identified in the image. As discussed in more detail below, differences between the time traces may be used to provide a further drift correction in the final image. The process then proceeds to act 240, where drift correction using geometrically-constrained templates is performed. The process then proceeds to act 250, where the image is further drift corrected by smoothing the drift trace using suitable smoothing techniques, as discussed in more detail below. Each of the five stages for performing drift correction in accordance with the techniques described herein are described in further detail below. As should be appreciated from the foregoing discussion, not all embodiments require the use of all five stages for drift correction processing. For example, in some embodiments, only acts 230 and 240 may be performed. In other embodiments, acts 230, 240, and 250 may be performed. In yet other embodiments, acts 220, 230, 240 and 250 may be performed without including act 210.
  • First Stage Drift Correction
  • A first stage of drift correction (e.g., act 210 of FIG. 13) operates by comparing localizations from neighboring frames in a movie. A procedure similar to the DNFL calculation described above (or any other suitable technique) may be used to identify pairs of localizations originating from the same transient event (e.g., a single binding event). All pairs of localizations originating from the same transient event may be pooled to create a bimodal distribution. After creating a bimodal distribution of the localizations from neighboring images, a cutoff value may be automatically determined to separate those pairs of localizations from the same event (close localizations), from those that are different. Next, all pairs of close localizations for the same neighboring frame (NF) pair are pooled, and the offset between each pair is computed. The vector average of all offsets are output as the drift correction. For NF pairs with no qualifying close localizations being identified, a zero drift may be output. The first stage of drift correction typically corrects for global drift with high amplitude (farther than 1 μm in offset), which effectively removes interference between different drift markers and allows for incorporation of the next stage. As discussed above, in some embodiments where different drift markers may already be separable from each other, the first stage of processing may be omitted. A determination of whether the first stage of processing may be omitted may be made using an image quality factor analysis, as discussed above, or using any other suitable technique (e.g., manual inspection).
  • Second Stage Drift Correction
  • A second stage of drift correction (e.g., act 220 of FIG. 13) operates on a single drift marker or sample object. The single drift marker for use in this stage of drift correction processing may be selected in any suitable way. For example, in some embodiments, the single drift marker may be randomly selected from the set of all identified drift markers. In other embodiments, a particular drift marker associated with desirable qualities (e.g., an average amount of drift over the entire movie) may be selected as the single drift marker to use for this stage. After selecting the single drift marker, its time trace is automatically determined, smoothed, and output as the drift correction. Alternatively, a drift trace may be manually drawn in cases where separation between drift markers is hard to identify automatically.
  • The second stage of drift correction further reduces global drift in the movie (typically <200 nm), and allows automatic batch identification of drift markers in the following stages.
  • Third Stage of Drift Correction
  • A third stage of drift correction (e.g., stage 230 of FIG. 2) combines the time traces of a plurality of drift markers to compute drift correction with a finer resolution than the second stage of drift correction. Each drift marker has a large number of docking sites to allow a high temporal coverage; and a large number of these drift markers are deposited onto the imaging surface together with the samples. The number of binding sites on each drift marker and the concentration of drift markers on the surface may be selected appropriately to ensure a high quality drift correction, as the improvement in drift correction in performing this stage is primarily determined by the spread of each drift marker in the image and the effective number of drift markers per frame.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a process for performing drift correction corresponding to stage 230 of FIG. 2. In act 310, locations of a plurality of drift markers are identified. Identifying locations of the plurality of drift markers may include pooling localizations from all frames of the movie to calculate a two-dimensional (2D) histogram. Then, the locations of drift markers may be identified by appropriately tuning the histogram binning size and a combination of other selection criteria. For example, the binning size of the histogram may be tuned to reflect the feature size of the drift marker, e.g., a fourth or third of their overall size. The range of selection criteria includes, but it is not limited to, a lower-bound threshold of the histogram value and filtering based on geometrical properties (e.g., area, dimensions). Adequate separation between nearby drift markers is often necessary to exclude false localizations, which, for example, arise from spurious localizations of double-binding events. After the identification of a pool (e.g., thousands) of drift markers, the process to act 320, where the time trace for each drift marker is determined and the relative time trace determined as the offset of each time trace from the center of the combined trace is computed. Because the images capture transient events (e.g., nucleic acid-binding events), not all time traces for a drift marker may cover all time points in the movie. In such cases, the time traces may be linearly interpolated at the “missing points” to achieve a finer and smoother result.
  • After determining the time trace for each of the plurality of drift markers, the process proceeds to act 330, where the drift correction for the image is determined based on the time traces determined for each drift marker. Any suitable combination of the time traces may be used to determine the drift correction, and embodiments are not limited in this respect. In some embodiments, a weighted average of the time traces is used to determine the drift correction output from this stage. For example, a weighted average of the pool of relative time traces may be computed as the result of drift correction, where the correction is weighted by the quality of drift marker traces. The quality of drift marker traces may be determined in any suitable way including, but not limited to, determining the quality by assessing drift marker quality or individual localization quality. In some embodiments, the quality of each drift marker trace is computed by taking the standard deviation (sigma) of the trace over time. The inverse of this measure (e.g., 1/sigma) for each trace may be used as the weight factor. Alternatively, the quality of each individual localization within the time traces may be computed as the localization uncertainty given by the formula in Thomson, 2002. The inverse of the standard deviation of this calculation may be used as the weight factor for each time trace. After determining the drift correction, the process proceeds to act 340 where the image is corrected using the determined drift correction.
  • This stage of drift correction may be performed any number of times. In some embodiments, this stage of drift correction is iteratively performed with different parameters used for each iteration. As drift correction proceeds, the remaining drift amplitude is decreased further and further, the spatial spread-out of drift markers becomes smaller and smaller, and selection of drift markers may be performed more and more stringently. Consequently, in initial iterations, the threshold histogram count may be set to a lower value, and this value may be adjusted during later iterations to higher values. Additionally, in some embodiments, the valid area and dimensions of drift markers may be set to larger values in initial iterations, and later adjusted to smaller values during subsequent iterations. Yet further, in some embodiments, separation between drift markers may be shifted from larger values to smaller values in later iterations. In some embodiments, an interactive quality check (either manually or automatically performed) may be determined between iterations to facilitate a determination of further operations.
  • Depending on the imaging quality, this stage of drift correction typically brings the obtained image resolution to within a factor of two from the best allowed resolution (i.e. if the precision of each individual localization supports resolution of ˜5 nm, then this stage usually yields ˜10 nm resolution). Typically, with good imaging conditions, a resolution <10 nm may be obtained following processing with this stage.
  • Fourth Stage of Drift Correction
  • A fourth stage of drift correction (e.g., act 240 in FIG. 13) uses drift marker “templates,” and thus this stage is termed “templated drift correction.” One or more drift marker templates (e.g., DNA nanostructures with docking sites in a known and well-separated geometric arrangement) are deposited onto the imaging surface together with “ordinary” drift markers, discussed above in connection with stage three. The separation between these docking sites is preferably chosen not to be not smaller than twice the resulting resolution from the previous stage (e.g., stage three), allowing easy separation between localizations from different docking sites. The number of docking sites on these templates as well as the concentration of the docking sites on the surface, is preferably chosen to achieve effective template correction, similar that described for the third stage.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a process for performing drift correction corresponding to stage 240 of FIG. 2. In act 410, a plurality of drift correction templates are identified from a 2-D histogram of localizations pooled across all frames of the movie. To distinguish the drift templates from the drift markers used in the third stage, an extra upper-bound threshold in histogram count may be incorporated in addition to the range of selection criteria as mentioned above. After the drift templates have been identified, the process proceeds to act 420, where the time trace of each drift template is determined. Because the docking sites are designed to be well separated in the templates, several non-overlapping time traces from individual docking sites may be isolated from each time trace of a full drift template. This identification and separation step may be carried out in a similar manner as the identification of drift markers from the entire image. For example, a combination of local histogram thresholding and filtering on standard deviation of the individual time traces for each drift template may be used.
  • After the time trace for each drift template has been determined, the process proceeds to act 430, where the combination of time traces is used to determine a drift correction for this stage. In some embodiments, this is accomplished by computing relative time traces for each time trace, and the relative time traces are used, at least in part, to determine the drift correction. The relative time traces may be used in any suitable way to determine the drift correction. For example, in some embodiments, a weighted average of all the time traces of individual docking sites may be averaged to produce the final drift correction. The weight factors may be determined in any suitable way. For example, the weight factors may be based on the quality of each individual site, or the quality of each individual localization in the time trace. After determining the drift correction, the process proceeds to act 440 where the image is corrected using the determined drift correction.
  • Depending on the imaging quality, this stage of drift correction may result in a resolution of the final image being close to the best possible resolution. That is, if the precision of each individual localization supports a resolution of ˜5 nm, performing template drift correction in accordance with the techniques described herein may achieve a resolution close to ˜6 nm. In some embodiments, for the <10 nm resolution achieved after the third stage, a DNA nanostructure with 12 docking sites arranged in a 4×3 grid of lattice spacing 20 nm may be used as the drift correction template. Template-based drift correction using the techniques described in this section may enable the achievement of 6-7 nm resolution after this stage.
  • Fifth Stage Drift Correction
  • A fifth stage of drift correction (e.g., act 250 in FIG. 13) performs smoothing of the drift correction trace, and the smoothed drift correction trace may be used to perform drift correction. For example, after determining a drift correction for one or more of the second, third and fourth stages discussed above, the resultant drift correction may be smoothed using any suitable technique to produce the final drift correction result. Smoothing effectively increases the number of drift markers or drift templates in each frame, by taking the localizations in neighboring frames into account. Smoothing may be performed in any suitable manner using any suitable window period. For example, in some embodiments, smoothing is performed with a robust local regression method that operates over a window period determined by the characteristic drift time scale. A non-limiting example of a smoothing window period may be 10-30 s.
  • Extension to 3D Imaging
  • All stages described above can be directly applied to correct a 3D image (e.g., super-resolution image) as well. In 3D super-resolution imaging, for example, an astigmatism lens may be introduced in the imaging path and the ellipticity of the resulting Gaussian emission profile may be used to determine a z-position of a molecule. The above-described origami drift marker structures (e.g., geometric-constrained templates) may be used in a one-to-one fashion to perform the stages of drift correction. For the template-based drift correction stage, a DNA origami structure with a defined 3D shape (e.g., a tetrahedron) may be used.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates 3D tetrahedrons used as templates for 3D drift correction. The four corners are labeled with docking sites. FIG. 16A shows that the four corners are clearly resolved. FIG. 16B illustrates the X-Z projection of the structures with a height of ˜85 nm.
  • Extension to Multicolor Imaging
  • The above-described techniques for correcting drift in a plurality of time sequence images is described with respect to imaging a transient event identified using a single color in the images. However, it should be appreciated that these techniques may be extended to multicolor imaging in which different transient events (e.g., binding of different nucleic acid drift markers with docking sites) are labeled with different colors that can be identified in the same image. When multicolor imaging is used, the geometric templates discussed above for template-based drift correction may include information describing a particular known geometry for the different transient events that correspond to the different colors. For example, rather than just a single binding event occurring at a single docking site in a 3×4 grid, multiple binding events color-coded using different colors in the same geometric template may be represented, and the drift correction may be performed using information from the multiple binding events. Other processes for extending the techniques described herein to multicolor imaging are also contemplated, and embodiments are not limited in this respect.
  • Exemplary Computer System
  • An illustrative implementation of a computer system 600 that may be used in connection with any of the embodiments of the present disclosure described herein is shown in FIG. 17. The computer system 600 may include one or more processors 610 and one or more computer-readable non-transitory storage media (e.g., memory 620 and one or more non-volatile storage media 630). The processor 610 may control writing data to and reading data from the memory 620 and the non-volatile storage device 630 in any suitable manner, as the aspects of the present disclosure described herein are not limited in this respect. To perform any of the functionality described herein, the processor 610 may execute one or more instructions stored in one or more computer-readable storage media (e.g., the memory 620), which may serve as non-transitory computer-readable storage media storing instructions for execution by the processor 610.
  • The above-described embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented in any of numerous ways. For example, the embodiments may be implemented using hardware, software or a combination thereof. When implemented in software, the software code can be executed on any suitable processor or collection of processors, whether provided in a single computer or distributed among multiple computers. It should be appreciated that any component or collection of components that perform the functions described above can be generically considered as one or more controllers that control the above-discussed functions. The one or more controllers can be implemented in numerous ways, such as with dedicated hardware, or with general purpose hardware (e.g., one or more processors) that is programmed using microcode or software to perform the functions recited above.
  • In this respect, it should be appreciated that one implementation of the embodiments of the present disclosure comprises at least one non-transitory computer-readable storage medium (e.g., a computer memory, a floppy disk, a compact disk, a tape, etc.) encoded with a computer program (i.e., a plurality of instructions), which, when executed on a processor, performs the above-discussed functions of the embodiments of the present disclosure. The computer-readable storage medium can be transportable such that the program stored thereon can be loaded onto any computer resource to implement the aspects of the present disclosure discussed herein. In addition, it should be appreciated that the reference to a computer program which, when executed, performs the above-discussed functions, is not limited to an application program running on a host computer. Rather, the term computer program is used herein in a generic sense to reference any type of computer code (e.g., software or microcode) that can be employed to program a processor to implement the above-discussed aspects of the present disclosure.
  • Equivalents
  • While several inventive embodiments have been described and illustrated herein, those of ordinary skill in the art will readily envision a variety of other means and/or structures for performing the function and/or obtaining the results and/or one or more of the advantages described herein, and each of such variations and/or modifications is deemed to be within the scope of the inventive embodiments described herein. More generally, those skilled in the art will readily appreciate that all parameters, dimensions, materials, and configurations described herein are meant to be exemplary and that the actual parameters, dimensions, materials, and/or configurations will depend upon the specific application or applications for which the inventive teachings is/are used. Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, many equivalents to the specific inventive embodiments described herein. It is, therefore, to be understood that the foregoing embodiments are presented by way of example only and that, within the scope of the appended claims and equivalents thereto, inventive embodiments may be practiced otherwise than as specifically described and claimed. Inventive embodiments of the present disclosure are directed to each individual feature, system, article, material, kit, and/or method described herein. In addition, any combination of two or more such features, systems, articles, materials, kits, and/or methods, if such features, systems, articles, materials, kits, and/or methods are not mutually inconsistent, is included within the inventive scope of the present disclosure.
  • All definitions, as defined and used herein, should be understood to control over dictionary definitions, definitions in documents incorporated by reference, and/or ordinary meanings of the defined terms.
  • All references, patents and patent applications disclosed herein are incorporated by reference with respect to the subject matter for which each is cited, which in some cases may encompass the entirety of the document.
  • The indefinite articles “a” and “an,” as used herein in the specification and in the claims, unless clearly indicated to the contrary, should be understood to mean “at least one.”
  • The phrase “and/or,” as used herein in the specification and in the claims, should be understood to mean “either or both” of the elements so conjoined, i.e., elements that are conjunctively present in some cases and disjunctively present in other cases. Multiple elements listed with “and/or” should be construed in the same fashion, i.e., “one or more” of the elements so conjoined. Other elements may optionally be present other than the elements specifically identified by the “and/or” clause, whether related or unrelated to those elements specifically identified. Thus, as a non-limiting example, a reference to “A and/or B”, when used in conjunction with open-ended language such as “comprising” can refer, in one embodiment, to A only (optionally including elements other than B); in another embodiment, to B only (optionally including elements other than A); in yet another embodiment, to both A and B (optionally including other elements); etc.
  • As used herein in the specification and in the claims, “or” should be understood to have the same meaning as “and/or” as defined above. For example, when separating items in a list, “or” or “and/or” shall be interpreted as being inclusive, i.e., the inclusion of at least one, but also including more than one, of a number or list of elements, and, optionally, additional unlisted items. Only terms clearly indicated to the contrary, such as “only one of” or “exactly one of,” or, when used in the claims, “consisting of,” will refer to the inclusion of exactly one element of a number or list of elements. In general, the term “or” as used herein shall only be interpreted as indicating exclusive alternatives (i.e. “one or the other but not both”) when preceded by terms of exclusivity, such as “either,” “one of,” “only one of,” or “exactly one of.” “Consisting essentially of,” when used in the claims, shall have its ordinary meaning as used in the field of patent law.
  • As used herein in the specification and in the claims, the phrase “at least one,” in reference to a list of one or more elements, should be understood to mean at least one element selected from any one or more of the elements in the list of elements, but not necessarily including at least one of each and every element specifically listed within the list of elements and not excluding any combinations of elements in the list of elements. This definition also allows that elements may optionally be present other than the elements specifically identified within the list of elements to which the phrase “at least one” refers, whether related or unrelated to those elements specifically identified. Thus, as a non-limiting example, “at least one of A and B” (or, equivalently, “at least one of A or B,” or, equivalently “at least one of A and/or B”) can refer, in one embodiment, to at least one, optionally including more than one, A, with no B present (and optionally including elements other than B); in another embodiment, to at least one, optionally including more than one, B, with no A present (and optionally including elements other than A); in yet another embodiment, to at least one, optionally including more than one, A, and at least one, optionally including more than one, B (and optionally including other elements); etc.
  • It should also be understood that, unless clearly indicated to the contrary, in any methods claimed herein that include more than one step or act, the order of the steps or acts of the method is not necessarily limited to the order in which the steps or acts of the method are recited.
  • In the claims, as well as in the specification above, all transitional phrases such as “comprising,” “including,” “carrying,” “having,” “containing,” “involving,” “holding,” “composed of,” and the like are to be understood to be open-ended, i.e., to mean including but not limited to. Only the transitional phrases “consisting of” and “consisting essentially of” shall be closed or semi-closed transitional phrases, respectively, as set forth in the United States Patent Office Manual of Patent Examining Procedures, Section 2111.03.
  • EXAMPLES Example 1 Cellular Imaging
  • Multiplexed super-resolution imaging of intra-cellular components in fixed cells was achieved by linking docking strands to antibodies (FIG. 2). These antibody-DNA conjugates were formed by first reacting biotinylated docking strands with streptavidin, and then incubating with a biotinylated antibody against the protein of interest. Fixed HeLa cells were then immunostained using a preassembled antibody-DNA conjugate against beta-tubulin. Prior to imaging, ATTO655-labeled imager strands were introduced to the sample in hybridization buffer (1×PBS supplemented with 500 mM NaCl), and single-molecule imaging was carried out using oblique illumination (9). The resulting super-resolution images show a clear increase in spatial resolution in contrast to the diffraction-limited representation (FIGS. 3a-3c ). A cross-sectional profile taken at position <i> in FIG. 3B yields a distance of ≈79 nm between two adjacent microtubules with an apparent width of ≈47 and ≈44 nm for each of the microtubules, which is in agreement with earlier reports for immunostained microtubules (13). The antibody-DNA conjugation approach of the present disclosure yields a high labeling density, and little to no non-specific binding of imager strands to non-labeled cellular components occurs.
  • To demonstrate the multicolor extension of the labeling scheme of the present disclosure, where orthogonal imager strand sequences are coupled to spectrally distinct dyes, the microtubule network in a fixed HeLa cell was labeled with a preassembled antibody-DNA conjugate carrying a docking sequence for Cy3b-labeled strands, and mitochondria were stained using a second antibody linked to an orthogonal sequence for ATTO655 imager sequences. While both Cy3b- and ATTO655-labeled imager strands were present in solution at the same time, imaging was carried out sequentially in the Cy3b and ATTO655 channels and the resulting super-resolution images showed a clear increase in spatial resolution as compared to the diffraction-limited representation (FIGS. 3d-3f ). As in the single-color case, little-to-no non-specific binding of the imager strands to non-labeled components in the cellular environment was observed. In addition, similar to the in vitro case, no crosstalk between the two colors was observed, indicating a sequence-specific interaction of the imager strands.
  • Example 2 Multiplexing
  • Assuming fixed localization accuracy, one can trivially obtain a direct two-fold increase in imaging resolution. This can be realized by spacing imaging spots with the same docking strand sequence (e.g., docking sites a in FIG. 4) farther apart than the actual current resolution limit, thus clearly identifying these sites as single spots in the super-resolved image. As all obtained localizations can now be assigned to a specific site, the obtainable imaging resolution is no longer the full width at half maximum (FWHM) of the reconstructed spots, but rather the standard deviation (≈2.35-times smaller than the FWHM). This is depicted in FIG. 4B1, wherein a set of seven points with 10 nm spacing was imaged with ≈14 nm resolution, leaving individual points unresolvable. Cross-sectional histogram data showed a broad peak (bottom). In FIGS. 4B2 and 4B3, imaging every other site at a time permitted the localization of individual spots. These localizations were then combined to form the final composite image with increased resolution.
  • FIG. 5A shows a single DNA nanostructure, displaying four distinct sets of DNA sequences, designed to resemble the digits from 0 to 3, respectively. Imaging was performed sequentially using a simple flow chamber setup, first flushing in imager strands complementary to the docking strands of the number 0, and then exchanging the solution for imager strands with a sequence complementary to docking strands of the number 1 and so forth. The resulting images were pseudo-colored to represent the respective imaging rounds. The demonstration using DNA origami structures showed the high imaging efficiency as well as no crosstalk between consecutive imaging runs.
  • To demonstrate ten-“color” super-resolution imaging of DNA structures using Exchange-PAINT, ten unique rectangular DNA origami structures were designed, each displaying a distinct pattern of orthogonal docking strands that resembles a digit between 0 and 9 (see FIG. 5B(ii) for pattern “4”). After surface immobilization of all ten structures, sequential imaging was performed using a custom made fluidic chamber (FIG. 23A) for easy liquid handling. Ten orthogonal imager strands (P1* to P10*), all labeled with Cy3b, were used to perform Exchange-PAINT. The resulting digits from all ten imaging rounds are shown in FIG. 5B(v). Each target is resolved with high spatial resolution. Cross-sectional histograms along the bars of the digits show sub-10 nm FWHM of the distributions (data not shown). Note that high resolution is maintained for all digits, as the same optimized dye (Cy3b) and imaging conditions are used in each cycle.
  • FIG. 5B(iii) shows a combined image of all ten rounds, demonstrating specific interaction of imager strands with respective targets with no observable crosstalk between cycles. Digits 8 and 9 are not present in the selected area. An apparent “green” digit 5 instead of 2 was observed (<i> in FIG. 5B(iii)). This is likely not a falsely imaged digit 5 from crosstalk, but rather a “mirrored” digit 2. A mirrored image likely results from an origami immobilized upside-down, with docking strands trapped underneath, yet still accessible to imager strands.
  • The fluidic setup is designed to minimize sample movement by “decoupling” the fluid reservoir and syringe from the actual flow chamber via flexible tubing. To avoid sample distortion, special care was taken to ensure gentle fluid flow during washing steps. To verify that the sample indeed exhibited little movement and little-to-no distortion, a ten-round Exchange-PAINT experiment was performed. The DNA origami was imaged for digit 4 in the first round and reimaged after ten rounds of buffer exchange. The total sample movement (physical movement of the fluidic chamber with respect to the objective) was less than 2 μm, which could easily be corrected using fiducial markers. Normalized cross-correlation analysis for select structures produced a correlation coefficient 0.92, demonstrating almost no sample distortion (also see the discussion in the cellular imaging section).
  • Finally, using Exchange-PAINT, four different digit patterns were successfully imaged on the same DNA origami structure (FIG. 5B(iv)). Thus Exchange-PAINT is not limited to spatially separate species and can resolve sub-diffraction patterns on the same structure with no observable crosstalk or sample distortion. Aligning images from different Exchange-PAINT rounds is straightforward using DNA origami-based drift markers. Additionally, because imaging is performed using the same dye, no chromatic aberration needs to be corrected between imaging rounds.
  • The applicability of the methods of the present disclosure in a cellular environment was shown by targeting microtubules and mitochondria in fixed HeLa cells, similar to FIG. 3, but only using a single color fluorophore, or spectrally indistinct imager strands. Imaging was performed sequentially using imager strands labeled with the same dye (two rounds, FIG. 6).
  • Example 3 Quantitative Imaging
  • To demonstrate the feasibility of the quantitative methods of the present disclosure, a DNA origami nanostructure with 13 binding sites in a grid-like arrangement was used (FIG. 7C). The incorporation efficiency for docking sites was not 100%, leading to a distribution of actually incorporated sites (FIGS. 7C and 7D1). Nonetheless, the structures were an ideal test system because the number of available sites could be determined visually by counting the number of spots (“direct”) and comparing it with the corresponding number of sites calculated using the proposed binding kinetic analysis (“kinetics”). FIG. 7D1 shows the binding site distribution for 377 origami structures obtained by direct counting. The binding site distribution for the same structures obtained by binding kinetic analysis is shown in FIG. 7D2. Finally, as a benchmark, the “offset” between direct and kinetic counting was calculated for each structure. The counting “error” or uncertainty for the method was less than 7% (determined by the coefficient of variation of the Gaussian distribution) with an imaging time of ˜25 min.
  • Example 4 Kinetic Barcoding
  • Highly multiplexed super-resolution barcoding was obtained by binding frequency analysis rather than geometrical or spectral encoding. Binding frequencies of BP-NA conjugates, or docking strands, to a molecule of interest is linearly dependent on the number of binding sites on this molecule. Given a certain concentration of fluorescently-labeled imager strands and association rate, binding frequency scales linearly with the number of binding sites, and can thus be used for identification. For example, 124 distinct dynamic “blinking signatures” were created using 3 colors and 4 levels of binding frequency per color (FIG. 8). Compared to geometrical encoding, this approach features much more compact, unstructured probes. Compared to spectral encoding (14) the method of the present disclosure is more cost effective, scalable, and easier to implement. Only 3 fluorescently-labeled imager strands are required in this frequency encoding method, making it very cost-efficient for high-throughput screening experiments. In vitro tests on a DNA origami test structure are shown in FIG. 8C.
  • In addition to using the inter-event lifetime τd or binding frequency to determine the number of available binding sites and to barcode molecules, the fluorescence ON-time or τb and thus the dissociation constant koff can also be used to encode information. koff can be precisely tuned by the base-composition and/or length of the duplex of docking and imager strand. The feasibility of this approach is illustrated in FIG. 9: 1/τd and 1/τb are plotted vs. the length of the docking/imaging duplex. 1/τd, and thus kon, is independent of the duplex stability. However, extending the imaging/docking duplex from 9 to 10 nt by adding a single CG base pair reduces the kinetic OFF-rate by almost one order of magnitude.
  • Finally, a “microbarcode,” a minimal barcode that uses our ability to detect differences in thermodynamic stability of the imager/docking duplex was produced to identify a large number of molecules using a short, economical and unstructured probe. The barcode contains only of a single DNA molecule, roughly 50 nt in length, which is used to tag a molecule of interest using a 21 nt target detection domain t* (FIG. 10A) followed by a ˜30 nt long “barcode” region with a combination of 8, 9, or 10 nt long binding domain for red, green, or blue imager strands. Despite being only 30 nt in length, it can be used to present 33=27 different barcodes with only three spectrally distinct colors and three thermodynamically distinct sequence lengths. FIG. 10 illustrates a8, 9, or 10 nt long docking strands for three colors with a koff of 10, 1 and 0.1 per second, respectively. FIG. 10A shows an example barcode consisting of an 8 nt long binding domain for a red imager strand, two 9 nt long binding domains for the green, and blue imager strand, respectively. This produces characteristic intensity vs. time traces with increased fluorescence ON-times τb for the 9 nt interaction domain compared to the 8 nt interaction domain (FIG. 10B). Stochastic simulations show that it is clearly possible to distinguish between koff values of 10, 1 and 0.1 per second, respectively (FIG. 10C).
  • Example 5 Genetically Encoded Live-Cell Super-Resolution Imaging
  • A significant advantage of fluorescence imaging lies in its potential to visualize biomolecular processes in living cells. There are however challenges in demonstrating live cell super-resolution imaging (ref. 22-22). One such challenge is in the delivery of a sufficient concentration of synthetic imaging probes to living cells in a biocompatible manner while also allowing for proper imaging conditions. Another challenge is the extent of background fluorescence for unbound probes in the context of a live cell environment where macromolecular crowding may be more of a significant factor compared to fixed cell environments, and “live” helicases may influence binding kinetics.
  • This disclosure addresses these and other challenges by utilizing a genetically encoded RNA probe that can specifically bind to a target molecule in a living cell, and only then start to fluoresce and blink to enable super-resolution imaging of the specific target.
  • This conditional “blinking” probe is a small single-stranded RNA (<100 nt) with a target binding domain (TBD) and a conditional blinking domain (CBD). The CBD is under mechanical control of the TBD and is dark when the TBD is not bound to a target T. The binding of TBD with target “T” results in a reconfiguration of the CBD and enables it to blink with an intensity and frequency suitable for the super-resolution imaging of T.
  • The blinking RNA probe is based on the Spinach aptamer system (ref. 19), a fluorescent RNA mimic of GFP (FIG. 19). Spinach can turn on the fluorescence of an initially dark small molecule DFHBI (similar to DMHBI), which is non-toxic and cell-permeable. By tagging Spinach to a target RNA, the expression of the target RNA in bacteria and mammalian cells can be imaged (ref. 19).
  • As the small molecule DFHBI binds and unbinds Spinach, it will alternate between a fluorescence ON- and OFF-state. The resulting blinking behavior is used to perform super-resolution fluorescence microscopy, which is referred to herein as “Spinach-PAINT” (FIG. 20). Unlike most live cell super-resolution imaging techniques, Spinach-PAINT needs no special imaging conditions such as special buffer systems or external photoswitching or activation. More importantly, DFHBI is a small, cell-permeable molecule and has been shown to provide non-toxic imaging for living cells. The necessary “blinking” behavior for super-resolution imaging can be obtained by altering the fluorescence ON- and OFF-times by adjusting the DFHBI concentration in solution and modifying/mutating Spinach to enhance/weaken the binding of DFHBI to it in the same spirit as one would tune the DNA-DNA binding interaction of an imaging strand with its partner. It is possible to characterize and optimize the binding kinetics of DFHBI to surface-immobilized Spinach based on single-molecule measurements (FIG. 20). The binding kinetics are checked for compatibility with super-resolution microscopy based on transient binding.
  • Generate spinach variants with optimized blinking properties for super-resolution imaging: Based on DNA-PAINT, a starting point is to obtain Spinach variants that show ON-times of at least 50 ms, occurring at a rate of ≈2 Hz. It has been found that Spinach exhibits a koff of 0.02 s−1, resulting in a residence time of ≈50 s. This is markedly longer than needed for super-resolution imaging. To identify Spinach variants with a koff between 1-20 s−1, a “doped” library of Spinach variants will be prepared, using a dNTP mixture containing the dNTP that is found in Spinach for each position and the other three dNTPs in a 2:1:1:1 ratio. This approach is typically used to optimize aptamer sequences (SELEX) (ref. 23). The Spinach variants will then be screened for variants with shorter DFHBI residence times. After 5-10 rounds of SELEX, clones will be individually characterized. A first step is to confirm that all the Spinach variants still exhibit Spinach-like fluorescence with comparable quantum yield and extinction coefficient upon binding DFHBI. It is generally easy to weaken rather than to strengthen the binding interaction between an aptamer and a small molecule.
  • A second step involves measuring the binding and unbinding rate constants of these Spinach variants by single-molecule imaging. Spinach variants that exhibit binding durations that provide sufficient photon counts for obtaining precise super-resolution imaging will be chosen.
  • To optimize the blinking frequency, we will titrate with DFHBI, as the rate of RNA-fluorophore complex formation is determined by both kon and the DFHBI concentration, and will identify the concentration that produces a blinking rate of 5-10 Hz. Finally, we will have identified a set of Spinach variants that exhibit optimized blinking needed for super-resolution imaging.
  • As a testing platform, we will optimize the super-resolution ability of Spinach-PAINT by in vitro “imaging” of a DNA-based nanostructure (e.g., a nanostructure made by DNA origami). The DNA origami substrate has the advantage of providing a programmable environment for placing multiple Spinach molecules in a defined distance and geometry. This nanoscopic ruler system will enable us to precisely quantify the obtainable resolution of this super-resolution imaging technique (FIG. 21).
  • RNAs that Exhibit Blinking upon Binding Tubulin for Super-Resolution Imaging of Cytoskeleton Proteins: Spinach-based sensors that are activated by metabolites (ref. 24) and by proteins (ref. 25) have been generated. The approach of this disclosure will be used to generate Spinach-based sensors that are activated by binding tubulin, using tubulin-binding aptamers and the blinking Spinach variants described herein.
  • The allosteric form of Spinach is compromised of the modified Spinach aptamer domain fused to a “control” or “sensing” module consisting of an aptamer that binds a target of interest (ref. 24). Binding of the target results in the allosteric folding of the modified Spinach aptamer into an “active” conformation, enabling DFHBI binding and fluorescence (FIG. 22). Several tubulin-binding DNA aptamers have been described (ref. 26). This disclosure provides for the evolution of control modules for Spinach capable of sensing tubulin using previously established protocols. Briefly, candidate aptamers will be fused to Spinach to obtain tubulin-dependent Spinach fluorescence, and Spinach activation only in the presence of tubulin (which will be Cy5 labeled and polymerized in vitro) will be verified.
  • Using the conditional Spinach probe generated above and based on the super-resolution conditions tested for in vitro imaging, Spinach-PAINT can be used for, for example, super-resolution imaging of microtubules in live mammalian cells.
  • Example 6 Flow Chamber
  • FIG. 23A shows an example of an experimental setup used for in vitro DNA origami experiments, as provided herein. The sample is immobilized on a glass coverslip in a PDMS channel. Imaging and washing buffers are added to a reservoir and pulled through the channel by a syringe. Reservoirs and syringes are connected to the PDMS channel via flexible tubing and are, thus, mechanically decoupled. FIG. 23B shows an experimental setup used for in situ cell imaging. Cells are imaged in a Lab-Tek II chamber. One syringe supplies new buffer solution, the second one removes the previous buffer.
  • An exemplary protocol for Exchange-PAINT imaging using a flow chamber, for example, as depicted in FIGS. 23A and 23B, is as follow:
  • PDMS flow chamber volume: 40 μl
  • Rinse flow chamber with 100 μl 1 M KOH
  • Rinse flow chamber with 100 μl buffer A twice
  • Incubate for 5 min
  • Rinse flow chamber with 100 μl buffer A
  • Rinse flow chamber with 50 μl 1 mg/ml BSA-Biotin in buffer A
  • Incubate for 2 min
  • Rinse flow chamber with 50 μl 1 mg/ml BSA-Biotin in buffer A
  • Incubate for 2 min
  • Rinse flow chamber with 100 μl buffer A twice
  • Rinse flow chamber with 50 μl 0.5 mg/ml Streptavidin in buffer A
  • Incubate for 2 min
  • Rinse flow chamber with 50 μl 0.5 mg/ml Streptavidin in buffer A
  • Incubate for 2 min
  • Rinse flow chamber with 100 μl buffer A twice
  • Rinse flow chamber with 100 μl buffer B twice
  • Incubate for 30 min
  • Rinse flow chamber with 100 μl buffer B twice
  • Rinse flow chamber with 50 μl 1 nM origami in buffer B
  • Incubate for 10 min
  • Rinse flow chamber with 100 μl buffer B twice
  • Attach tubing
  • Operate in buffer B.
  • Additional Materials and Methods
  • Materials. Unmodified DNA oligonucleotides were purchased from Integrated DNA Technologies. Fluorescently modified DNA oligonucleotides were purchased from Biosynthesis. Biotinylated monoclonal antibodies against β-tubulin (9F3; Catalog number: 6181) and COX IV (3E11; Catalog number: 6014) were purchased from Cell Signaling. Anti-PMP70 (Catalog number: ab28499) was purchased from Abcam. Anti-TGN46 (Catalog number: NBP1-49643B) was purchased from VWR. Streptavidin was purchased from Invitrogen (Catalog number: S-888). Bovine serum albumin (BSA), and BSA-biotin was obtained from Sigma Aldrich (Catalog Number: A8549). Glass slides and coverslips were purchased from VWR. Lab-Tek II chambered cover glass were purchased from Thermo Fisher Scientific. M13mp18 scaffold was obtained from New England Biolabs. p8064 scaffold for microtubule-like DNA origami structures was prepared as described 19. ‘Freeze N Squeeze’ columns were ordered from Bio-Rad. TetraSpeck Beads were purchased from Life Technologies. Paraformaldehyde, glutaraldehyde and TEM grids (FORMVAR 400 Mesh Copper Grids) were obtained from Electron Microscopy Sciences. Three buffers were used for sample preparation and imaging: Buffer A (10 mM Tris-HCl, 100 mM NaCl, 0.05% Tween-20, pH 7.5), buffer B (5 mM Tris-HCl, 10 mM MgCl2, 1 mM EDTA, 0.05% Tween-20, pH 8), and buffer C (1×PBS, 500 mM NaCl, pH 8).
  • Optical setup. Fluorescence imaging was carried out on an inverted Nikon Eclipse Ti microscope (Nikon Instruments) with the Perfect Focus System, applying an objective-type TIRF configuration using a Nikon TIRF illuminator with an oil-immersion objective (CFI Apo TIRF 100×, NA 1.49, Oil). For 2D imaging an additional 1.5 magnification was used to obtain a final magnification of ≈150-fold, corresponding to a pixel size of 107 nm. Three lasers were used for excitation: 488 nm (200 mW nominal, Coherent Sapphire), 561 nm (200 mW nominal, Coherent Sapphire) and 647 nm (300 mW nominal, MBP Communications). The laser beam was passed through cleanup filters (ZT488/10, ZET561/10, and ZET640/20, Chroma Technology) and coupled into the microscope objective using a multi-band beam splitter (ZT488rdc/ZT561rdc/ZT640rdc, Chroma Technology). Fluorescence light was spectrally filtered with emission filters (ET525/50m, ET600/50m, and ET700/75m, Chroma Technology) and imaged on an EMCCD camera (iXon X3 DU-897, Andor Technologies).
  • DNA origami self-assembly. The microtubule-like DNA origami structures were formed in a one-pot reaction with 40 μl total volume containing 10 nM scaffold strand (p8064), 500 nM folding staples and biotin handles, 750 nM biotin anti-handles and 1.1 μM DNA-PAINT docking strands in folding buffer (1× TAE Buffer with 20 mM MgCl2). The solution was annealed using a thermal ramp13 cooling from 80° C. to 14° C. over the course of 15 h. After self-assembly, monomeric structures were purified by agarose gel electrophoresis (1.5% agarose, 0.5× TBE, 10 mM MgCl2, 1× SybrSafe) at 4.5 V/cm for 1.5 h. Gel bands were cut, crushed and filled into a ‘Freeze ‘N Squeeze’ column and spun for 5 min at 1000×g at 4° C. Polymerization was carried out at 30° C. for 48 h with a 5-fold excess of polymerization staples in folding buffer. Polymerized structures were used for imaging without further purification. DNA origami drift markers were self-assembled in a one-pot reaction (40 μl total volume, 20 nM M13mp18 scaffold, 100 nM biotinylated staples, 530 nM staples with DNA-PAINT docking sites, 1× TAE with 12.5 mM MgCl2). Self-assembled structures were purified as described before. DNA origami structures for the 4-“color” in vitro Exchange-PAINT demonstration were self-assembled in a one-pot reaction (40 μl total volume, 30 nM M13mp18 scaffold, 470 nM biotinylated staples, 400 nM staples with docking sites for number imaging, 370 nM core structure staples, 1× TAE with 12.5 mM MgCl2). Self-assembled structures were purified as described before. DNA origami structures for the 10-“color” in vitro Exchange-PAINT demonstration were self-assembled in a one-pot reaction (40 μl total volume, 30 nM M13mp18 scaffold, 36 nM biotinylated staples, 750 nM staples with docking sites for number imaging, 300 nM core structure staples, 1× TAE with 12.5 mM MgCl2). Structures were not purified. Excessive staples are washed out of the sample after immobilization of the structure on the surface. DNA strand sequences for the microtubule-like DNA origami structures can be found in Table 1. DNA strand sequences for DNA origami drift markers can be found in Table 2. DNA strand sequences for DNA origami structures for 10-“color” in vitro Exchange-PAINT demonstration can be found in Tables 3 and 4 for odd and even digits, respectively. DNA strand sequences for DNA origami structures for in vitro Exchange-PAINT demonstration (digits 0 to 3) can be found in Table 5. The scaffold sequence for p8064 and M13mp18 correspond to SEQ ID NO: 882 and 883, respectively. DNA-PAINT imager and docking sequences as well as sequences for surface attachment via Biotin are listed in Table 6.
  • Antibody-DNA conjugates. Antibody-DNA conjugates used to specifically label proteins of interest with DNA-PAINT docking sites were preassembled in two steps: First, 3.2 μl of 1 mg/ml streptavidin (dissolved in buffer A) was reacted with 0.5 μl biotinylated DNA-PAINT docking strands at 100 μM and an additional 5.3 μl of buffer A for 30 min at room temperature (RT) while gently shaking. The solution was then incubated in a second step with 1 μl of monoclonal biotinylated antibodies at 1 mg/ml against the protein of interest for 30 min at RT. Filter columns (Amicon 100 kDa, Millipore) were used to purify the preassembled conjugates from unreacted streptavidin-oligo conjugates.
  • Cell immunostaining. HeLa and DLD1 cells were cultured with Eagle's minimum essential medium fortified with 10% FBS with penicillin and streptomycin and were incubated at 37° C. with 5% CO2. Approximately 30% confluence cells per well were seeded into Lab-Tek II chambered cover glass 24 h before fixation. Microtubules, mitochondria, Golgi complex, and peroxisomes were immunostained using the following procedure: washing in PBS; fixation in a mixture of 3% paraformaldehyde and 0.1% glutaraldehyde in PBS for 10 min; 3-times washing with PBS; reduction with ≈1 mg/ml NaBH4 for 7 min; 3-times washing with PBS; permeabilization with 0.25% (v/v) Triton X-100 in PBS for 10 min; 3-times washing with PBS; blocking with 3% (w/v) bovine serum albumin for 30 min and staining over night with the preassembled antibody-DNA conjugates against β-tubulin, COX IV, PMP70, or TGN46 (conjugates were diluted to 10 μg/ml in 5% BSA); 3-times washing with PBS; post-fixation in a mixture of 3% paraformaldehyde and 0.1% glutaraldehyde in PBS for 10 min; and 3-times washing with PBS.
  • Super-resolution DNA-PAINT imaging of microtubule-like DNA origami structures. For sample preparation, a piece of coverslip (No. 1.5, 18'18 mm2, ≈0.17 mm thick) and a glass slide (3×1 inch2, 1 mm thick) were sandwiched together by two strips of double-sided tape to form a flow chamber with inner volume of ≈20 μl. First, 20 μl of biotin-labeled bovine albumin (1 mg/ml, dissolved in buffer A) was flown into the chamber and incubated for 2 min. The chamber was then washed using 40 μl of buffer A. 20 μl of streptavidin (0.5 mg/ml, dissolved in buffer A) was then flown through the chamber and allowed to bind for 2 min. After washing with 40 μl of buffer A and subsequently with 40 μl of buffer B, 20 μl of biotin-labeled microtubule-like DNA structures (≈300 pM monomer concentration) and DNA origami drift markers (≈100 pM) in buffer B were finally flown into the chamber and incubated for 5 min. The chamber was washed using 40 μl of buffer B. The final imaging buffer solution contained 1.5 nM Cy3b-labeled imager strands in buffer B. The chamber was sealed with epoxy before subsequent imaging. The CCD readout bandwidth was set to 1 MHz at 16 bit and 5.1 pre-amp gain. No EM gain was used. Imaging was performed using TIR illumination with an excitation intensity of 294 W/cm2 at 561 nm.
  • Super-resolution Exchange-PAINT imaging of DNA nanostructures. For fluid exchange, a custom flow chamber was constructed. A detailed preparation protocol can be found in Example 6. Prior to functionalizing the imaging channel with BSA-biotin, it was rinsed with 1 M KOH for cleaning. Binding of the origami structures to the surface of the flow chamber was performed as described before. Each image acquisition step was followed with a brief ˜1-2 min washing step consisting of at least three washes using 200 μl of buffer B each. Then the next imager strand solution was introduced. The surface was monitored throughout the washing procedure to ensure complete exchange of imager solutions. Acquisition and washing steps were repeated until all ten targets were imaged. The CCD readout bandwidth was set to 3 MHz at 14 bit and 5.1 pre-amp gain. No EM gain was used. Imaging was performed using TIR illumination with an excitation intensity of 166 W/cm2 at 561 nm (Ten-“color” Exchange-PAINT with 3 nM Cy3b-labeled imager strands in buffer B, FIG. 5B(iii) and 5B(v)) and 600 W/cm2 at 647 nm (Four-“color” Exchange-PAINT with 3 nM ATTO655-labeled imager strands in buffer B, FIG. 5B(iv)).
  • Super-resolution DNA-PAINT imaging of cells. All data was acquired with an EMCCD readout bandwidth of 5 MHz at 14 bit, 5.1 pre-amp gain and 255 electron-multiplying gain. Imaging was performed using HILO illumination) 1. The laser power densities were 283 W/cm2 at 647 nm in FIG. 3A, 142 W/cm2 at 647 nm and 19 W/cm2 at 561 nm in FIG. 3D. Imaging conditions: FIG. 3A: 700 pM ATT0655-labeled imager strands in buffer C. FIG.
  • 3D: 600 pM Cy3b-labeled imager strands and 1.5 nM ATT0655-labeled imager strands in buffer C.
  • Super-resolution Exchange-PAINT imaging of cells. A Lab-Tek II chamber was adapted for fluid exchange. 2D images (FIGS. 6B and 6C) were acquired with an EMCCD readout bandwidth of 5 MHz at 14 bit, 5.1 preamp gain and 255 EM gain. 3D images (FIG. 6) were acquired with a CCD readout bandwith of 3 MHz at 154 bit, 5.1 pre-amp gain and no EM gain. Imaging was performed using HILO illumination in both cases. Sequential imaging was done as described for the 2D origami nanostructures, but the washing steps were performed using buffer C.
  • 3D DNA-PAINT imaging. 3D images were acquired with a cylindrical lens in the detection path (Nikon). The N-STORM analysis package for NIS Elements (Nikon) was used for data processing. Imaging was performed without additional magnification in the detection path, yielding 160 nm pixel size. 3D calibration was carried out according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Imager strand concentration determination. Optimal imager concentrations are determined empirically according to the labeling density. Generally, a high enough fluorescence OFF/ON-ratio has to be ensured in order to guarantee binding of only a single imager strand per diffraction-limited area. Additionally, a sufficient imager strand concentration (and thus sufficiently low fluorescence OFF-time) is necessary to ensure sufficient binding events and thereby robust detection of every docking strand during image acquisition.
  • Super-resolution data processing. Super-resolution DNA-PAINT images were reconstructed using spot-finding and 2D-Gaussian fitting algorithms programmed in LabVIEW10. A simplified version of this software is available for download at the DNA-Paint website (org suffix).
  • Normalized cross-correlation analysis. Normalized cross-correlation coefficients were obtained by first normalizing the respective reconstructed gray-scale super-resolution images and subsequently performing a cross-correlation analysis in MATLAB R2013b (MathWorks, Natick, Mass., USA).
  • Drift correction and channel alignment. DNA origami structures are used for drift correction and as alignment markers in in vitro DNA-PAINT and Exchange-PAINT imaging. Drift correction was performed by tracking the position of each origami drift marker throughout the duration of each movie. The trajectories of all detected drift markers were then averaged and used to globally correct the drift in the final super-resolution reconstruction. For channel alignment between different imaging cycles in Exchange-PAINT, these structures are used as alignment points by matching their positions in each Exchange-PAINT image. For cellular imaging, 100 nm gold nanoparticles (Sigma Aldrich;10 nM in buffer C, added before imaging) were used as drift and alignment markers. The gold nanoparticles adsorb non-specifically to the glass bottom of the imaging chambers. Drift correction and alignment is performed in a similar fashion as for the origami drift markers. Again, the apparent movement of all gold nanoparticles in a field of view is tracked throughout the movie. The obtained trajectories are then averaged and used for global drift correction of the final super-resolution image. For the dual-color image of mitochondria and microtubules in FIG. 3D-3F, the gold particles are visible in both color channels. The same gold nanoparticles are also used for drift-correction and re-alignment of the different imaging rounds in the in situ Exchange-PAINT experiments (FIG. 6).
  • Transmission electron microscopy imaging. For imaging, 3.5 μl of undiluted microtubules-like DNA structures were adsorbed for 2 minutes onto glow-discharged, carbon-coated TEM grids. The grids were then stained for 10 seconds using a 2% aqueous ultra-filtrated (0.2 μm filter) uranyl formate solution containing 25 mM NaOH. Imaging was performed using a JEOL JEM-1400 operated at 80 kV.
  • Atomic force microscopy imaging. Imaging was performed using tapping mode on a Multimode VIII atomic force microscope (AFM) with an E-scanner (Bruker). Imaging was performed in TAE/Mg2+ buffer solution with DNP-S oxide-sharpened silicon nitride cantilevers and SNL sharp nitride levers (Bruker Probes) using resonance frequencies between 7-9 kHz of the narrow 100 μm, 0.38 N/m force constant cantilever. After self-assembly of the origami structure ≈20 μl of TAE/Mg2+ buffer solution was deposited onto a freshly cleaved mica surface (Ted Pella) glued to a metal puck (Ted Pella). After 30 s the mica surface was dried using a gentle stream of N2 and 5 μl of the origami solution was deposited onto the mica surface. After another 30 s, 30 μl of additional buffer solution was added to the sample. Imaging parameters were optimized for best image quality while maintaining the highest possible setpoint to minimize damage to the samples. Images were post-processed by subtracting a 1st order polynomial from each scan line. Drive amplitudes were approximately 0.11 V, integral gains ≈2, and proportional gains ≈4.
  • In Tables 1-5 below, each oligonucleotide position in a described structure is set forth. Each oligonucleotide position (e.g., n[n]n[n]) in the first column is separated by a comma and corresponds respectively to a sequence identification number in the second column within the same row. Each sequence identification number identifies a corresponding oligonucleotide sequence in the attached sequence listing, incorporated by reference herein. For example, in Table 1, position 0[39]21[39] corresponds to the oligonucleotide represented by SEQ ID NO: 1; position 0[79]1[79] corresponds to the oligonucleotide represented by SEQ ID NO: 2, and so forth.
  • TABLE 1
    Staple sequences for microtubule analog DNA structure.
    Sequence
    Position* Identifiers Description
    0[39]21[39], 0[79]1[79], 0[167]22[168], 0[199]2[200], 0[239]21[231], SEQ ID NO: 1-SEQ Structure
    1[24]18[24], 1[96]17[95], 1[120]1[151], 1[152]19[167], 2[39]23[55], ID NO: 178 Strand
    2[79]23[71], 2[103]3[119], 2[127]31[143], 2[199]23[207], 2[231]5[231],
    3[16]31[31], 3[56]19[55], 3[80]2[80], 3[120]24[128], 3[168]5[175], 4[71]5[87],
    4[135]22[120], 4[207]6[184], 5[16]22[16], 5[32]25[31], 5[52]3[55],
    5[88]23[103], 5[152]4[136], 5[176]22[184], 6[95]4[72], 6[127]8[120],
    6[151]22[144], 6[159]26[160], 6[183]2[184], 6[207]4[208], 6[231]24[208],
    7[16]4[16], 7[48]5[51], 7[80]25[95], 7[112]6[96], 7[176]25[191], 8[39]11[31],
    8[95]12[80], 8[159]10[160], 8[191]8[160], 9[48]25[63], 9[104]24[112],
    9[120]10[136], 9[136]24[144], 9[176]11[191], 9[208]25[223], 10[31]27[23],
    10[55]8[40], 10[95]27[95], 10[135]26[112], 10[159]27[159], 10[183]27[191],
    10[215]10[184], 11[192]26[208], 12[31]29[23], 12[55]28[32], 12[79]11[63],
    12[119]16[120], 12[183]29[191], 12[215]27[215], 13[40]27[55], 13[72]30[80],
    13[104]9[103], 13[144]17[159], 13[168]25[183], 13[216]14[224],
    14[55]16[40], 14[87]28[72], 14[119]15[135], 14[223]30[208], 15[32]29[55],
    15[80]18[80], 15[96]28[104], 15[160]28[168], 16[119]31[111],
    16[143]30[120], 16[191]14[160], 16[207]19[207] 16[239]29[231],
    17[24]14[24], 17[40]18[56], 17[64]14[56], 17[160]31[175], 17[224]31[239],
    18[55]2[40], 18[79]21[79], 18[111]0[96], 18[183]30[160], 18[239]2[232],
    19[56]30[64], 19[96]30[96], 19[168]3[167], 19[192]30[184], 19[208]30[224],
    20[159]21[135], 20[223]21[199], 21[16]1[23], 21[40]4[32], 21[80]22[96],
    21[136]2[128], 21[200]1[215], 21[232]6[232], 22[95]3[79], 22[119]2[104],
    22[143]21[159], 22[167]7[175], 22[183]18[184], 22[207]21[223], 23[56]1[55],
    23[72]24[56], 23[104]5[103], 23[208]22[208], 24[79]7[79], 24[127]9[135],
    24[143]5[151], 24[231]26[216], 25[64]24[80], 25[224]10[216],
    26[159]12[144], 26[207]6[208], 26[239]7[247], 27[96]10[96] 27[112]14[120],
    27[136]7[151], 28[191]15[183], 29[56]15[79], 29[136]27[135],
    29[192]13[215], 29[232]28[216], 30[95]14[88], 30[119]29[135],
    30[183]16[192], 30[207]17[223], 30[223]15[239], 31[112]1[119],
    31[144]19[143], 1[56]0[40], 1[80]19[95], 1[216]0[200], 2[183]19[191],
    5[104]6[128], 8[63]10[56], 9[80]8[64], 11[64]9[79], 11[216]9[239],
    14[159]15[159], 15[184]16[208], 17[96]15[95], 19[128]18[112],
    19[144]19[127], 24[55]7[47], 24[111]7[111], 24[183]6[160], 24[207]8[192],
    25[32]9[47], 25[96]8[96], 25[192]9[207], 27[32]10[32], 27[160]9[175],
    30[63]17[63], 30[79]0[80], 30[159]16[144], 31[32]15[31], 31[176]0[168],
    13[136]12[120], 15[136]13[135] 27[24]13[39], 27[56]12[56], 27[216]12[216],
    28[71]13[71], 28[103]13[103], 28[167]13[167], 28[215]12[184]
    1[56]0[40], 1[80]19[95], 1[216]0[200], 2[183]19[191], 5[104]6[128], SEQ ID NO: 179-SEQ DNA-PAINT,
    8[63]10[56], 9[80]8[64], 11[64]9[79], 11[216]9[239], 14[159]15[159], ID NO: 206 docking site
    15[184]16[208], 17[96]15[95], 19[128]18[112], 19[144]19[127], 24[55]7[47],
    24[111]7[111], 24[183]6[160], 24[207]8[192], 25[32]9[47], 25[96]8[96],
    25[192]9[207], 27[32]10[32], 27[160]9[175], 30[63]17[63], 30[79]0[80],
    30[159]16[144], 31[32]15[31], 31[176]0[168]
    2[9]2[10], 4[15]6[248], 5[232]5[15], 6[247]3[15], 7[248]24[232], 9[240]11[7], SEQ ID NO: 207-SEQ Connector
    11[8]25[23], 13[8]26[240], 14[23]16[240], 15[240]28[8], 17[8]18[240], ID NO: 225 strand
    19[3]0[248], 22[15]21[15], 24[23]7[15], 27[237]13[7], 28[7]27[236],
    30[23]17[7], 31[16]31[15], 31[240]0[240]
    13[136]12[120], 15[136]13[135], 27[24]13[39], 27[56]12[56], 27[216]12[216], SEQ ID NO: 226-SEQ 3′-Biotin,
    28[71] 13[71], 28[103] 13[103], 28[167] 13[167], 28[215] 12[184] ID NO: 234 docking site
  • TABLE 2
    Staple sequences for drift markers.
    Sequence
    Position* Identifiers Description
    0[111]1[95], 0[143]1[127], 0[175]0[144], 0[207]1[191], 0[239]1[223], SEQ ID NO: 235-SEQ DNA-PAINT,
    1[32]3[31], 1[96]3[95], 1[224]3[223], 2[79]0[80], 2[111]0[112], 2[143]1[159], ID NO: 402 docking site
    2[175]0[176], 2[207]0[208], 3[32]5[31], 3[96]5[95], 3[160]4[144],
    3[224]5[223], 4[143]3[159], 5[32]7[31], 5[96]7[95], 5[224]7[223], 6[47]4[48],
    6[79]4[80], 6[111]4[112], 6[143]5[159], 6[175]4[176], 6[207]4[208],
    6[239]4[240], 6[271]4[272], 7[32]9[31], 7[96]9[95], 7[160]8[144],
    7[224]9[223], 8[143]7[159], 9[32]11[31], 9[64]11[63], 9[96]11[95],
    9[128]11[127], 9[192]11[191], 9[224]11[223], 9[256]11[255], 10[47]8[48],
    10[79]8[80], 10[111]8[112], 10[143]9[159], 10[175]8[176], 10[207]8[208],
    10[239]8[240], 10[271]8[272], 12[143]11[159], 13[32]15[31], 13[64]15[63],
    13[96]15[95], 13[128]15[127], 13[192]15[191], 13[224]15[223],
    13[256]15[255], 14[271]12[272], 15[32]17[31], 15[96]17[95], 15[160]16[144],
    15[224]17[223], 16[143]15[159], 17[32]19[31], 17[96]19[95], 17[224]19[223],
    18[47]16[48], 18[79]16[80], 18[111]16[112], 18[143]17[159], 18[175]16[176],
    18[207]16[208], 18[239]16[240], 18[271]16[272], 19[32]21[31], 19[96]21[95],
    19[160]20[144], 19[224]21[223], 20[143]19[159], 21[96]23[95],
    21[160]22[144], 21[224]23[223], 22[47]20[48], 22[79]20[80], 22[111]20[112],
    22[143]21[159], 22[175]20[176], 22[207]20[208], 22[239]20[240],
    22[271]20[272], 23[64]22[80], 23[96]22[112], 23[128]23[159],
    23[160]22[176], 23[192]22[208], 7[56]9[63], 7[120]9[127], 7[184]9[191],
    7[248]9[255], 11[32]13[31], 11[64]13[63], 11[96]13[95], 11[128]13[127],
    11[160]12[144], 11[192]13[191], 11[224]13[223], 11[256]13[255],
    14[47]12[48], 14[79]12[80], 14[111]12[112], 14[143]13[159], 14[175]12[176],
    14[207]12[208], 14[239]12[240], 21[120]23[127], 21[184]23[191],
    1[160]2[144], 4[47]2[48], 4[79]2[80], 4[111]2[112], 4[175]2[176],
    4[207]2[208], 4[239]2[240], 4[271]2[272], 5[160]6[144], 8[47]6[48],
    8[79]6[80], 8[111]6[112], 8[175]6[176], 8[207]6[208], 8[239]6[240],
    8[271]6[272], 9[160]10[144], 12[47]10[48], 12[79]10[80], 12[111]10[112],
    12[175]10[176], 12[207]10[208], 12[239]10[240], 12[271]10[272],
    13[160]14[144], 16[47]14[48], 16[79]14[80], 16[111]14[112], 16[175]14[176],
    16[207]14[208], 16[239]14[240], 16[271]14[272], 17[160]18[144],
    20[47]18[48], 20[79]18[80], 20[111]18[112], 20[175]18[176], 20[207]18[208],
    20[239]18[240], 20[271]18[272], 0[47]1[31], 0[79]1[63], 0[271]1[255],
    2[47]0[48], 2[239]0[240], 2[271]0[272], 21[32]23[31], 21[56]23[63],
    21[248]23[255], 23[32]22[48], 23[224]22[240], 23[256]22[272]
    4[63]6[56], 4[127]6[120], 4[191]6[184], 4[255]6[248], 18[63]20[56], SEQ ID NO: 403-SEQ 5′-Biotin
    18[127]20[120], 18[191]20[184], 18[255]20[248] ID NO: 410 modification
    1[64]4[64], 1[128]4[128], 1[192]4[192], 1[256]4[256], 15[64]18[64], SEQ ID NO: 411-SEQ Structure
    15[128]18[128], 15[192]18[192], 15[256]18[256], ID NO: 418 strand
  • TABLE 3
    Staple sequences for DNA origami structures for 10-“color” in vitro Exchange-
    PAINT demonstration (odd digits).
    Sequence Description
    Position* Identifiers (number)
    0[111] 1[95], 0[143]1[127], 0[175]0[144], 0[79]1[63], 1[160]2[144], 2[47]0[48], SEQ ID NO: 419-SEQ 5, 9
    3[160]4[144], 5[160]6[144], 7[160]8[144] ID NO: 427
    10[271]8[272], 11[160]12[144], 12[271]10[272], 13[160]14[144], SEQ ID NO: 428-SEQ 3, 5, 9
    14[271]12[272], 15[160]16[144], 16[271]14[272], 17[160]18[144], ID NO: 445
    18[271]16[272], 19[160]20[144], 2[271]0[272], 20[271]18[272],
    21[160]22[144], 22[271]20[272], 4[271]2[272], 6[271]4[272], 8[271]6[272],
    9[160]10[144]
    0[47]1[31], 1[32]3[31], 11[32]13[31], 13[32]15[31], 15[32]17[31], SEQ ID NO: 446-SEQ 3, 5, 7, 9
    17[32]19[31], 19[32]21[31], 3[32]5[31], 5[32]7[31], 7[32]9[31], 9[32]11[31] ID NO: 456
    21[120]23[127], 21[56]23[63], 21[96]23[95], 23[32]22[48], 23[64]22[80], SEQ ID NO: 457-SEQ 1, 3, 7, 9
    23[96]22[112] ID NO: 462
    21[184]23[191], 21[224]23[223], 21[248]23[255], 21[32]23[31], SEQ ID NO: 463-SEQ 1, 3, 5, 7, 9
    23[128]23[159], 23[160]22[176], 23[192]22[208], 23[224]22[240], ID NO: 471
    23[256]22[272]
    2[111]0[112], 2[79]0[80] SEQ ID NO: 472-SEQ 9
    ID NO: 473
    0[207]1[191], 0[239]1[223], 0[271]1[255], 1[128]4[128], 1[192]4[192], SEQ ID NO: 474-SEQ Structure
    1[224]3[223], 1[256]4[256], 1[64]4[64], 1[96]3[95], 10[111]8[112], ID NO: 594 staple
    10[143]9[159], 10[175]8[176], 10[207]8[208], 10[239]8[240], 10[47]8[48],
    10[79]8[80], 11[128]13[127], 11[192]13[191], 11[224]13[223],
    11[256]13[255], 11[64]13[63], 11[96]13[95], 12[111]10[112], 12[143]11[159],
    12[175]10[176], 12[207]10[208], 12[239]10[240], 12[47]10[48], 12[79]10[80],
    13[128]15[127], 13[192]15[191], 13[224]15[223], 13[256]15[255],
    13[64]15[63], 13[96]15[95], 14[111]12[112], 14[143]13[159], 14[175]12[176],
    14[207]12[208], 14[239]12[240], 14[47]12[48], 14[79]12[80], 15[128]18[128],
    15[192]18[192], 15[224]17[223], 15[256]18[256], 15[64]18[64], 15[96]17[95],
    16[111]14[112], 16[143]15[159], 16[175]14[176], 16[207]14[208],
    16[239]14[240], 16[47]14[48], 16[79]14[80], 17[224]19[223], 17[96]19[95],
    18[111]16[112], 18[143]17[159], 18[175]16[176], 18[207]16[208],
    18[239]16[240], 18[47]16[48], 18[79]16[80], 19[224]21[223], 19[96]21[95],
    2[143]1[159], 2[175]0[176], 2[207]0[208], 2[239]0[240], 20[111]18[112],
    20[143]19[159], 20[175]18[176], 20[207]18[208], 20[239]18[240],
    20[47]18[48], 20[79]18[80], 22[111]20[112], 22[143]21[159], 22[175]20[176],
    22[207]20[208], 22[239]20[240], 22[47]20[48], 22[79]20[80], 3[224]5[223],
    3[96]5[95], 4[111]2[112], 4[143]3[159], 4[175]2[176], 4[207]2[208],
    4[239]2[240], 4[47]2[48], 4[79]2[80], 5[224]7[223], 5[96]7[95], 6[111]4[112],
    6[143]5[159], 6[175]4[176], 6[207]4[208], 6[239]4[240], 6[47]4[48],
    6[79]4[80], 7[120]9[127], 7[184]9[191], 7[224]9[223], 7[248]9[255],
    7[56]9[63], 7[96]9[95], 8[111]6[112], 8[143]7[159], 8[175]6[176],
    8[207]6[208], 8[239]6[240], 8[47]6[48], 8[79]6[80], 9[128]11[127],
    9[192]11[191], 9[224]11[223], 9[256]11[255], 9[64]11[63], 9[96]11[95]
    4[63]6[56], 4[127]6[120], 4[191]6[184], 4[255]6[248], 18[63]20[56], SEQ ID NO: 595-SEQ 5′-Biotin
    18[127]20[120], 18[191]20[184], 18[255]20[248] ID NO: 602
  • TABLE 4
    Staple sequences for DNA origami structures for 10-“color” in vitro Exchange-
    PAINT demonstration (even digits).
    Sequence Description
    Position* Identifiers (number)
    1[160]2[144], 11[160]12[144], 13[160]14[144], 15[160]16[144], SEQ ID NO: 603-SEQ 2, 4, 6, 8
    17[160]18[144], 19[160]20[144], 21[160]22[144], 3[160]4[144], 5[160]6[144], ID NO: 613
    7[160]8[144], 9[160]10[144]
    21[224]23[223], 21[248]23[255] SEQ ID NO: 614-SEQ 0, 4, 8
    ID NO: 615
    0[111]1[95], 0[143]1[127], 0[79]1[63], 2[111]0[112], 2[47]0[48], 2[79]0[80], SEQ ID NO: 606-SEQ 0, 4, 6, 8
    21[184]23[191], 23[160]22[176], 23[192]22[208], 23[224]22[240] ID NO: 625
    1[32]3[31], 11[32]13[31], 13[32]15[31], 15[32]17[31], 17[32]19[31], SEQ ID NO: 626-SEQ 0, 2, 8
    19[32]21[31], 3[32]5[31], 5[32]7[31], 7[32]9[31], 9[32]11[31] ID NO: 635
    0[207]1[191], 0[239]1[223], 0[271]1[255], 10[271]8[272], 12[271]10[272], SEQ ID NO: 636-SEQ 0, 2, 6, 8
    14[271]12[272], 16[271]14[272], 18[271]16[272], 2[175]0[176], 2[207]0[208], ID NO: 652
    2[239]0[240], 2[271]0[272], 20[271]18[272], 22[271]20[272], 4[271]2[272],
    6[271]4[272], 8[271]6[272]
    21[32]23[31], 21[56]23[63], 21[96]23[95], 23[32]22[48], 23[64]22[80], SEQ ID NO: 653-SEQ 0, 2, 4, 8
    23[96]22[112] ID NO: 658
    0[175]0[144], 0[47]1[31], 23[128]23[159], 23[256]22[272] SEQ ID NO: 659-SEQ 0, 2, 4, 6, 8
    ID NO: 662
    21[120]23[127] SEQ ID NO: 663 0, 2, 4
    1[128]4[128], 1[192]4[192], 1[224]3[223], 1[256]4[256], 1[64]4[64], SEQ ID NO: 664-SEQ Structure
    1[96]3[95], 10[111]8[112], 10[143]9[159], 10[175]8[176], 10[207]8[208], ID NO: 778 Staple
    10[239]8[240], 10[47]8[48], 10[79]8[80], 11[128]13[127], 11[192]13[191],
    11[224]13[223], 11[256]13[255], 11[64]13[63], 11[96]13[95], 12[111]10[112],
    12[143]11[159], 12[175]10[176], 12[207]10[208], 12[239]10[240],
    12[47]10[48], 12[79]10[80], 13[128]15[127], 13[192]15[191], 13[224]15[223],
    13[256]15[255], 13[64]15[63], 13[96]15[95], 14[111]12[112], 14[143]13[159],
    14[175]12[176], 14[207]12[208], 14[239]12[240], 14[47]12[48], 14[79]12[80],
    15[128]18[128], 15[192]18[192], 15[224]17[223], 15[256]18[256],
    15[64]18[64], 15[96]17[95], 16[111]14[112], 16[143]15[159], 16[175]14[176],
    16[207]14[208], 16[239]14[240], 16[47]14[48], 16[79]14[80], 17[224]19[223],
    17[96]19[95], 18[111]16[112], 18[143]17[159], 18[175]16[176],
    18[207]16[208], 18[239]16[240], 18[47]16[48], 18[79]16[80], 19[224]21[223],
    19[96]21[95], 2[143]1[159], 20[111]18[112], 20[143]19[159], 20[175]18[176],
    20[207]18[208], 20[239]18[240], 20[47]18[48], 20[79]18[80], 22[111]20[112],
    22[143]21[159], 22[175]20[176], 22[207]20[208], 22[239]20[240],
    22[47]20[48], 22[79]20[80], 3[224]5[223], 3[96]5[95], 4[111]2[112],
    4[143]3[159], 4[175]2[176], 4[207]2[208], 4[239]2[240], 4[47]2[48],
    4[79]2[80], 5[224]7[223], 5[96]7[95], 6[111]4[112], 6[143]5[159],
    6[175]4[176], 6[207]4[208], 6[239]4[240], 6[47]4[48], 6[79]4[80],
    7[120]9[127], 7[184]9[191], 7[224]9[223], 7[248]9[255], 7[56]9[63],
    7[96]9[95], 8[111]6[112], 8[143]7[159], 8[175]6[176], 8[207]6[208],
    8[239]6[240], 8[47]6[48], 8[79]6[80], 9[128]11[127], 9[192]11[191],
    9[224]11[223], 9[256]11[255], 9[64]11[63], 9[96]11[95]
    4[63]6[56], 4[255]6[248], 4[191]6[184], 4[127]6[120], 18[63]20[56], SEQ ID NO: 779-SEQ 5′-Biotin
    18[255]20[248], 18[191]20[184], 18[127]20[120], ID NO: 786
  • TABLE 5
    Staple sequences for DNA origami structures for in vitro Exchange-PAINT
    demonstration (digits 0 to 3)
    Sequence Description
    Position* Identifiers (number)
    2[47]0[48], 2[79]0[80], 2[111]0[112], 2[143]1[159], 2[175]0[176], SEQ ID NO: 787-SEQ 0
    2[207]0[208], 2[239]0[240], 6[47]4[48], 6[239]4[240], 10[47]8[48], ID NO: 808
    10[239]8[240], 14[47]12[48], 14[239]12[240], 18[47]16[48], 18[239]16[240],
    22[47]20[48], 22[79]20[80], 22[111]20[112], 22[143]21[159], 22[175]20[176],
    22[207]20[208], 22[239]20[240]
    9[64]11[63], 9[96]11[95], 9[128]11[127], 9[192]11[191], 9[224]11[223], SEQ ID NO: 809-SEQ 1
    9[256]11[255], 11[64]13[63], 11[96]13[95], 11[128]13[127], 11[160]12[144], ID NO: 832
    11[192]13[191], 11[224]13[223], 11[256]13[255], 12[47]10[48], 12[79]10[80],
    12[111]10[112], 12[175]10[176], 12[207]10[208], 12[239]10[240],
    13[160]14[144], 14[79]12[80], 14[111]12[112], 14[175]12[176],
    14[207]12[208]
    0[175]0[144], 0[207]1[191], 0[239]1[223], 0[271]1[255], 1[32]3[31], SEQ ID NO: 833-SEQ 2
    4[143]3[159], 4[271]2[272], 5[32]7[31], 8[143]7[159], 8[271]6[272], ID NO: 857
    9[32]11[31], 12[143]11[159], 12[271]10[272], 13[32]15[31], 16[143]15[159],
    16[271]14[272], 17[32]19[31], 20[143]19[159], 20[271]18[272], 21[32]23[31],
    21[56]23[63], 21[96]23[95], 21[120]23[127], 21[160]22[144], 23[256]22[272]
    0[47]1[31], 2[271]0[272], 3[32]5[31], 6[143]5[159], 6[271]4[272], 7[32]9[31], SEQ ID NO: 858-SEQ 3
    10[143]9[159], 10[271]8[272], 11[32]13[31], 14[143]13[159], 14[271]12[272], ID NO: 881
    15[32]17[31], 18[143]17[159], 18[271]16[272], 19[32]21[31], 19[160]20[144],
    22[271]20[272], 23[32]22[48], 23[64]22[80], 23[96]22[112], 23[128]23[159],
    23[160]22[176], 23[192]22[208], 23[224]22[240]
  • TABLE 6
    DNA-PAINT docking and imager sequences and biotin docking sequence
    SEQ ID
    Description NO: Sequence
    Imager P1* 884 5′-CTAGATGTATdye
    Imager P2* 885 5′-TATGTAGATC-dye
    Imager P3* 886 5′-GTAATGAAGA-dye
    Imager P4* 887 5′-GTAGATTCAT-dye
    Imager P5* 888 5′-CTTTACCTAA-dye
    Imager P6* 889 5′-GTACTCAATT-dye
    Imager P7* 890 5′-CATCCTAATT-dye
    Imager P8* 891 5′-GATCCATTAT-dye
    Imager P9* 892 5′-CACCTTATTA-dye
    Imager P10* 893 5′-CCTTCTCTAT-dye
    Imager P11* 894 5′-GTATCATCAA-dye
    Imager P12* 895 5′-GAATCACTAT-dye
    9nt P1 docking site 896 Strand-TTATACATCTA-3′
    9nt P2 docking site 897 Strand-TTATCTACATA-3′
    10nt P2 docking site 898 Strand-TTGATCTACATA-3′
    9nt P3 docking site 899 Strand-TTTCTTCATTA-3′
    9nt P4 docking site 900 Strand-TTATGAATCTA-3′
    9nt P5 docking site 901 Strand-TTTTAGGTAAA-3′
    9nt P6 docking site 902 Strand-TTAATTGAGTA-3′
    9nt P7 docking site 903 Strand-TTAATTAGGAT-3′
    9nt P8 docking site 904 Strand-TTATAATGGAT-3′
    9nt P9 docking site 905 Strand-TTTAATAAGGT-3′
    9nt P10 docking site 906 Strand-TTATAGAGAAG-3′
    9nt P11 docking site 907 Strand-TTTTGATGATA-3′
    9nt P12 docking site 908 Strand-TTATAGTGATT-3′
    Biotinylated P1 docking  909 Biotin-TTATACATCTA-3′
    site for antibody coupling
    Biotinylated P2 docking  910 Biotin-TTATCTACATA-3′
    site for antibody coupling
    Biotinylated P3 docking  911 Biotin-TTTCTTCATTA-3′
    site for antibody coupling
    Biotinylated P4 docking  912 Biotin-TTATGAATCTA-3′
    site for antibody coupling
    Biotinylated docking site for 913 Biotin-GAATCGGTCACAGTACAACCG-3′
    microtubule-like structure
  • REFERENCES
    • 1. Rust, M. J., Bates, M. & Zhuang, X. Sub-diffraction-limit imaging by stochastic optical reconstruction microscopy (STORM). Nat Methods 3, 793-5 (2006).
    • 2. Hell, S. W. Microscopy and its focal switch. Nature methods 6, 24-32 (2009).
    • 3. Hell, S. W. & Wichmann, J. Breaking the diffraction resolution limit by stimulated emission: stimulated-emission-depletion fluorescence microscopy. Opt Lett 19, 780-2 (1994).
    • 4. Betzig, E., Patterson, G. H., Sougrat, R., Lindwasser, O. W., Olenych, S., Bonifacino, J. S., Davidson, M. W., Lippincott-Schwartz, J. & Hess, H. F. Imaging intracellular fluorescent proteins at nanometer resolution. Science 313, 1642-5 (2006).
    • 5. Sharonov, A. & Hochstrasser, R. M. Wide-field subdiffraction imaging by accumulated binding of diffusing probes. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America 103, 18911-18916 (2006).
    • 6. Giannone, G., Hosy, E., Levet, F., Constals, A., Schulze, K., Sobolevsky, A. I., Rosconi, M. P., Gouaux, E., Tampe, R., Choquet, D. & Cognet, L. Dynamic superresolution imaging of endogenous proteins on living cells at ultra-high density. Biophys J 99, 1303-10 (2010).
    • 7. Lew, M. D., Lee, S. F., Ptacin, J. L., Lee, M. K., Twieg, R. J., Shapiro, L. & Moerner, W. E. Three-dimensional superresolution colocalization of intracellular protein superstructures and the cell surface in live Caulobacter crescentus. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 108, E1102-10 (2011).
    • 8. Jungmann, R., Steinhauer, C., Scheible, M., Kuzyk, A., Tinnefeld, P. & Simmel, F. C. Single-Molecule Kinetics and Super-Resolution Microscopy by Fluorescence Imaging of Transient Binding on DNA Origami. Nano Letters 10, 4756-4761 (2010).
    • 9. Tokunaga, M., Imamoto, N. & Sakata-Sogawa, K. Highly inclined thin illumination enables clear single-molecule imaging in cells. Nature Methods 5, 159-161 (2008).
    • 10. Lin, C., Jungmann, R., Leifer, A. M., Li, C., Levner, D., Church, G. M., Shih, W. M. & Yin, P. Submicrometre geometrically encoded fluorescent barcodes self-assembled from DNA. Nat Chem 4, 832-9 (2012).
    • 11. Derr, N. D., Goodman, B. S., Jungmann, R., Leschziner, A. E., Shih, W. M. & Reck-Peterson, S. L. Tug-of-war in motor protein ensembles revealed with a programmable DNA origami scaffold. Science 338, 662-5 (2012).
    • 12. Johnson-Buck, A., Nangreave, J., Kim, D. N., Bathe, M., Yan, H. & Walter, N. G. Super-resolution fingerprinting detects chemical reactions and idiosyncrasies of single DNA pegboards. Nano Lett 13, 728-33 (2013).
    • 13. Ries, J., Kaplan, C., Platonova, E., Eghlidi, H. & Ewers, H. A simple, versatile method for GFP-based super-resolution microscopy via nanobodies. Nat Methods 9, 582-4 (2012).
    • 14. Lubeck, E. & Cai, L. Single-cell systems biology by super-resolution imaging and combinatorial labeling. Nat Methods 9, 743-8 (2012).
    • 15. Wei, B., Dai, M. & Yin, P. Complex shapes self-assembled from single-stranded DNA tiles. Nature 485, 623-6 (2012).
    • 16. Aitken, C. E., Marshall, R. A. & Puglisi, J. D. An oxygen scavenging system for improvement of dye stability in single-molecule fluorescence experiments. Biophys J 94, 1826-35 (2008).
    • 17. Rasnik, I., McKinney, S. A. & Ha, T. Nonblinking and long-lasting single-molecule fluorescence imaging. Nat Methods 3, 891-3 (2006).
    • 18. Huang, B., Wang, W., Bates, M. & Zhuang, X. Three-dimensional super-resolution imaging by stochastic optical reconstruction microscopy. Science 319, 810-3 (2008).
    • 19. Paige, J. S., Wu, K. Y. & Jaffrey, S. R. RNA mimics of green fluorescent protein. Science 333, 642-6 (2011).
    • 20. Hein, B., Willig, K. I. & Hell, S. W. Stimulated emission depletion (STED) nanoscopy of a fluorescent protein-labeled organelle inside a living cell. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 105, 14271-6 (2008).
    • 21. Jones, S. A., Shim, S. H., He, J. & Zhuang, X. Fast, three-dimensional super-resolution imaging of live cells. Nature methods 8, 499-508 (2011).
    • 22. Willig, K. I. et al. Nanoscale resolution in GFP-based microscopy. Nat Methods 3, 721-3 (2006).
    • 23. Stoltenburg, R., Reinemann, C. & Strehlitz, B. SELEX—a (r)evolutionary method to generate high-affinity nucleic acid ligands. Biomol Eng 24, 381-403 (2007).
    • 24. Paige, J. S., Nguyen-Duc, T., Song, W. & Jaffrey, S. R. Fluorescence imaging of cellular metabolites with RNA. Science 335, 1194 (2012).
    • 25. Jaffrey, S. R. Personal Communication. Personal Communication (2013).
    • 26. Fukusaki, E. et al. SELEX for tubulin affords specific T-rich DNA aptamers. Systematic evolution of ligands by exponeential enrichment. Bioorg Med Chem Lett 11, 2927-30 (2001).

Claims (230)

What is claimed is:
1. A protein-nucleic acid conjugate, comprising a protein linked to a docking strand that is capable of transiently binding to a complementary labeled imager strand.
2. The protein-nucleic acid conjugate of claim 1, wherein the docking strand is transiently bound to the complementary labeled imager strand.
3. The protein-nucleic acid conjugate of claim 1 or 2, wherein the protein is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
4. The protein-nucleic acid conjugate of any one of claims 1-3, wherein the protein is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker.
5. The protein-nucleic acid conjugate of claim 4, wherein the intermediate linker comprises biotin and streptavidin.
6. The protein-nucleic acid conjugate of any one of claims 3-5, wherein the antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
7. The protein-nucleic acid conjugate of any one of claims 1-6, wherein the complementary labeled imager strand is a complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strand.
8. The protein-nucleic acid conjugate of claim 7, wherein the complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strand comprises at least one fluorophore.
9. The protein-nucleic acid conjugate of any one of claims 1-8, wherein the complementary labeled imager strand is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides in length.
10. The protein-nucleic acid conjugate of claim 9, wherein the complementary labeled imager strand is about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
11. A target bound to at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate of any one of claims 1-10.
12. The target of claim 11, wherein the target is a protein.
13. A plurality of the protein-nucleic acid conjugates of any one of claims 1-10.
14. The plurality of claim 13, wherein the plurality comprises at least two subsets of the protein-nucleic acid conjugates, and the protein-nucleic acid conjugates of each subset bind to different targets.
15. A composition comprising the plurality of protein-nucleic acid conjugates of claim 13 or 14, wherein at least one of the protein-nucleic acid conjugates is bound to at least one target.
16. A composition comprising:
at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate that comprises a protein linked to a docking strand, wherein the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate is bound to a target; and
at least one complementary labeled imager strand that is transiently bound to the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate.
17. The composition of claim 16, comprising at least two complementary labeled imager strands, wherein the at least two complementary labeled imager strands are identical.
18. The composition of claim 16, comprising at least two complementary labeled imager strands, wherein the at least two complementary labeled imager strands are different.
19. The composition of any one of claims 16-18, wherein the number of complementary labeled imager strands is less than, greater than or equal to the number of protein-nucleic acid conjugates.
20. The composition of any one of claims 13-19, wherein the composition comprises at least 2 different complementary labeled imager strands.
21. The composition of any one of claims 13-20, wherein the composition comprises at least 5 different complementary labeled imager strands.
22. The composition of any one of claims 13-21, wherein the composition comprises at least 10 different complementary labeled imager strands.
23. The composition of claim 22, wherein the composition comprises at least 100 different complementary labeled imager strands.
24. The composition of any one of claims 16-23, wherein the complementary labeled imager strands are complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strands.
25. An antibody-DNA conjugate, comprising a monoclonal antibody linked to a docking strand that is bound to a complementary labeled imager strand, wherein the antibody and the docking strand are each biotinylated and linked to each other through a biotin-streptavidin linker.
26. The antibody-DNA conjugate of claim 25, wherein the complementary labeled imager strand is a complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strand.
27. The antibody-DNA conjugate of any one of claims 1-26, wherein the docking strand comprises at least two domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
28. The antibody-DNA conjugate of claim 27, wherein the docking strand comprises at least three domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
29. The antibody-DNA conjugate of any one of claims 21-28, wherein the thermal stability of a docking strand transiently bound to a complementary labeled imager strand is within 0.5 kcal/mol of the thermal stability of other docking strands transiently bound to their respective labeled imager strands.
30. An aptamer-nucleic acid conjugate, comprising a nucleic acid aptamer linked to a docking strand that is transiently bound to a complementary labeled imager strand.
31. The aptamer-nucleic acid conjugate of claim 30, wherein the complementary labeled imager strand is a complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strand.
32. The aptamer-nucleic acid conjugate of claim 30 or 31, wherein the docking strand comprises at least two domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
33. The aptamer-nucleic acid conjugate of claim 32, wherein the docking strand comprises at least three domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
34. The aptamer-nucleic acid conjugate of any one of claims 30-33, wherein the thermal stability of a docking strand transiently bound to a complementary labeled imager strand is within 0.5 kcal/mol of the thermal stability of other docking strands transiently bound to their respective labeled imager strands.
35. A method of detecting a target in a sample, the method comprising:
contacting a sample with (a) at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate that comprises a protein linked to a docking strand and (b) at least one fluorescently-labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate; and
determining whether the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate binds to the target in the sample.
36. The method of claim 35, wherein the determining step comprises imaging transient binding of the at least one fluorescently-labeled imager strand to the docking strand of the at least one protein-nucleic acid conjugate.
37. The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
38. The method of claim 36, wherein the antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
39. The method of any one of claims 35-38, wherein the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker.
40. The method of claim 39, wherein the intermediate linker comprises biotin and/or streptavidin.
41. The method of any one of claims 35-40, wherein the complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strand comprises at least one fluorophore.
42. The method of any one of claims 35-41, wherein the complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strand is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides in length.
43. The method of claim 42, wherein the complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strand is about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
44. The method of any one of claims 35-43, wherein the sample is a cell or cell lysate.
45. The method of any one of claims 35-44, wherein the target is a protein
46. The method of any one of claims 35-45, wherein the target is obtained from a cell or cell lysate.
47. The method of any one of claims 35-46, wherein the docking strand comprises at least two domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
48. The method of claim 47, wherein the docking strand comprises at least three domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
49. The method of any one of claims 35-48, wherein the thermal stability of a docking strand transiently bound to a labeled imager strand is within 0.5 kcal/mol of the thermal stability of other docking strands transiently bound to their respective labeled imager strands.
50. A method of detecting at least one target in a sample, the method comprising:
contacting a sample with (a) at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates, each comprising a protein linked to a docking strand, and (b) at least two labeled imager strands that are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the at least two different protein-nucleic acid conjugates; and
determining whether the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates bind to at least one target in the sample.
51. The method of claim 50, wherein the determining step comprises, in the following order,
imaging transient binding of one of the at least two labeled imager strands to a docking strand of one of the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates to produce a first image of signal, and
imaging transient binding of another of the at least two labeled imager strands to a docking strand of another of the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates to produce at least one other image of signal.
52. The method of claim 51, further comprising combining the first image and the at least one other image to produce a composite image of signal, wherein the signal of the composite image is representative of the at least one target.
53. The method of any one of claims 50-52, wherein the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
54. The method of claims 53, wherein the antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
55. The method of any one of claims 50-54 wherein the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker.
56. The method of claim 55, wherein the intermediate linker comprises biotin and streptavidin.
57. The method of any one of claims 50-56, wherein each of the at least two labeled imager strands are fluorescently-labeled imager strands.
58. The method of claim 57, wherein the at least two fluorescently-labeled imager strands are spectrally distinct, fluorescently-labeled imager strands.
59. The method of any claim 57 or 58, wherein each of the at least two labeled imager strands comprises at least one fluorophore.
60. The method of any one of claims 50-59, wherein each of the at least two labeled imager strands is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides in length.
61. The method of claim 60, wherein each of the at least two labeled imager strands is about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
62. The method of any one of claims 50-61, wherein the sample is a cell or cell lysate.
63. The method of any one of claims 50-62, wherein the at least one target is a protein.
64. The method of any one of claims 50-63, wherein the at least one target is obtained from a cell or cell lysate.
65. The method of any one of claims 50-64, wherein step of determining whether the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates bind to at least one target in the sample comprises determining whether the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates bind to at least two targets in the sample.
66. The method of any one of claims 50-65, wherein the docking strand comprises at least two domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
67. The method of claim 66, wherein the docking strand comprises at least three domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
68. The method of any one of claims 50-67, wherein the thermal stability of a docking strand transiently bound to a labeled imager strand is within 0.5 kcal/mol of the thermal stability of other docking strands transiently bound to their respective labeled imager strands.
69. A method of detecting at least one protein target in a sample, comprising:
(a) contacting a sample with at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates, each comprising a protein linked to a docking strand and (b) sequentially contacting the sample with at least two labeled imager strands that are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates; and
determining whether the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates bind to at least one protein target in the sample.
70. The method of claim 69, comprising, in the following ordered steps:
contacting the sample with a first protein-nucleic acid conjugate and at least one other protein-nucleic acid conjugate;
contacting the sample with a first labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first protein-nucleic acid conjugate;
imaging the sample to obtain a first image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging;
removing the first labeled imager strand;
contacting the sample with at least one other labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other protein-nucleic acid conjugate; and
imaging the sample to obtain at least one other image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging.
71. The method of claim 69, comprising, in the following ordered steps:
contacting the sample with a first protein-nucleic acid conjugate;
contacting the sample with a first labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first protein-nucleic acid conjugate;
imaging the sample to obtain a first image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging;
removing the first labeled imager strand;
contacting the sample with at least one other protein-nucleic acid conjugate;
contacting the sample with at least one other labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other protein-nucleic acid conjugate; and
imaging the sample to obtain at least one other image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging.
72. The method of claim 70 or 71, further comprising determining whether the first protein-DNA conjugate binds to a first target and/or whether the at least one other protein-DNA conjugate binds to at least one other target.
73. The method of claim 72, further comprising assigning a pseudo-color to the signal in the first image, and assigning at least one other pseudo-color to the signal in the at least one other image.
74. The method of claim 73, further comprising combining the first image and the at least one other image to produce a composite image of the pseudo-colored signals, wherein the pseudo-colored signals of the composite image are representative of the at least two targets.
75. The method of any one of claims 69-74, wherein the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate(s) is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
76. The method of claim 75, wherein the antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
77. The method of any one of claims 69-76, wherein the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate(s) is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker.
78. The method of claim 77, wherein the intermediate linker comprises biotin and/or streptavidin.
79. The method of any one of claims 69-78, wherein each of the labeled imager strands is a fluorescently-labeled imager strand.
80. The method of claim 69, wherein each of the labeled imager strands is a spectrally distinct, fluorescently-labeled imager strand.
81. The method of claim 69 or 70, wherein each of the labeled imager strands comprises at least one fluorophore.
82. The method of any one of claims 69-81, wherein each of the labeled imager strands is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides in length.
83. The method of claim 82, wherein each of the labeled imager strands is about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
84. The method of any one of claims 69-83, wherein the sample is a cell or cell lysate.
85. The method of any one of claims 69-84, wherein the target(s) is a protein.
86. The method of any one of claims 69-85, wherein the target(s) is obtained from a cell or cell lysate.
87. The method of any one of claims 69-86, wherein the step of determining whether the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates bind to at least one protein target in the sample comprises determining whether the at least two protein-nucleic acid conjugates bind to at least two protein targets in the sample.
88. The method of any one of claims 69-87, wherein each of the docking strand comprises at least two domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
89. The method of any one of claims 69-88, wherein each of the docking strand comprises at least three domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
90. The method of any one of claims 69-89, wherein the thermal stability of a docking strand transiently bound to a labeled imager strand is within 0.5 kcal/mol of the thermal stability of other docking strands transiently bound to their respective labeled imager strands.
91. A method of detecting a molecule, comprising
contacting a sample containing at least one target with (a) at least one BP-NA conjugate, each BP-NA conjugate comprising a binding partner linked to a docking strand and (b) at least one labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds the docking strand of the at least one BP-NA conjugate; and
determining whether the at least one BP-NA conjugate binds to at least one target in the sample.
92. The method of claim 91, wherein the determining step comprises imaging transient binding the at least one labeled imager strand to the docking strand of the at least one BP-NA conjugate.
93. The method of claim 91 or 92, wherein the sample is a cell or cell lysate.
94. The method of any one of claims 91-93, wherein the at least one target is obtained from a cell or cell lysate.
95. The method of any one of claims 91-94, wherein the target is a naturally-occurring biomolecule.
96. The method of claim 95, wherein the naturally-occurring biomolecule is a protein.
97. The method of claim 96, wherein the protein is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
98. The method of claim 97, wherein the antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
99. The method of any one of claims 91-98, wherein the target is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker.
100. The method of claim 99, wherein the intermediate linker comprises biotin and/or streptavidin.
101. The method of claim 95, wherein the naturally-occurring biomolecule is a nucleic acid.
102. The method of claim 101, wherein the nucleic acid is a nucleic acid aptamer.
103. The method of any one of claims 91-103, wherein the labeled imager strand is a fluorescently-labeled imager strand.
104. The method of claim 103, wherein the fluorescently-labeled imager strand comprises at least one fluorophore.
105. The method of any one of claims 91-104, wherein the fluorescently-labeled imager strand is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides in length.
106. The method of claim 105, wherein the fluorescently-labeled imager strand is about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
107. The method of any one of claims 91-106, wherein the binding partner is a protein or nucleic acid.
108. The method of any one of claims 91-107, wherein the docking strand comprises at least two domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
109. The method of claim 108, wherein the docking strand comprises at least three domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
110. The method of any one of claims 91-109, wherein the thermal stability of a docking strand transiently bound to a labeled imager strand is within 0.5 kcal/mol of the thermal stability of other docking strands transiently bound to their respective labeled imager strands.
111. A method of detecting a naturally-occurring biomolecule, comprising contacting a sample containing at least one target with (a) at least two different BP-NA conjugates, each BP-NA conjugate comprising a binding partner linked to a docking strand and (b) at least two labeled imager strands that are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the at least two BP-NA conjugates; and
determining whether the at least two BP-NA conjugates bind to at least one target in the sample.
112. The method of claim 111, comprising, in the following ordered steps:
contacting the sample with a first BP-NA conjugate and at least one other BP-NA conjugate; and
contacting the sample with a first labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first BP-NA conjugate;
imaging the sample to obtain a first image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging;
removing the first fluorescently-labeled imager strand;
contacting the sample with at least one other labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other BP-NA conjugate; and
imaging the sample to obtain at least one other image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging.
113. The method of claim 111, comprising, in the following ordered steps:
contacting the sample with a first BP-NA conjugate;
contacting the sample with a first labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the first BP-NA conjugate;
imaging the sample to obtain a first image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging;
removing the first labeled imager strand;
contacting the sample with at least one other BP-NA conjugate;
contacting the sample with at least one other labeled imager strand that is complementary to and transiently binds to the docking strand of the at least one other BP-NA conjugate; and
imaging the sample to obtain a at least one other image, optionally using time-lapsed imaging.
114. The method of claim 112 or 113, further comprising determining whether the first protein DNA conjugate binds to a first target and/or whether the at least one other protein-DNA conjugate binds to at least one other target.
115. The method of claim 114, further comprising assigning a pseudo-color to the signal in the first image, and assigning at least one other pseudo-color to the signal in the at least one other image.
116. The method of claim 115, further comprising combining the first image and the at least one other image to produce a composite image of the pseudo-colored signals, wherein the pseudo-colored signals of the composite image are representative of the at least one target.
117. The method of any one of claims 111-116, wherein the sample is a cell or cell lysate.
118. The method of any one of claims 111-117, wherein the at least one target is obtained from a cell or cell lysate.
119. The method of any one of claims 111-118, wherein the target is a naturally-occurring biomolecule.
120. The method of claim 119, wherein the naturally-occurring biomolecule is a protein.
121. The method of claim 120, wherein the protein is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
122. The method of claim 121, wherein the antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
123. The method of any one of claims 111-122, wherein the target is linked to the docking strand through an intermediate linker.
124. The method of claim 123, wherein the intermediate linker comprises biotin and/or streptavidin.
125. The method of claim 119, wherein the naturally-occurring biomolecule is a nucleic acid.
126. The method of claim 125, wherein the nucleic acid is a nucleic acid aptamer.
127. The method of any one of claims 111-126, wherein the first labeled imager strand is a fluorescently-labeled imager strand.
128. The method of any one of claims 111-126, wherein the at least one other labeled imager strand is a fluorescently-labeled imager strand.
129. The method of claim 127 or 128, wherein the first labeled imager strand and/or the at least one other labeled imager strand comprises at least one fluorophore.
130. The method of any one of claims 111-129, wherein at least one other labeled imager strand about 4 to about 30 nucleotides in length.
131. The method of claim 130, at least one other labeled imager strand is about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
132. The method of any one of claims 111-131, wherein the binding partner is a protein or nucleic acid.
133. The method of any one of claims 111-132, wherein the docking strand is a DNA docking strand.
134. The method of any one of claims 111-133, wherein the docking strand comprises at least two domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
135. The method of claim 134, wherein the docking strand comprises at least three domains, wherein each domain binds to a respectively complementary labeled imager strand.
136. The method of any one of claims 111-135, wherein the thermal stability of a docking strand transiently bound to a labeled imager strand is within 0.5 kcal/mol of the thermal stability of other docking strands transiently bound to their respective labeled imager strands.
137. A method of determining the number of targets in a test sample, comprising:
obtaining a sample that comprises targets transiently bound directly or indirectly to labeled imager strands;
obtaining a time-lapsed image of the sample;
performing spot detection and localization on the image to obtain a high-resolution image of the sample;
calibrating kon·cimager, wherein kon is a second order association constant, and cimager is concentration of labeled imager strands in the test sample;
determining variable τd; and
determining the number of test targets in the sample based on the equation, number of test targets=(kon·Cimager·τd)−1.
138. The method of claim 137, wherein the test targets are protein targets.
139. The method of claim 138, wherein the protein targets are bound to protein-nucleic acid conjugates that comprise a protein linked to a docking strand, and the labeled imager strands are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the protein-nucleic acid conjugates.
140. The method of claim 139, wherein the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
141. The method of claim 137, wherein the test targets are single-stranded nucleic acids.
142. The method of claim 141, wherein the single-stranded nucleic acids are DNA or RNA.
143. The method of any one of claims 137-142, wherein each of the labeled imager strands is a fluorescently-labeled imager strand.
144. The method of any one of claims 137-143, wherein each of the fluorescently-labeled imager strands comprises at least one fluorophore.
145. The method of any one of claims 137-144, wherein each of the fluorescently-labeled imager strands is about 3 to about 30 nucleotides in length.
146. The method of claim 144, wherein each of the fluorescently-labeled imager strands is about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
147. The method of any one of claims 137-146, wherein the time-lapsed image is obtained over a period of about 24 minutes.
148. The method of any one of claims 137-147, wherein the time-lapsed image is a time-lapsed diffraction-limited fluorescence image.
149. The method of any one of claims 137-148, wherein the step of performing localization on the image comprises performing Gaussian fitting on the image.
150. The method of any one of claims 137-149, wherein the step of calibrating kon·cimager comprising calibrating kon·cimager with a control sample with a known number of targets.
151. The method of any one of claims 137-150, wherein the step of determining variable τd comprises determining variable τd by fitting the signal OFF-time distribution to a cumulative distribution function.
152. The method of any one of claims 137-151, wherein the number of test targets is determined with an accuracy of greater than 90%.
153. A method of determining a relative amount of targets in a test sample, comprising:
obtaining a sample that comprises targets transiently bound directly or indirectly to labeled imager strands;
obtaining a time-lapsed image of the sample;
performing spot detection and localization on the image to obtain a high-resolution image of the sample;
determining variable τd; and
determining the relative amount of two or more test targets in the sample based on τd.
154. The method of claim 153, wherein the test targets are protein targets.
155. The method of claim 154, wherein the protein targets are bound to protein-nucleic acid conjugates that comprise a protein linked to a docking strand, and the labeled imager strands are complementary to and transiently bind to respective docking strands of the protein-nucleic acid conjugates.
156. The method of claim 155, wherein the protein of the protein-nucleic acid conjugate is an antibody, an antigen-binding antibody fragment, or a peptide aptamer.
157. The method of claim 153, wherein the test targets are single-stranded nucleic acids.
158. The method of claim 157, wherein the single-stranded nucleic acids are DNA or RNA.
159. The method of any one of claims 153-158, wherein each of the labeled imager strands is a fluorescently-labeled imager strand.
160. The method of claim 159, wherein wherein each of the labeled imager strands comprises at least one fluorophore.
161. The method of any one of claims 153-160, wherein each of the labeled imager strands is about 4 to about 30 nucleotides in length.
162. The method of claim 161, wherein each of the labeled imager strands is about 8 to about 10 nucleotides in length.
163. The method of any one of claims 153-162, wherein the time-lapsed image is obtained over a period of about 25 minutes.
164. The method of any one of claims 153-163, wherein the time-lapsed image is a time-lapsed diffraction-limited fluorescence image.
165. The method of any one of claims 153-164, wherein the step of performing localization on the image comprises performing Gaussian fitting on the image.
166. The method of any one of claims 153-165, wherein the step of determining variable τd comprises determining variable τd by fitting the signal OFF-time distribution to a cumulative distribution function.
167. The method of any one of claims 153-166, wherein the number of test targets is determined with an accuracy of greater than 90%.
168. A single-stranded DNA probe comprising a target binding domain of about 20 nucleotides in length linked to a docking domain comprising at least one subdomain complementary to at least one labeled imager strand of about 4 to 30 nucleotides in length, and wherein the target binding domain is bound to a complementary domain of a single-stranded mRNA target strand.
169. The single-stranded DNA probe of claim 168, wherein the at least one subdomain is transiently bound to the at least one labeled imager strand.
170. The single-stranded DNA probe of claim 169, wherein the at least one labeled imager strand is fluorescently labeled.
171. The single-stranded DNA probe of claim 170, wherein the at least one labeled imager strand comprises a fluorophore.
172. The single-stranded DNA probe of claim 168, wherein the docking domain comprises at least two subdomains, wherein the at least two subdomains are respectively complementary to at least two labeled imager strands of about 4 to 30 nucleotides in length.
173. The single-stranded DNA probe of claim 172, wherein the at least two subdomains are respectively complementary to at least two labeled imager strands of about 8 to 10 nucleotides in length.
174. The single-stranded DNA probe of claim 172 or 173, wherein the at least two subdomains are transiently bound to respectively complementary labeled imager strands.
175. The single-stranded DNA probe of any one of claims 172-174, wherein the respectively complementary labeled imager strands are distinctly labeled imager strands.
176. The single-stranded DNA probe of any one of claims 172-175, wherein the respectively complementary labeled imager strands are respectively complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strands.
177. The single-stranded DNA probe of claim 176, the respectively complementary labeled imager strands each comprise a fluorophore.
178. The single-stranded DNA probe of claim 168, wherein the docking domain comprises at least three subdomains, wherein the at least three subdomains are respectively complementary to at least three labeled imager strands of about 4 to 30 nucleotides in length.
179. The single-stranded DNA probe of claim 178, wherein the at least three subdomains are transiently bound to respectively complementary labeled imager strands.
180. The single-stranded DNA probe of claim 179, wherein the respectively complementary labeled imager strands are distinctly labeled imager strands.
181. The single-stranded DNA probe of claim 179 or 180, wherein the respectively complementary labeled imager strands are respectively complementary fluorescently-labeled imager strands.
182. The single-stranded DNA probe of claim 180 or 181, wherein the respectively complementary labeled imager strands each comprise a fluorophore.
183. The single-stranded DNA probe of any one of claims 168-182, wherein the target binding domain of about 20 nucleotides in length is linked at its 3′ end to a docking domain.
184. The The single-stranded DNA probe of any one of claims 168-182, wherein the target binding domain of about 20 nucleotides in length is linked at its 5′ end to a docking domain.
185. A method of performing drift correction for a plurality of images, wherein each of the plurality of images comprises a frame of a time sequence of images, wherein the time sequence of images captures a plurality of transient events, the method comprising:
determining a time trace for each of a plurality of drift markers identified in the plurality of images, wherein a time trace for each drift marker corresponds to movement of an object in the image over the time sequence of images;
determining, with at least one computer processor, a first drift correction from at least one of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the time traces for the at least one of the plurality of drift markers;
determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images, wherein each drift template in the plurality of drift templates describes a geometrical relationship between the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites of transient events in the drift template;
determining a second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from the plurality of drift templates;
correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the first drift correction and the second drift correction; and
outputting a final image based on the corrected plurality of images.
186. The method of claim 185, further comprising:
identifying a plurality of localizations in each of the plurality of images;
creating a two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations; and
identifying locations of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the two-dimensional histogram;
wherein determining the time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers comprises determining the time traces based, at least in part, on the locations of the plurality of drift markers.
187. The method of claim 186, wherein identifying a plurality of localizations comprises:
identifying a plurality of spots on each of the plurality of images; and
determining a fitted center position of each of the plurality of spots using a local Gaussian fitting algorithm;
wherein each of the plurality of localizations comprises the spot identified on an image and its associated fitted center position.
188. The method of claim 187, wherein each of the plurality of localizations further comprises a detected photon count corresponding to the localization.
189. The method of claim 186, wherein creating the two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations comprises binning all localizations into a two-dimensional grid and using a total number of localizations in each bin as a histogram count.
190. The method of claim 186, wherein creating the two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations comprises binning all localizations into a two-dimensional grid and using a total number of photon count of the plurality of localizations in each bin as a histogram count.
191. The method of claim 186, wherein identifying locations of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the two-dimensional histogram comprises at least one of the following:
binarizing the two-dimensional histogram using one or more selection criteria, wherein the one or more selection criteria include a lower-bound threshold of a histogram value or a upper-bound threshold of a histogram value;
partitioning the binarized image into partitions and filtering the partitions based on one or more selection criteria, wherein the one or more selection criteria include one or more of a lower-bound threshold of an area of a partition area, an upper-bound threshold of the area, a lower-bound or an upper-bound of a longest or shortest linear dimension of a partition longest, and a lower-bound or an upper-bound of an eccentricity of a partition; and
expanding and shrinking the binarized image using one or more binary image operations, wherein the one or more binary image operations include one or more of the following: dilate, erode, bridge, close, open, fill, clean, top-hat, bottom-hat, thicken, thin, and more.
192. The method of claim 185, wherein determining a first drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift markers comprises:
determining a relative time trace for each of the plurality of drift markers, wherein the relative time trace is determined by comparing the time trace for the drift marker with the average position of the same trace; and
determining a combined time trace based on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers;
wherein determining the first drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift markers comprises determining the first drift correction based, at least in part, on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers.
193. The method of claim 192, wherein determining the first drift correction based, at least in part, on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers comprises performing a weighted average of the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers.
194. The method of claim 193, wherein performing the weighted average comprises:
determining a quality score for each of the relative time traces, wherein the quality score is determined based, at least in part, on a measure of variability over time associated with the time trace and/or a measure of localization uncertainty of individual localizations within the time trace.
195. The method of claim 194, wherein the measure of variability over time comprises a standard deviation of the time trace over time.
196. The method of claim 194, wherein the measure of localization uncertainty of individual localizations comprises, at least in part, an estimate of uncertainty from a Gaussian fitting or a comparison with other simultaneous localizations, wherein the other simultaneous localizations are from within a same image and from other time traces from the plurality of drift markers, wherein the comparison comprises a mean and standard deviation of all simultaneous localizations.
197. The method of claim 185, further comprising:
determining that a first drift marker of the plurality of drift markers is not present in at least one frame of the time sequence of images; and
linearly interpolating the time trace for the first drift marker for the at least one frame to produce a smoothed time trace for the first drift marker.
198. The method of claim 185, wherein determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images comprises:
identifying a plurality of localizations in each of the plurality of images;
creating a two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations; and
identifying the plurality of drift templates based, at least in part, on the two-dimensional histogram;
wherein identifying the plurality of drift templates comprises evaluating the two-dimensional histogram using an lower-bound and/or an upper-bound threshold in a histogram count.
199. The method of claim 185, wherein determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images comprises determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites within each of the plurality of drift templates, and wherein determining the second drift correction comprises determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for each of the plurality of marker sites within each of the plurality of drift templates.
200. The method of claim 185, wherein determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for each of the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from each of the plurality of drift templates comprises:
identifying a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites within each of the plurality of drift templates; and
determining a relative time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable drift markers for each of the plurality of drift templates;
wherein determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of drift templates comprises determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers within each of the plurality of drift templates.
201. The method of claim 200, wherein identifying a plurality of geometrically addressable marker sites from each of the plurality of drift templates comprises determining a plurality of marker sites based on, at least in part, a two-dimensional histogram of the plurality of localizations in the corresponding drift template, and/or one or more selection criteria, wherein the one or more selection criteria include one or more of a total number of localizations, a surface density of localizations, and standard deviation of localizations.
202. The method of claim 200, wherein determining the second drift correction based, at least in part, on the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers within each of the plurality of drift templates comprises performing a weighted average of the relative time traces for each of the plurality of drift markers within each of the drift templates.
203. The method of claim 202, wherein performing the weighted average comprises:
determining a quality score for each of the relative time traces, wherein the quality score is determined based, at least in part, on a measure of variability over time associated with the time trace and/or a localization uncertainty within the time trace.
204. The method of claim 203, wherein the measure of variability over time comprises a standard deviation of the time trace over time.
205. The method of claim 203, wherein the measure of localization uncertainty of individual localizations comprises an estimate of uncertainty from a Gaussian fitting or a comparison with other simultaneous localizations, wherein the other simultaneous localizations are from within a same image and from the other time traces from the plurality of marker sites from the plurality of drift templates, wherein the comparison comprises a mean and standard deviation of all simultaneous localizations.
206. The method of claim 185, wherein correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the first drift correction and the second drift correction comprises correcting the plurality images using the first drift correction to produce a first corrected plurality of images, and wherein determining a time trace for each of a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images comprises determining a time trace for each of the plurality of drift templates identified from the first corrected plurality of images.
207. The method of claim 185, further comprising:
smoothing the first drift correction prior to correcting the plurality of images using the first drift correction.
208. The method of claim 207, wherein smoothing the first drift correction comprises processing the first drift correction using local regression with a window determined by a characteristic drift time scale of the first drift correction.
209. The method of claim 185, further comprising smoothing the second drift correction prior to correcting the plurality of images using the second drift correction.
210. The method of claim 209, wherein smoothing the second drift correction comprises processing the second drift correction using local regression with a window determined by a characteristic drift time scale of the second drift correction.
211. The method of claim 185, further comprising:
selecting a single drift marker of the plurality of drift markers; and
determining a third drift correction based, at least in part, on the selected single drift marker;
wherein correcting the plurality of images comprises correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the third drift correction.
212. The method of claim 211, wherein correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the third drift correction is performed prior to correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part on the first drift correction and the second drift correction.
213. The method of any of claims 185 and 211, further comprising:
identifying locations of a first plurality of points in a first image of the plurality of frames;
identifying locations of a second plurality of points in a second image of the plurality of images, wherein the second image corresponds to a neighboring frame of the first image in the time sequence of images; and
determining a fourth drift correction based, at least in part, on differences between the locations of the first plurality of points and the second plurality of points;
wherein correcting the plurality of images comprises correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the fourth drift correction.
214. The method of claim 213, wherein the second image corresponds to a frame immediately following the frame corresponding to the first image in the time sequence of images.
215. The method of claim 213, wherein determining the fourth drift correction based, at least in part, on differences between the locations of the first plurality of points and the second plurality of points comprises:
creating a histogram of distances between the locations of the first plurality of points and the second plurality of points;
determining based, at least in part, on the histogram, pairs of points between the first image and the second image that correspond to the same transient event; and
determining a location offset between each of the determined pairs of points;
wherein determining the fourth drift correction is based on a vector average of the location offsets for each of the determined pairs of points.
216. The method of claim 185, wherein the plurality of images correspond to DNA-based images and wherein the plurality of transient events are binding events between an imaging strand and a DNA docking strand.
217. The method of claim 216, wherein the imaging strand is a fluorescent imaging probe configured to fluoresce when associated with the DNA docking strand.
218. The method of claim 185, wherein at least one of the drift markers is a DNA based nanostructure.
219. The method of claim 218, wherein the DNA based nanostructure is a DNA origami nanostructure with docking strands.
220. The method of claim 185, wherein at least one of the drift templates is a DNA based nanostructure.
221. The method of claim 220, wherein the DNA based nanostructure is a DNA origami nanostructure with docking strands.
222. The method of claim 185, wherein at least one of the drift templates is a three-dimensional drift template.
223. The method of claim 222, wherein the three-dimensional drift template is a tetrahedron.
224. The method of claim 185, wherein at least one of the drift templates includes multiple colors corresponding to different types of transient events.
225. The method of claim 224, wherein the different types of transient events include a first binding event of a first imaging strand with a first type of DNA docking strand and a second binding event of a second imaging strand with a second type of DNA docking strand.
226. The method of claim 185, wherein outputting the final image comprises displaying the final image on a display.
227. The method of claim 185, wherein outputting the final image comprises sending the final image to a computer via at least one network.
228. The method of claim 185, wherein outputting the final image comprises storing the final image on at least one storage device.
229. A non-transitory computer readable medium encoded with a plurality of instructions that, when executed by at least one computer processor, performs a method of performing drift correction for a plurality of images, wherein each of the plurality of images comprises a frame of a time sequence of images, wherein the time sequence of images captures a plurality of transient events, the method comprising:
determining a time trace for each of a plurality of drift markers identified in the plurality of images, wherein a time trace for each drift marker corresponds to movement of an object in the image over the time sequence of images;
determining a first drift correction from at least one of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the time traces for the at least one of the plurality of drift markers;
determining a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images, wherein each drift template in the plurality of drift templates describes a geometrical relationship between the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites of transient events in the drift template;
determining a second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from the plurality of drift templates;
correcting the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the first drift correction and the second drift correction; and
outputting a final image based on the corrected plurality of images.
230. A computer, comprising:
an input interface configured to receive a plurality of images, wherein each of the plurality of images comprises a frame of a time sequence of images, wherein the time sequence of images captures a plurality of transient events;
at least one processor programmed to:
determine a time trace for each of a plurality of drift markers identified in the plurality of images, wherein a time trace for each drift marker corresponds to movement of an object in the image over the time sequence of images;
determine a first drift correction from at least one of the plurality of drift markers based, at least in part, on the time traces for the at least one of the plurality of drift markers;
determine a time trace for each of a plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from a plurality of drift templates identified from the plurality of images, wherein each drift template in the plurality of drift templates describes a geometrical relationship between the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites of transient events in the drift template;
determine a second drift correction based, at least in part, on the time traces for the plurality of geometrically-addressable marker sites from the plurality of drift templates;
correct the plurality of images based, at least in part, on the first drift correction and the second drift correction; and
determine a final image based on the corrected plurality of images; and an output interface configured to output the final image.
US14/908,333 2013-07-30 2014-07-30 Quantitative dna-based imaging and super-resolution imaging Abandoned US20160161472A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14/908,333 US20160161472A1 (en) 2013-07-30 2014-07-30 Quantitative dna-based imaging and super-resolution imaging

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201361859891P 2013-07-30 2013-07-30
US201361884126P 2013-09-29 2013-09-29
US201461934759P 2014-02-01 2014-02-01
US14/908,333 US20160161472A1 (en) 2013-07-30 2014-07-30 Quantitative dna-based imaging and super-resolution imaging
PCT/US2014/048977 WO2015017586A1 (en) 2013-07-30 2014-07-30 Quantitative dna-based imaging and super-resolution imaging

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2014/048977 A-371-Of-International WO2015017586A1 (en) 2013-07-30 2014-07-30 Quantitative dna-based imaging and super-resolution imaging

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/559,490 Division US11536715B2 (en) 2013-07-30 2019-09-03 Quantitative DNA-based imaging and super-resolution imaging

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20160161472A1 true US20160161472A1 (en) 2016-06-09

Family

ID=52432405

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/908,333 Abandoned US20160161472A1 (en) 2013-07-30 2014-07-30 Quantitative dna-based imaging and super-resolution imaging
US16/559,490 Active 2034-10-07 US11536715B2 (en) 2013-07-30 2019-09-03 Quantitative DNA-based imaging and super-resolution imaging

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/559,490 Active 2034-10-07 US11536715B2 (en) 2013-07-30 2019-09-03 Quantitative DNA-based imaging and super-resolution imaging

Country Status (9)

Country Link
US (2) US20160161472A1 (en)
EP (2) EP3027773B1 (en)
JP (1) JP6475718B2 (en)
KR (1) KR20160039229A (en)
CN (1) CN105531377A (en)
AU (1) AU2014296253A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2919833A1 (en)
HK (1) HK1221747A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2015017586A1 (en)

Cited By (20)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160069872A1 (en) * 2013-03-11 2016-03-10 Meso Scale Technologies, Llc Methods for conducting multiplexed assays
US9909167B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2018-03-06 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University On-slide staining by primer extension
WO2018140661A1 (en) * 2017-01-26 2018-08-02 Azure Biosystems, Inc. Devices and methods for imaging biomolecules
WO2018165309A1 (en) 2017-03-08 2018-09-13 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Analyte detection
WO2018183876A1 (en) * 2017-03-31 2018-10-04 Ultivue, Inc. Dna-antigen exchange and amplification
US20190153522A1 (en) * 2016-12-16 2019-05-23 Aratome, LLC Molecular Detection Using Ligation Amplification
US10370698B2 (en) 2016-07-27 2019-08-06 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Highly-multiplexed fluorescent imaging
CN110838134A (en) * 2019-10-10 2020-02-25 北京海益同展信息科技有限公司 Target object statistical method and device, computer equipment and storage medium
CN111830014A (en) * 2020-08-04 2020-10-27 济南大学 Preparation method of chemiluminescence sensor based on polyaniline adsorption of double-stranded DNA
US11092606B2 (en) 2015-08-07 2021-08-17 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Super resolution imaging of protein-protein interactions
US11131630B2 (en) * 2016-09-05 2021-09-28 Abberior Instruments Gmbh Method of aligning a laser-scanning fluorescence microscope and laser-scanning fluorescence microscope having an automatic aligning system
US11331019B2 (en) 2017-08-07 2022-05-17 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York Nanoparticle sensor having a nanofibrous membrane scaffold
US20220162684A1 (en) * 2020-11-11 2022-05-26 Nautilus Biotechnology, Inc. Affinity reagents having enhanced binding and detection characteristics
US20220252514A1 (en) * 2021-02-10 2022-08-11 Star Voltaic, LLC Fluorescent solid-state materials for optical calibration and methods thereof
EP3821251A4 (en) * 2018-07-09 2022-08-24 Ultivue, Inc. Methods for multicolor multiplex imaging
US11536715B2 (en) 2013-07-30 2022-12-27 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Quantitative DNA-based imaging and super-resolution imaging
CN116165187A (en) * 2023-04-23 2023-05-26 深圳大学 Drift correction and screening method based on reference marker and imaging method
US11754562B2 (en) 2016-12-09 2023-09-12 Ultivue, Inc. Methods for multiplex imaging using labeled nucleic acid imaging agents
US11788123B2 (en) 2017-05-26 2023-10-17 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Systems and methods for high-throughput image-based screening
US11959075B2 (en) 2023-03-16 2024-04-16 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Systems and methods for determining nucleic acids

Families Citing this family (29)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10711094B2 (en) 2015-09-10 2020-07-14 King Abdullah University Of Science And Technology Conjugated polymer nanoparticles, methods of using, and methods of making
WO2017049136A1 (en) * 2015-09-18 2017-03-23 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Nucleic acid frameworks for structural determination
CN108603227A (en) 2015-11-18 2018-09-28 卡利姆·U·米尔 Super-resolution is sequenced
DE102015016353A1 (en) 2015-12-16 2017-06-22 Horst Wochnowski PALM method with several only marginally different fluorophores
JP2019513345A (en) * 2016-02-10 2019-05-30 ザ リージェンツ オブ ザ ユニバーシティ オブ ミシガン Nucleic acid detection
US20190120767A1 (en) * 2016-04-26 2019-04-25 Ultivue, Inc. Super-Resolution Fluorescence Microscopy Method Using Improved Drift Compensation Markers
WO2017189498A1 (en) * 2016-04-26 2017-11-02 Ultivue, Inc. Super-resolution immunofluorescence with diffraction-limited preview
WO2017200870A1 (en) * 2016-05-15 2017-11-23 Ultivue, Inc. Multiplexed imaging using strand displacement
CN109891218A (en) * 2016-06-02 2019-06-14 乌尔蒂维尤股份有限公司 Promote the composition and method of the exchange imaging based on antibody
CN116242687A (en) * 2016-11-08 2023-06-09 哈佛学院院长及董事 Multiplex imaging using MERFISH, extended microscopy and related techniques
DE102017104736B9 (en) * 2017-03-07 2020-06-25 MAX-PLANCK-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der Wissenschaften e.V. Method and device for the spatial measurement of nanoscale structures
CN107894411B (en) * 2017-10-27 2020-06-02 上海纳米技术及应用国家工程研究中心有限公司 Method for accurately quantifying structural integrity of DNA folded paper by fluorescence
GB2569283B (en) * 2017-12-05 2021-10-13 Continental Automotive Romania Srl Method and device for adaptively enhancing an output of a detector
EP3498865B1 (en) * 2017-12-14 2020-10-07 Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München Single molecule detection or quantification by means of dna nanotechnology in micro-wells
KR20190108023A (en) * 2018-03-13 2019-09-23 서울대학교산학협력단 Highly sensitive and multiplexeddetection method of biomarkers
CN111971711A (en) * 2018-04-10 2020-11-20 深圳华大智造科技有限公司 Fluorescent image registration method, gene sequencer system and storage medium
CN109030434B (en) * 2018-06-20 2021-08-27 天津大学 Method for detecting content of mycotoxin based on Android platform
ES2945323T3 (en) * 2018-08-17 2023-06-30 Becton Dickinson Co Barcoding by aptamers
KR102195625B1 (en) * 2018-08-28 2020-12-28 주식회사 제이엘메디랩스 Method and kit for detecting target material
CN109255427A (en) * 2018-08-30 2019-01-22 无锡城市职业技术学院 A kind of molecular docking calculation method based on quantum particle swarm optimization
CN109371031A (en) * 2018-11-23 2019-02-22 北京化工大学 A kind of screening technique specifically binding bovine serum albumin(BSA) aptamer
EP3670666A1 (en) 2018-12-20 2020-06-24 Freie Universität Berlin Method for optical imaging a target molecule in a sample, a protein-oligonuleotide conjugate for use in the method and a kit for carrying out the method
CN110364224B (en) * 2018-12-29 2021-06-08 上海北昂医药科技股份有限公司 Chromosome split phase positioning and sequencing method
KR102513569B1 (en) * 2019-03-19 2023-03-24 한국생명공학연구원 High sensitive sensor on transcriptional system
CN110746286B (en) * 2019-11-04 2023-04-07 北京维德维康生物技术有限公司 Eugenol hapten, artificial antigen, preparation method and application thereof
US11932901B2 (en) 2020-07-13 2024-03-19 Becton, Dickinson And Company Target enrichment using nucleic acid probes for scRNAseq
CN113004885A (en) * 2021-03-08 2021-06-22 光华临港工程应用技术研发(上海)有限公司 DNA nano-structure dye for expansion super-resolution imaging and application thereof
EP4092414A1 (en) * 2021-05-19 2022-11-23 Leica Microsystems CMS GmbH Connector, marker and method for analysing biological samples
CN113281320B (en) * 2021-06-07 2022-04-29 江南大学 Method for detecting aflatoxin B1 based on fluorescent copper nanoparticles

Family Cites Families (94)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5424413A (en) 1992-01-22 1995-06-13 Gen-Probe Incorporated Branched nucleic acid probes
US5681943A (en) 1993-04-12 1997-10-28 Northwestern University Method for covalently linking adjacent oligonucleotides
US7569341B2 (en) * 1994-01-31 2009-08-04 Trustees Of Boston University Nucleic acid directed immobilization arrays and methods of assembly
DE4421891C2 (en) 1994-06-23 1996-05-15 Helmut Prof Dr Med Feucht Method for detecting complement-activating IgG antibodies to HLA-DR antigens
US5491063A (en) 1994-09-01 1996-02-13 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Methods for in-solution quenching of fluorescently labeled oligonucleotide probes
DE19709348C2 (en) 1996-05-29 1999-07-01 Schubert Walter Dr Md Automatic multi-epitope ligand mapping process
US6146828A (en) 1996-08-14 2000-11-14 Exact Laboratories, Inc. Methods for detecting differences in RNA expression levels and uses therefor
US6117631A (en) * 1996-10-29 2000-09-12 Polyprobe, Inc. Detection of antigens via oligonucleotide antibody conjugates
GB9622665D0 (en) * 1996-10-31 1997-01-08 Zeneca Ltd Methods
DE19717904A1 (en) 1997-04-23 1998-10-29 Diagnostikforschung Inst Acid-labile and enzymatically cleavable dye constructs for diagnostics with near infrared light and for therapy
US7101672B2 (en) 1998-05-05 2006-09-05 Third Wave Technologies, Inc. Target-dependent reactions using structure-bridging oligonucleotides
US5888778A (en) 1997-06-16 1999-03-30 Exact Laboratories, Inc. High-throughput screening method for identification of genetic mutations or disease-causing microorganisms using segmented primers
US20100081134A1 (en) 1997-07-21 2010-04-01 Mirkin Chad A Bio-barcode based detection of target analytes
US6083486A (en) 1998-05-14 2000-07-04 The General Hospital Corporation Intramolecularly-quenched near infrared fluorescent probes
US7399844B2 (en) * 1998-07-09 2008-07-15 Agilent Technologies, Inc. Method and reagents for analyzing the nucleotide sequence of nucleic acids
JP2002520448A (en) 1998-07-10 2002-07-09 クロマジェン インコーポレーティッド New fluorogenic substrate for hydrolase
US6573043B1 (en) 1998-10-07 2003-06-03 Genentech, Inc. Tissue analysis and kits therefor
US6468785B1 (en) 1999-02-19 2002-10-22 New Mexico State University Technology Transfer Corporation Doped conducting polymers applications and methods
AU3567900A (en) 1999-03-30 2000-10-16 Solexa Ltd. Polynucleotide sequencing
WO2001023610A2 (en) 1999-09-29 2001-04-05 Solexa Ltd. Polynucleotide sequencing
GB0002389D0 (en) 2000-02-02 2000-03-22 Solexa Ltd Molecular arrays
DE10014685B4 (en) 2000-03-24 2004-07-01 Schubert, Walter, Dr. Procedure for the identification of cell-specific target structures
US20020142310A1 (en) 2000-04-07 2002-10-03 Leif Andersson Variants of the human AMP-activated protein kinase gamma 3 subunit
US20020106648A1 (en) 2000-05-05 2002-08-08 Lizardi Paul M. Highly multiplexed reporter carrier systems
WO2001091808A2 (en) * 2000-06-01 2001-12-06 The Board Of Regents For Oklahoma State University Bioconjugates of nanoparticles as radiopharmaceuticals
US6511809B2 (en) * 2000-06-13 2003-01-28 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Method for the detection of an analyte by means of a nucleic acid reporter
US6451588B1 (en) 2000-06-30 2002-09-17 Pe Corporation (Ny) Multipartite high-affinity nucleic acid probes
US20030175852A1 (en) 2000-09-15 2003-09-18 Kalra Krishan L Ehancement of in situ hybridization
WO2002029117A2 (en) 2000-10-06 2002-04-11 Nugen Technologies, Inc. Methods and probes for detection and/or quantification of nucleic acid sequences
US20030044353A1 (en) 2001-01-05 2003-03-06 Ralph Weissleder Activatable imaging probes
US20050230255A1 (en) 2001-03-30 2005-10-20 Sumner Lloyd W Silver destaining method
US7219016B2 (en) 2001-04-20 2007-05-15 Yale University Systems and methods for automated analysis of cells and tissues
US20020173053A1 (en) 2001-04-27 2002-11-21 Bassam Damaj Multiple simultaneous antigen detection by immunohistochemistry
US7473767B2 (en) * 2001-07-03 2009-01-06 The Institute For Systems Biology Methods for detection and quantification of analytes in complex mixtures
WO2003008968A2 (en) 2001-07-19 2003-01-30 Signet Laboratories, Inc. Human tissue specific drug screening procedure
AU2002327046B2 (en) 2001-09-24 2007-11-29 One Lambda, Inc. Diagnostic probe detection system
US8323903B2 (en) 2001-10-12 2012-12-04 Life Technologies Corporation Antibody complexes and methods for immunolabeling
WO2003061711A2 (en) 2002-01-16 2003-07-31 Visen Medical, Inc. Chromophore probes for optical imaging
US20040018495A1 (en) * 2002-07-24 2004-01-29 Xing-Xiang Li Microparticle based signal amplification for the detection of analytes
AU2003291249A1 (en) 2002-12-18 2004-07-29 Aclara Biosciences, Inc. Multiplexed immunohistochemical assays using molecular tags
TWI375796B (en) 2003-04-18 2012-11-01 Becton Dickinson Co Immuno-amplification
WO2005017485A2 (en) 2003-05-22 2005-02-24 Agdia, Inc. Multiplex enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay for detecting multiple analytes
US7279280B2 (en) 2003-09-25 2007-10-09 Mgp Biotech, Inc. Apparatus and method for detecting genetic mutations and single nucleotide polymorphisms
US20050095595A1 (en) 2003-10-29 2005-05-05 Pittaro Richard J. Methods and systems for improving of polymer analysis
CA2545252A1 (en) * 2003-11-06 2005-05-26 University Of Nevada, Reno Improved methods for detecting and measuring specific nucleic acid sequences
WO2006012302A2 (en) 2004-06-28 2006-02-02 Exagen Diagnostics, Inc. Methods for rna fluorescence in situ hybridization
US8153363B2 (en) 2005-01-13 2012-04-10 Progenika Biopharma S.A. Methods and products for in vitro genotyping
US7727721B2 (en) * 2005-03-08 2010-06-01 California Institute Of Technology Hybridization chain reaction amplification for in situ imaging
US20060204999A1 (en) 2005-03-14 2006-09-14 Stephen Macevicz Detecting molecular complexes
US7795009B2 (en) 2005-06-15 2010-09-14 Saint Louis University Three-component biosensors for detecting macromolecules and other analytes
US8956857B2 (en) 2005-06-06 2015-02-17 Mediomics, Llc Three-component biosensors for detecting macromolecules and other analytes
US20070048759A1 (en) 2005-06-10 2007-03-01 Dan Luo Detection of target molecules with labeled nucleic acid detection molecules
US7842793B2 (en) 2005-06-14 2010-11-30 The California Institute Of Technology Methods of making nucleic acid nanostructures
US7494776B2 (en) 2005-07-07 2009-02-24 Beckman Coulter, Inc. Labeled complementary oligonucleotides to detect oligonucleotide-linked ligands
US20070259345A1 (en) 2006-05-03 2007-11-08 Agilent Technologies, Inc. Target determination using compound probes
US20080004185A1 (en) * 2006-06-12 2008-01-03 Antara Biosciences Inc. Three dimensional array
US7838302B2 (en) * 2006-08-07 2010-11-23 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Sub-diffraction limit image resolution and other imaging techniques
US7741045B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2010-06-22 General Electric Company Sequential analysis of biological samples
US20080242560A1 (en) 2006-11-21 2008-10-02 Gunderson Kevin L Methods for generating amplified nucleic acid arrays
WO2008144562A1 (en) 2007-05-16 2008-11-27 California Institute Of Technology A versatile nucleic acid hairpin motif for programming biomolecular self-assembly pathways
JP4940311B2 (en) 2007-11-19 2012-05-30 国立大学法人北陸先端科学技術大学院大学 Photoresponsive artificial nucleotide with optical cross-linking ability
US8309306B2 (en) 2008-11-12 2012-11-13 Nodality, Inc. Detection composition
EP2350657A4 (en) 2008-11-21 2013-06-12 Univ Saint Louis Biosensor for detecting multiple epitopes on a target
DE102008062372B3 (en) * 2008-12-17 2010-06-17 Medizinische Hochschule Hannover Detecting conjugate and method of analysis
WO2010111494A1 (en) * 2009-03-25 2010-09-30 Georgia Tech Research Corporation Single molecule sensitive probes for detecting rna
US9677125B2 (en) 2009-10-21 2017-06-13 General Electric Company Detection of plurality of targets in biological samples
EP2496706A4 (en) 2009-11-05 2013-07-17 Anaptysbio Inc Methods of generating improved antigen-binding agents using chain shuffling and optionally somatic hypermutation
US8586301B2 (en) 2010-06-30 2013-11-19 Stratos Genomics, Inc. Multiplexed identification of nucleic acid sequences
US20120004132A1 (en) 2010-07-02 2012-01-05 Affymetrix, Inc. Detection of Nucleic Acids and Proteins
WO2012051386A2 (en) 2010-10-14 2012-04-19 Meso Scale Technologies, Llc Reagent storage in an assay device
US10024796B2 (en) 2010-10-29 2018-07-17 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Nucleic acid nanostructure barcode probes
US20130184184A1 (en) 2010-11-22 2013-07-18 The University Of Chicago Methods and/or Use of Oligonucleotide Conjugates Having Varied Degrees of Labeling for Assays and Detections
US20120178081A1 (en) 2010-12-31 2012-07-12 Affymetrix. Inc. Methods of Labeling Cells, Labeled Cells, and uses Thereof
US8946389B2 (en) * 2011-04-25 2015-02-03 University Of Washington Compositions and methods for multiplex biomarker profiling
WO2013010023A2 (en) * 2011-07-13 2013-01-17 Aperio Technologies, Inc. Standardizing fluorescence microscopy systems
EP2737356A1 (en) * 2011-07-25 2014-06-04 Mad City Labs, Inc. Active-feedback positional drift correction in a microscope image using a fiduciary element held on a nanopositioning stage
US9115394B2 (en) 2011-12-22 2015-08-25 Roche Molecular Systems, Inc. Methods and reagents for reducing non-specific amplification
WO2014028538A2 (en) 2012-08-13 2014-02-20 William Marsh Rice University Multiplexed in situ molecular analyses and programmable molecular probes for regulated signal amplification
US10584381B2 (en) * 2012-08-14 2020-03-10 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods and systems for processing polynucleotides
WO2014074597A1 (en) 2012-11-06 2014-05-15 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions and methods relating to complex nucleic acid nanostructures
CN104955963A (en) 2012-11-14 2015-09-30 欧凌科公司 Rca reporter probes and their use in detecting nucleic acid molecules
DK2972353T3 (en) 2013-03-11 2023-03-27 Meso Scale Technologies Llc IMPROVED METHODS FOR PERFORMING MULTIPLEX ANALYSIS
US8933261B2 (en) * 2013-03-14 2015-01-13 Andrei POLUKHTIN Benzophenone-based chromophoric crosslinkers and reagents for incorporation of biotin or other haptens into macromolecules
WO2014145620A2 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 The Broad Institute, Inc. Novel hybridization probes and uses thereof
US20160161472A1 (en) 2013-07-30 2016-06-09 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Quantitative dna-based imaging and super-resolution imaging
US10288608B2 (en) 2013-11-08 2019-05-14 Prognosys Biosciences, Inc. Polynucleotide conjugates and methods for analyte detection
US10041108B2 (en) 2013-12-15 2018-08-07 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Methods and compositions relating to optical super-resolution patterning
EP3116889A4 (en) 2014-03-08 2017-08-02 President and Fellows of Harvard College Nucleic acid polyhedra from self-assembled vertex-containing fixed-angle nucleic acid structures
US10294510B2 (en) 2014-03-11 2019-05-21 President And Fellows Of Harvard College High-throughput and highly multiplexed imaging with programmable nucleic acid probes
US20160033411A1 (en) 2014-07-29 2016-02-04 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Methods and compositions relating to storm-based patterning
SG10202004350TA (en) 2014-11-11 2020-06-29 Illumina Cambridge Ltd Methods and arrays for producing and sequencing monoclonal clusters of nucleic acid
US10006917B2 (en) 2014-12-15 2018-06-26 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Methods and compositions relating to super-resolution imaging and modification
KR102557419B1 (en) 2015-08-07 2023-07-19 프레지던트 앤드 펠로우즈 오브 하바드 칼리지 Super-resolution imaging of protein-protein interactions
KR102195625B1 (en) 2018-08-28 2020-12-28 주식회사 제이엘메디랩스 Method and kit for detecting target material

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Gullberg et al.[PNAS 101(22) :8420 (2004)]. *

Cited By (41)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11951483B2 (en) 2013-03-11 2024-04-09 Meso Scale Technologies, Llc. Methods for conducting multiplexed assays
US11059046B2 (en) 2013-03-11 2021-07-13 Meso Scale Technologies, Llc. Methods for conducting multiplexed assays
US20160069872A1 (en) * 2013-03-11 2016-03-10 Meso Scale Technologies, Llc Methods for conducting multiplexed assays
USRE49774E1 (en) 2013-03-11 2024-01-02 Meso Scale Technologies, Llc. Methods for conducting multiplexed assays
US11536715B2 (en) 2013-07-30 2022-12-27 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Quantitative DNA-based imaging and super-resolution imaging
US10006082B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2018-06-26 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University On-slide straining by primer extension
US11926865B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2024-03-12 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University On-slide staining by primer extension
US10017808B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2018-07-10 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University On-slide staining by primer extension
US11634753B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2023-04-25 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University On-slide staining by primer extension
US10982263B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2021-04-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University On-slide staining by primer extension
US11299770B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2022-04-12 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University On-slide staining by primer extension
US10000796B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2018-06-19 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University On-slide staining by primer extension
US9909167B2 (en) 2014-06-23 2018-03-06 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University On-slide staining by primer extension
US11092606B2 (en) 2015-08-07 2021-08-17 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Super resolution imaging of protein-protein interactions
US10370698B2 (en) 2016-07-27 2019-08-06 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Highly-multiplexed fluorescent imaging
US11168350B2 (en) 2016-07-27 2021-11-09 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Highly-multiplexed fluorescent imaging
US11131630B2 (en) * 2016-09-05 2021-09-28 Abberior Instruments Gmbh Method of aligning a laser-scanning fluorescence microscope and laser-scanning fluorescence microscope having an automatic aligning system
US11754562B2 (en) 2016-12-09 2023-09-12 Ultivue, Inc. Methods for multiplex imaging using labeled nucleic acid imaging agents
US20190153522A1 (en) * 2016-12-16 2019-05-23 Aratome, LLC Molecular Detection Using Ligation Amplification
US10781477B2 (en) * 2016-12-16 2020-09-22 Aratome, LLC Molecular detection using ligation amplification
CN110214268A (en) * 2017-01-26 2019-09-06 蔚蓝生物系统有限公司 Device and method for imaging biomolecules
US10989662B2 (en) 2017-01-26 2021-04-27 Azure Biosystems, Inc. Devices and methods for imaging biomolecules
WO2018140661A1 (en) * 2017-01-26 2018-08-02 Azure Biosystems, Inc. Devices and methods for imaging biomolecules
WO2018165309A1 (en) 2017-03-08 2018-09-13 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Analyte detection
EP3592768A4 (en) * 2017-03-08 2021-04-14 The Regents of The University of Michigan Analyte detection
CN110730826A (en) * 2017-03-08 2020-01-24 密歇根大学董事会 Analyte detection
US11279968B2 (en) 2017-03-31 2022-03-22 Ultivue, Inc. DNA-antigen exchange and amplification
US10246738B2 (en) 2017-03-31 2019-04-02 Ultivue, Inc. DNA-antigen exchange and amplification
US11920186B2 (en) 2017-03-31 2024-03-05 Ultivue, Inc. DNA-antigen exchange and amplification
WO2018183876A1 (en) * 2017-03-31 2018-10-04 Ultivue, Inc. Dna-antigen exchange and amplification
US11788123B2 (en) 2017-05-26 2023-10-17 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Systems and methods for high-throughput image-based screening
US11331019B2 (en) 2017-08-07 2022-05-17 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York Nanoparticle sensor having a nanofibrous membrane scaffold
EP3821251A4 (en) * 2018-07-09 2022-08-24 Ultivue, Inc. Methods for multicolor multiplex imaging
CN110838134A (en) * 2019-10-10 2020-02-25 北京海益同展信息科技有限公司 Target object statistical method and device, computer equipment and storage medium
CN111830014A (en) * 2020-08-04 2020-10-27 济南大学 Preparation method of chemiluminescence sensor based on polyaniline adsorption of double-stranded DNA
US20220162684A1 (en) * 2020-11-11 2022-05-26 Nautilus Biotechnology, Inc. Affinity reagents having enhanced binding and detection characteristics
US20230272459A1 (en) * 2020-11-11 2023-08-31 Nautilus Subsidiary, Inc. Affinity reagents having enhanced binding and detection characteristics
US11692217B2 (en) * 2020-11-11 2023-07-04 Nautilus Subsidiary, Inc. Affinity reagents having enhanced binding and detection characteristics
US20220252514A1 (en) * 2021-02-10 2022-08-11 Star Voltaic, LLC Fluorescent solid-state materials for optical calibration and methods thereof
US11959075B2 (en) 2023-03-16 2024-04-16 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Systems and methods for determining nucleic acids
CN116165187A (en) * 2023-04-23 2023-05-26 深圳大学 Drift correction and screening method based on reference marker and imaging method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US11536715B2 (en) 2022-12-27
WO2015017586A1 (en) 2015-02-05
EP3696277A3 (en) 2020-10-21
EP3027773A4 (en) 2017-03-01
EP3696277A2 (en) 2020-08-19
HK1221747A1 (en) 2017-06-09
KR20160039229A (en) 2016-04-08
EP3027773B1 (en) 2020-03-25
CA2919833A1 (en) 2015-02-05
AU2014296253A1 (en) 2016-02-04
EP3027773A1 (en) 2016-06-08
EP3696277B1 (en) 2023-01-25
JP6475718B2 (en) 2019-02-27
CN105531377A (en) 2016-04-27
JP2016532689A (en) 2016-10-20
US20200064340A1 (en) 2020-02-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11536715B2 (en) Quantitative DNA-based imaging and super-resolution imaging
US20230027974A1 (en) High-throughput and highly multiplexed imaging with programmable nucleic acid probes
US20230034263A1 (en) Compositions and methods for spatial profiling of biological materials using time-resolved luminescence measurements
Tong et al. ExM-STORM: Expansion Single Molecule Nanoscopy
Hua Method development for next-generation single-molecule fluorescence technologies
EP4188205A1 (en) Methods of diagnostics

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE, MASSACHU

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:JUNGMANN, RALF;YIN, PENG;DAI, MINGJIE;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:037791/0294

Effective date: 20150213

AS Assignment

Owner name: NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH (NIH), U.S. DEPT. OF

Free format text: CONFIRMATORY LICENSE;ASSIGNOR:HARVARD UNIVERSITY;REEL/FRAME:039536/0124

Effective date: 20160728

AS Assignment

Owner name: NAVY, SECRETARY OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, V

Free format text: CONFIRMATORY LICENSE;ASSIGNOR:HARVARD UNIVERSITY;REEL/FRAME:041479/0764

Effective date: 20160728

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION